initial

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/AliasAnalysis.h

@@ -0,0 +1,598 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/AliasAnalysis.h - Alias Analysis Interface -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the generic AliasAnalysis interface, which is used as the
+// common interface used by all clients of alias analysis information, and
+// implemented by all alias analysis implementations.  Mod/Ref information is
+// also captured by this interface.
+//
+// Implementations of this interface must implement the various virtual methods,
+// which automatically provides functionality for the entire suite of client
+// APIs.
+//
+// This API identifies memory regions with the Location class. The pointer
+// component specifies the base memory address of the region. The Size specifies
+// the maximum size (in address units) of the memory region, or UnknownSize if
+// the size is not known. The TBAA tag identifies the "type" of the memory
+// reference; see the TypeBasedAliasAnalysis class for details.
+//
+// Some non-obvious details include:
+//  - Pointers that point to two completely different objects in memory never
+//    alias, regardless of the value of the Size component.
+//  - NoAlias doesn't imply inequal pointers. The most obvious example of this
+//    is two pointers to constant memory. Even if they are equal, constant
+//    memory is never stored to, so there will never be any dependencies.
+//    In this and other situations, the pointers may be both NoAlias and
+//    MustAlias at the same time. The current API can only return one result,
+//    though this is rarely a problem in practice.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_ALIASANALYSIS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_ALIASANALYSIS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CallSite.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class LoadInst;
+class StoreInst;
+class VAArgInst;
+class DataLayout;
+class TargetLibraryInfo;
+class Pass;
+class AnalysisUsage;
+class MemTransferInst;
+class MemIntrinsic;
+class DominatorTree;
+
+class AliasAnalysis {
+protected:
+  const DataLayout *TD;
+  const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI;
+
+private:
+  AliasAnalysis *AA;       // Previous Alias Analysis to chain to.
+
+protected:
+  /// InitializeAliasAnalysis - Subclasses must call this method to initialize
+  /// the AliasAnalysis interface before any other methods are called.  This is
+  /// typically called by the run* methods of these subclasses.  This may be
+  /// called multiple times.
+  ///
+  void InitializeAliasAnalysis(Pass *P);
+
+  /// getAnalysisUsage - All alias analysis implementations should invoke this
+  /// directly (using AliasAnalysis::getAnalysisUsage(AU)).
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+
+public:
+  static char ID; // Class identification, replacement for typeinfo
+  AliasAnalysis() : TD(0), TLI(0), AA(0) {}
+  virtual ~AliasAnalysis();  // We want to be subclassed
+
+  /// UnknownSize - This is a special value which can be used with the
+  /// size arguments in alias queries to indicate that the caller does not
+  /// know the sizes of the potential memory references.
+  static uint64_t const UnknownSize = ~UINT64_C(0);
+
+  /// getDataLayout - Return a pointer to the current DataLayout object, or
+  /// null if no DataLayout object is available.
+  ///
+  const DataLayout *getDataLayout() const { return TD; }
+
+  /// getTargetLibraryInfo - Return a pointer to the current TargetLibraryInfo
+  /// object, or null if no TargetLibraryInfo object is available.
+  ///
+  const TargetLibraryInfo *getTargetLibraryInfo() const { return TLI; }
+
+  /// getTypeStoreSize - Return the DataLayout store size for the given type,
+  /// if known, or a conservative value otherwise.
+  ///
+  uint64_t getTypeStoreSize(Type *Ty);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// Alias Queries...
+  ///
+
+  /// Location - A description of a memory location.
+  struct Location {
+    /// Ptr - The address of the start of the location.
+    const Value *Ptr;
+    /// Size - The maximum size of the location, in address-units, or
+    /// UnknownSize if the size is not known.  Note that an unknown size does
+    /// not mean the pointer aliases the entire virtual address space, because
+    /// there are restrictions on stepping out of one object and into another.
+    /// See http://llvm.org/docs/LangRef.html#pointeraliasing
+    uint64_t Size;
+    /// TBAATag - The metadata node which describes the TBAA type of
+    /// the location, or null if there is no known unique tag.
+    const MDNode *TBAATag;
+
+    explicit Location(const Value *P = 0, uint64_t S = UnknownSize,
+                      const MDNode *N = 0)
+      : Ptr(P), Size(S), TBAATag(N) {}
+
+    Location getWithNewPtr(const Value *NewPtr) const {
+      Location Copy(*this);
+      Copy.Ptr = NewPtr;
+      return Copy;
+    }
+
+    Location getWithNewSize(uint64_t NewSize) const {
+      Location Copy(*this);
+      Copy.Size = NewSize;
+      return Copy;
+    }
+
+    Location getWithoutTBAATag() const {
+      Location Copy(*this);
+      Copy.TBAATag = 0;
+      return Copy;
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// getLocation - Fill in Loc with information about the memory reference by
+  /// the given instruction.
+  Location getLocation(const LoadInst *LI);
+  Location getLocation(const StoreInst *SI);
+  Location getLocation(const VAArgInst *VI);
+  Location getLocation(const AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI);
+  Location getLocation(const AtomicRMWInst *RMWI);
+  static Location getLocationForSource(const MemTransferInst *MTI);
+  static Location getLocationForDest(const MemIntrinsic *MI);
+
+  /// Alias analysis result - Either we know for sure that it does not alias, we
+  /// know for sure it must alias, or we don't know anything: The two pointers
+  /// _might_ alias.  This enum is designed so you can do things like:
+  ///     if (AA.alias(P1, P2)) { ... }
+  /// to check to see if two pointers might alias.
+  ///
+  /// See docs/AliasAnalysis.html for more information on the specific meanings
+  /// of these values.
+  ///
+  enum AliasResult {
+    NoAlias = 0,        ///< No dependencies.
+    MayAlias,           ///< Anything goes.
+    PartialAlias,       ///< Pointers differ, but pointees overlap.
+    MustAlias           ///< Pointers are equal.
+  };
+
+  /// alias - The main low level interface to the alias analysis implementation.
+  /// Returns an AliasResult indicating whether the two pointers are aliased to
+  /// each other.  This is the interface that must be implemented by specific
+  /// alias analysis implementations.
+  virtual AliasResult alias(const Location &LocA, const Location &LocB);
+
+  /// alias - A convenience wrapper.
+  AliasResult alias(const Value *V1, uint64_t V1Size,
+                    const Value *V2, uint64_t V2Size) {
+    return alias(Location(V1, V1Size), Location(V2, V2Size));
+  }
+
+  /// alias - A convenience wrapper.
+  AliasResult alias(const Value *V1, const Value *V2) {
+    return alias(V1, UnknownSize, V2, UnknownSize);
+  }
+
+  /// isNoAlias - A trivial helper function to check to see if the specified
+  /// pointers are no-alias.
+  bool isNoAlias(const Location &LocA, const Location &LocB) {
+    return alias(LocA, LocB) == NoAlias;
+  }
+
+  /// isNoAlias - A convenience wrapper.
+  bool isNoAlias(const Value *V1, uint64_t V1Size,
+                 const Value *V2, uint64_t V2Size) {
+    return isNoAlias(Location(V1, V1Size), Location(V2, V2Size));
+  }
+  
+  /// isNoAlias - A convenience wrapper.
+  bool isNoAlias(const Value *V1, const Value *V2) {
+    return isNoAlias(Location(V1), Location(V2));
+  }
+  
+  /// isMustAlias - A convenience wrapper.
+  bool isMustAlias(const Location &LocA, const Location &LocB) {
+    return alias(LocA, LocB) == MustAlias;
+  }
+
+  /// isMustAlias - A convenience wrapper.
+  bool isMustAlias(const Value *V1, const Value *V2) {
+    return alias(V1, 1, V2, 1) == MustAlias;
+  }
+  
+  /// pointsToConstantMemory - If the specified memory location is
+  /// known to be constant, return true. If OrLocal is true and the
+  /// specified memory location is known to be "local" (derived from
+  /// an alloca), return true. Otherwise return false.
+  virtual bool pointsToConstantMemory(const Location &Loc,
+                                      bool OrLocal = false);
+
+  /// pointsToConstantMemory - A convenient wrapper.
+  bool pointsToConstantMemory(const Value *P, bool OrLocal = false) {
+    return pointsToConstantMemory(Location(P), OrLocal);
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// Simple mod/ref information...
+  ///
+
+  /// ModRefResult - Represent the result of a mod/ref query.  Mod and Ref are
+  /// bits which may be or'd together.
+  ///
+  enum ModRefResult { NoModRef = 0, Ref = 1, Mod = 2, ModRef = 3 };
+
+  /// These values define additional bits used to define the
+  /// ModRefBehavior values.
+  enum { Nowhere = 0, ArgumentPointees = 4, Anywhere = 8 | ArgumentPointees };
+
+  /// ModRefBehavior - Summary of how a function affects memory in the program.
+  /// Loads from constant globals are not considered memory accesses for this
+  /// interface.  Also, functions may freely modify stack space local to their
+  /// invocation without having to report it through these interfaces.
+  enum ModRefBehavior {
+    /// DoesNotAccessMemory - This function does not perform any non-local loads
+    /// or stores to memory.
+    ///
+    /// This property corresponds to the GCC 'const' attribute.
+    /// This property corresponds to the LLVM IR 'readnone' attribute.
+    /// This property corresponds to the IntrNoMem LLVM intrinsic flag.
+    DoesNotAccessMemory = Nowhere | NoModRef,
+
+    /// OnlyReadsArgumentPointees - The only memory references in this function
+    /// (if it has any) are non-volatile loads from objects pointed to by its
+    /// pointer-typed arguments, with arbitrary offsets.
+    ///
+    /// This property corresponds to the IntrReadArgMem LLVM intrinsic flag.
+    OnlyReadsArgumentPointees = ArgumentPointees | Ref,
+
+    /// OnlyAccessesArgumentPointees - The only memory references in this
+    /// function (if it has any) are non-volatile loads and stores from objects
+    /// pointed to by its pointer-typed arguments, with arbitrary offsets.
+    ///
+    /// This property corresponds to the IntrReadWriteArgMem LLVM intrinsic flag.
+    OnlyAccessesArgumentPointees = ArgumentPointees | ModRef,
+
+    /// OnlyReadsMemory - This function does not perform any non-local stores or
+    /// volatile loads, but may read from any memory location.
+    ///
+    /// This property corresponds to the GCC 'pure' attribute.
+    /// This property corresponds to the LLVM IR 'readonly' attribute.
+    /// This property corresponds to the IntrReadMem LLVM intrinsic flag.
+    OnlyReadsMemory = Anywhere | Ref,
+
+    /// UnknownModRefBehavior - This indicates that the function could not be
+    /// classified into one of the behaviors above.
+    UnknownModRefBehavior = Anywhere | ModRef
+  };
+
+  /// getModRefBehavior - Return the behavior when calling the given call site.
+  virtual ModRefBehavior getModRefBehavior(ImmutableCallSite CS);
+
+  /// getModRefBehavior - Return the behavior when calling the given function.
+  /// For use when the call site is not known.
+  virtual ModRefBehavior getModRefBehavior(const Function *F);
+
+  /// doesNotAccessMemory - If the specified call is known to never read or
+  /// write memory, return true.  If the call only reads from known-constant
+  /// memory, it is also legal to return true.  Calls that unwind the stack
+  /// are legal for this predicate.
+  ///
+  /// Many optimizations (such as CSE and LICM) can be performed on such calls
+  /// without worrying about aliasing properties, and many calls have this
+  /// property (e.g. calls to 'sin' and 'cos').
+  ///
+  /// This property corresponds to the GCC 'const' attribute.
+  ///
+  bool doesNotAccessMemory(ImmutableCallSite CS) {
+    return getModRefBehavior(CS) == DoesNotAccessMemory;
+  }
+
+  /// doesNotAccessMemory - If the specified function is known to never read or
+  /// write memory, return true.  For use when the call site is not known.
+  ///
+  bool doesNotAccessMemory(const Function *F) {
+    return getModRefBehavior(F) == DoesNotAccessMemory;
+  }
+
+  /// onlyReadsMemory - If the specified call is known to only read from
+  /// non-volatile memory (or not access memory at all), return true.  Calls
+  /// that unwind the stack are legal for this predicate.
+  ///
+  /// This property allows many common optimizations to be performed in the
+  /// absence of interfering store instructions, such as CSE of strlen calls.
+  ///
+  /// This property corresponds to the GCC 'pure' attribute.
+  ///
+  bool onlyReadsMemory(ImmutableCallSite CS) {
+    return onlyReadsMemory(getModRefBehavior(CS));
+  }
+
+  /// onlyReadsMemory - If the specified function is known to only read from
+  /// non-volatile memory (or not access memory at all), return true.  For use
+  /// when the call site is not known.
+  ///
+  bool onlyReadsMemory(const Function *F) {
+    return onlyReadsMemory(getModRefBehavior(F));
+  }
+
+  /// onlyReadsMemory - Return true if functions with the specified behavior are
+  /// known to only read from non-volatile memory (or not access memory at all).
+  ///
+  static bool onlyReadsMemory(ModRefBehavior MRB) {
+    return !(MRB & Mod);
+  }
+
+  /// onlyAccessesArgPointees - Return true if functions with the specified
+  /// behavior are known to read and write at most from objects pointed to by
+  /// their pointer-typed arguments (with arbitrary offsets).
+  ///
+  static bool onlyAccessesArgPointees(ModRefBehavior MRB) {
+    return !(MRB & Anywhere & ~ArgumentPointees);
+  }
+
+  /// doesAccessArgPointees - Return true if functions with the specified
+  /// behavior are known to potentially read or write from objects pointed
+  /// to be their pointer-typed arguments (with arbitrary offsets).
+  ///
+  static bool doesAccessArgPointees(ModRefBehavior MRB) {
+    return (MRB & ModRef) && (MRB & ArgumentPointees);
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo - Return information about whether or not an instruction may
+  /// read or write the specified memory location.  An instruction
+  /// that doesn't read or write memory may be trivially LICM'd for example.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const Instruction *I,
+                             const Location &Loc) {
+    switch (I->getOpcode()) {
+    case Instruction::VAArg:  return getModRefInfo((const VAArgInst*)I, Loc);
+    case Instruction::Load:   return getModRefInfo((const LoadInst*)I,  Loc);
+    case Instruction::Store:  return getModRefInfo((const StoreInst*)I, Loc);
+    case Instruction::Fence:  return getModRefInfo((const FenceInst*)I, Loc);
+    case Instruction::AtomicCmpXchg:
+      return getModRefInfo((const AtomicCmpXchgInst*)I, Loc);
+    case Instruction::AtomicRMW:
+      return getModRefInfo((const AtomicRMWInst*)I, Loc);
+    case Instruction::Call:   return getModRefInfo((const CallInst*)I,  Loc);
+    case Instruction::Invoke: return getModRefInfo((const InvokeInst*)I,Loc);
+    default:                  return NoModRef;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const Instruction *I,
+                             const Value *P, uint64_t Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(I, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for call sites) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular call site modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  virtual ModRefResult getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite CS,
+                                     const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for call sites) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite CS,
+                             const Value *P, uint64_t Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(CS, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for calls) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular call modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const CallInst *C, const Location &Loc) {
+    return getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite(C), Loc);
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for calls) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const CallInst *C, const Value *P, uint64_t Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(C, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for invokes) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular invoke modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const InvokeInst *I,
+                             const Location &Loc) {
+    return getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite(I), Loc);
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for invokes) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const InvokeInst *I,
+                             const Value *P, uint64_t Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(I, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for loads) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular load modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const LoadInst *L, const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for loads) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const LoadInst *L, const Value *P, uint64_t Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(L, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for stores) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular store modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const StoreInst *S, const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for stores) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const StoreInst *S, const Value *P, uint64_t Size){
+    return getModRefInfo(S, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for fences) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular store modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const FenceInst *S, const Location &Loc) {
+    // Conservatively correct.  (We could possibly be a bit smarter if
+    // Loc is a alloca that doesn't escape.)
+    return ModRef;
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for fences) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const FenceInst *S, const Value *P, uint64_t Size){
+    return getModRefInfo(S, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for cmpxchges) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular cmpxchg modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const AtomicCmpXchgInst *CX, const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for cmpxchges) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const AtomicCmpXchgInst *CX,
+                             const Value *P, unsigned Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(CX, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for atomicrmws) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular atomicrmw modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const AtomicRMWInst *RMW, const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for atomicrmws) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const AtomicRMWInst *RMW,
+                             const Value *P, unsigned Size) {
+    return getModRefInfo(RMW, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for va_args) - Return information about whether
+  /// a particular va_arg modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const VAArgInst* I, const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// getModRefInfo (for va_args) - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult getModRefInfo(const VAArgInst* I, const Value* P, uint64_t Size){
+    return getModRefInfo(I, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// getModRefInfo - Return information about whether two call sites may refer
+  /// to the same set of memory locations.  See 
+  ///   http://llvm.org/docs/AliasAnalysis.html#ModRefInfo
+  /// for details.
+  virtual ModRefResult getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite CS1,
+                                     ImmutableCallSite CS2);
+
+  /// callCapturesBefore - Return information about whether a particular call 
+  /// site modifies or reads the specified memory location.
+  ModRefResult callCapturesBefore(const Instruction *I,
+                                  const AliasAnalysis::Location &MemLoc,
+                                  DominatorTree *DT);
+
+  /// callCapturesBefore - A convenience wrapper.
+  ModRefResult callCapturesBefore(const Instruction *I, const Value *P,
+                                  uint64_t Size, DominatorTree *DT) {
+    return callCapturesBefore(I, Location(P, Size), DT);
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// Higher level methods for querying mod/ref information.
+  ///
+
+  /// canBasicBlockModify - Return true if it is possible for execution of the
+  /// specified basic block to modify the value pointed to by Ptr.
+  bool canBasicBlockModify(const BasicBlock &BB, const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// canBasicBlockModify - A convenience wrapper.
+  bool canBasicBlockModify(const BasicBlock &BB, const Value *P, uint64_t Size){
+    return canBasicBlockModify(BB, Location(P, Size));
+  }
+
+  /// canInstructionRangeModify - Return true if it is possible for the
+  /// execution of the specified instructions to modify the value pointed to by
+  /// Ptr.  The instructions to consider are all of the instructions in the
+  /// range of [I1,I2] INCLUSIVE.  I1 and I2 must be in the same basic block.
+  bool canInstructionRangeModify(const Instruction &I1, const Instruction &I2,
+                                 const Location &Loc);
+
+  /// canInstructionRangeModify - A convenience wrapper.
+  bool canInstructionRangeModify(const Instruction &I1, const Instruction &I2,
+                                 const Value *Ptr, uint64_t Size) {
+    return canInstructionRangeModify(I1, I2, Location(Ptr, Size));
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// Methods that clients should call when they transform the program to allow
+  /// alias analyses to update their internal data structures.  Note that these
+  /// methods may be called on any instruction, regardless of whether or not
+  /// they have pointer-analysis implications.
+  ///
+
+  /// deleteValue - This method should be called whenever an LLVM Value is
+  /// deleted from the program, for example when an instruction is found to be
+  /// redundant and is eliminated.
+  ///
+  virtual void deleteValue(Value *V);
+
+  /// copyValue - This method should be used whenever a preexisting value in the
+  /// program is copied or cloned, introducing a new value.  Note that analysis
+  /// implementations should tolerate clients that use this method to introduce
+  /// the same value multiple times: if the analysis already knows about a
+  /// value, it should ignore the request.
+  ///
+  virtual void copyValue(Value *From, Value *To);
+
+  /// addEscapingUse - This method should be used whenever an escaping use is
+  /// added to a pointer value.  Analysis implementations may either return
+  /// conservative responses for that value in the future, or may recompute
+  /// some or all internal state to continue providing precise responses.
+  ///
+  /// Escaping uses are considered by anything _except_ the following:
+  ///  - GEPs or bitcasts of the pointer
+  ///  - Loads through the pointer
+  ///  - Stores through (but not of) the pointer
+  virtual void addEscapingUse(Use &U);
+
+  /// replaceWithNewValue - This method is the obvious combination of the two
+  /// above, and it provided as a helper to simplify client code.
+  ///
+  void replaceWithNewValue(Value *Old, Value *New) {
+    copyValue(Old, New);
+    deleteValue(Old);
+  }
+};
+
+// Specialize DenseMapInfo for Location.
+template<>
+struct DenseMapInfo<AliasAnalysis::Location> {
+  static inline AliasAnalysis::Location getEmptyKey() {
+    return
+      AliasAnalysis::Location(DenseMapInfo<const Value *>::getEmptyKey(),
+                              0, 0);
+  }
+  static inline AliasAnalysis::Location getTombstoneKey() {
+    return
+      AliasAnalysis::Location(DenseMapInfo<const Value *>::getTombstoneKey(),
+                              0, 0);
+  }
+  static unsigned getHashValue(const AliasAnalysis::Location &Val) {
+    return DenseMapInfo<const Value *>::getHashValue(Val.Ptr) ^
+           DenseMapInfo<uint64_t>::getHashValue(Val.Size) ^
+           DenseMapInfo<const MDNode *>::getHashValue(Val.TBAATag);
+  }
+  static bool isEqual(const AliasAnalysis::Location &LHS,
+                      const AliasAnalysis::Location &RHS) {
+    return LHS.Ptr == RHS.Ptr &&
+           LHS.Size == RHS.Size &&
+           LHS.TBAATag == RHS.TBAATag;
+  }
+};
+
+/// isNoAliasCall - Return true if this pointer is returned by a noalias
+/// function.
+bool isNoAliasCall(const Value *V);
+
+/// isIdentifiedObject - Return true if this pointer refers to a distinct and
+/// identifiable object.  This returns true for:
+///    Global Variables and Functions (but not Global Aliases)
+///    Allocas
+///    ByVal and NoAlias Arguments
+///    NoAlias returns (e.g. calls to malloc)
+///
+bool isIdentifiedObject(const Value *V);
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/AliasSetTracker.h

@@ -0,0 +1,437 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/AliasSetTracker.h - Build Alias Sets -------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines two classes: AliasSetTracker and AliasSet.  These interface
+// are used to classify a collection of pointer references into a maximal number
+// of disjoint sets.  Each AliasSet object constructed by the AliasSetTracker
+// object refers to memory disjoint from the other sets.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_ALIASSETTRACKER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_ALIASSETTRACKER_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist_node.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class AliasAnalysis;
+class LoadInst;
+class StoreInst;
+class VAArgInst;
+class AliasSetTracker;
+class AliasSet;
+
+class AliasSet : public ilist_node<AliasSet> {
+  friend class AliasSetTracker;
+
+  class PointerRec {
+    Value *Val;  // The pointer this record corresponds to.
+    PointerRec **PrevInList, *NextInList;
+    AliasSet *AS;
+    uint64_t Size;
+    const MDNode *TBAAInfo;
+  public:
+    PointerRec(Value *V)
+      : Val(V), PrevInList(0), NextInList(0), AS(0), Size(0),
+        TBAAInfo(DenseMapInfo<const MDNode *>::getEmptyKey()) {}
+
+    Value *getValue() const { return Val; }
+    
+    PointerRec *getNext() const { return NextInList; }
+    bool hasAliasSet() const { return AS != 0; }
+
+    PointerRec** setPrevInList(PointerRec **PIL) {
+      PrevInList = PIL;
+      return &NextInList;
+    }
+
+    void updateSizeAndTBAAInfo(uint64_t NewSize, const MDNode *NewTBAAInfo) {
+      if (NewSize > Size) Size = NewSize;
+
+      if (TBAAInfo == DenseMapInfo<const MDNode *>::getEmptyKey())
+        // We don't have a TBAAInfo yet. Set it to NewTBAAInfo.
+        TBAAInfo = NewTBAAInfo;
+      else if (TBAAInfo != NewTBAAInfo)
+        // NewTBAAInfo conflicts with TBAAInfo.
+        TBAAInfo = DenseMapInfo<const MDNode *>::getTombstoneKey();
+    }
+
+    uint64_t getSize() const { return Size; }
+
+    /// getTBAAInfo - Return the TBAAInfo, or null if there is no
+    /// information or conflicting information.
+    const MDNode *getTBAAInfo() const {
+      // If we have missing or conflicting TBAAInfo, return null.
+      if (TBAAInfo == DenseMapInfo<const MDNode *>::getEmptyKey() ||
+          TBAAInfo == DenseMapInfo<const MDNode *>::getTombstoneKey())
+        return 0;
+      return TBAAInfo;
+    }
+
+    AliasSet *getAliasSet(AliasSetTracker &AST) {
+      assert(AS && "No AliasSet yet!");
+      if (AS->Forward) {
+        AliasSet *OldAS = AS;
+        AS = OldAS->getForwardedTarget(AST);
+        AS->addRef();
+        OldAS->dropRef(AST);
+      }
+      return AS;
+    }
+
+    void setAliasSet(AliasSet *as) {
+      assert(AS == 0 && "Already have an alias set!");
+      AS = as;
+    }
+
+    void eraseFromList() {
+      if (NextInList) NextInList->PrevInList = PrevInList;
+      *PrevInList = NextInList;
+      if (AS->PtrListEnd == &NextInList) {
+        AS->PtrListEnd = PrevInList;
+        assert(*AS->PtrListEnd == 0 && "List not terminated right!");
+      }
+      delete this;
+    }
+  };
+
+  PointerRec *PtrList, **PtrListEnd;  // Doubly linked list of nodes.
+  AliasSet *Forward;             // Forwarding pointer.
+
+  // All instructions without a specific address in this alias set.
+  std::vector<AssertingVH<Instruction> > UnknownInsts;
+
+  // RefCount - Number of nodes pointing to this AliasSet plus the number of
+  // AliasSets forwarding to it.
+  unsigned RefCount : 28;
+
+  /// AccessType - Keep track of whether this alias set merely refers to the
+  /// locations of memory, whether it modifies the memory, or whether it does
+  /// both.  The lattice goes from "NoModRef" to either Refs or Mods, then to
+  /// ModRef as necessary.
+  ///
+  enum AccessType {
+    NoModRef = 0, Refs = 1,         // Ref = bit 1
+    Mods     = 2, ModRef = 3        // Mod = bit 2
+  };
+  unsigned AccessTy : 2;
+
+  /// AliasType - Keep track the relationships between the pointers in the set.
+  /// Lattice goes from MustAlias to MayAlias.
+  ///
+  enum AliasType {
+    MustAlias = 0, MayAlias = 1
+  };
+  unsigned AliasTy : 1;
+
+  // Volatile - True if this alias set contains volatile loads or stores.
+  bool Volatile : 1;
+
+  void addRef() { ++RefCount; }
+  void dropRef(AliasSetTracker &AST) {
+    assert(RefCount >= 1 && "Invalid reference count detected!");
+    if (--RefCount == 0)
+      removeFromTracker(AST);
+  }
+
+  Instruction *getUnknownInst(unsigned i) const {
+    assert(i < UnknownInsts.size());
+    return UnknownInsts[i];
+  }
+  
+public:
+  /// Accessors...
+  bool isRef() const { return AccessTy & Refs; }
+  bool isMod() const { return AccessTy & Mods; }
+  bool isMustAlias() const { return AliasTy == MustAlias; }
+  bool isMayAlias()  const { return AliasTy == MayAlias; }
+
+  // isVolatile - Return true if this alias set contains volatile loads or
+  // stores.
+  bool isVolatile() const { return Volatile; }
+
+  /// isForwardingAliasSet - Return true if this alias set should be ignored as
+  /// part of the AliasSetTracker object.
+  bool isForwardingAliasSet() const { return Forward; }
+
+  /// mergeSetIn - Merge the specified alias set into this alias set...
+  ///
+  void mergeSetIn(AliasSet &AS, AliasSetTracker &AST);
+
+  // Alias Set iteration - Allow access to all of the pointer which are part of
+  // this alias set...
+  class iterator;
+  iterator begin() const { return iterator(PtrList); }
+  iterator end()   const { return iterator(); }
+  bool empty() const { return PtrList == 0; }
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+  void dump() const;
+
+  /// Define an iterator for alias sets... this is just a forward iterator.
+  class iterator : public std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag,
+                                        PointerRec, ptrdiff_t> {
+    PointerRec *CurNode;
+  public:
+    explicit iterator(PointerRec *CN = 0) : CurNode(CN) {}
+
+    bool operator==(const iterator& x) const {
+      return CurNode == x.CurNode;
+    }
+    bool operator!=(const iterator& x) const { return !operator==(x); }
+
+    const iterator &operator=(const iterator &I) {
+      CurNode = I.CurNode;
+      return *this;
+    }
+
+    value_type &operator*() const {
+      assert(CurNode && "Dereferencing AliasSet.end()!");
+      return *CurNode;
+    }
+    value_type *operator->() const { return &operator*(); }
+
+    Value *getPointer() const { return CurNode->getValue(); }
+    uint64_t getSize() const { return CurNode->getSize(); }
+    const MDNode *getTBAAInfo() const { return CurNode->getTBAAInfo(); }
+
+    iterator& operator++() {                // Preincrement
+      assert(CurNode && "Advancing past AliasSet.end()!");
+      CurNode = CurNode->getNext();
+      return *this;
+    }
+    iterator operator++(int) { // Postincrement
+      iterator tmp = *this; ++*this; return tmp;
+    }
+  };
+
+private:
+  // Can only be created by AliasSetTracker. Also, ilist creates one
+  // to serve as a sentinel.
+  friend struct ilist_sentinel_traits<AliasSet>;
+  AliasSet() : PtrList(0), PtrListEnd(&PtrList), Forward(0), RefCount(0),
+               AccessTy(NoModRef), AliasTy(MustAlias), Volatile(false) {
+  }
+
+  AliasSet(const AliasSet &AS) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const AliasSet &AS) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  PointerRec *getSomePointer() const {
+    return PtrList;
+  }
+
+  /// getForwardedTarget - Return the real alias set this represents.  If this
+  /// has been merged with another set and is forwarding, return the ultimate
+  /// destination set.  This also implements the union-find collapsing as well.
+  AliasSet *getForwardedTarget(AliasSetTracker &AST) {
+    if (!Forward) return this;
+
+    AliasSet *Dest = Forward->getForwardedTarget(AST);
+    if (Dest != Forward) {
+      Dest->addRef();
+      Forward->dropRef(AST);
+      Forward = Dest;
+    }
+    return Dest;
+  }
+
+  void removeFromTracker(AliasSetTracker &AST);
+
+  void addPointer(AliasSetTracker &AST, PointerRec &Entry, uint64_t Size,
+                  const MDNode *TBAAInfo,
+                  bool KnownMustAlias = false);
+  void addUnknownInst(Instruction *I, AliasAnalysis &AA);
+  void removeUnknownInst(Instruction *I) {
+    for (size_t i = 0, e = UnknownInsts.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      if (UnknownInsts[i] == I) {
+        UnknownInsts[i] = UnknownInsts.back();
+        UnknownInsts.pop_back();
+        --i; --e;  // Revisit the moved entry.
+      }
+  }
+  void setVolatile() { Volatile = true; }
+
+public:
+  /// aliasesPointer - Return true if the specified pointer "may" (or must)
+  /// alias one of the members in the set.
+  ///
+  bool aliasesPointer(const Value *Ptr, uint64_t Size, const MDNode *TBAAInfo,
+                      AliasAnalysis &AA) const;
+  bool aliasesUnknownInst(Instruction *Inst, AliasAnalysis &AA) const;
+};
+
+inline raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const AliasSet &AS) {
+  AS.print(OS);
+  return OS;
+}
+
+
+class AliasSetTracker {
+  /// CallbackVH - A CallbackVH to arrange for AliasSetTracker to be
+  /// notified whenever a Value is deleted.
+  class ASTCallbackVH : public CallbackVH {
+    AliasSetTracker *AST;
+    virtual void deleted();
+    virtual void allUsesReplacedWith(Value *);
+  public:
+    ASTCallbackVH(Value *V, AliasSetTracker *AST = 0);
+    ASTCallbackVH &operator=(Value *V);
+  };
+  /// ASTCallbackVHDenseMapInfo - Traits to tell DenseMap that tell us how to
+  /// compare and hash the value handle.
+  struct ASTCallbackVHDenseMapInfo : public DenseMapInfo<Value *> {};
+
+  AliasAnalysis &AA;
+  ilist<AliasSet> AliasSets;
+
+  typedef DenseMap<ASTCallbackVH, AliasSet::PointerRec*,
+                   ASTCallbackVHDenseMapInfo>
+    PointerMapType;
+
+  // Map from pointers to their node
+  PointerMapType PointerMap;
+
+public:
+  /// AliasSetTracker ctor - Create an empty collection of AliasSets, and use
+  /// the specified alias analysis object to disambiguate load and store
+  /// addresses.
+  explicit AliasSetTracker(AliasAnalysis &aa) : AA(aa) {}
+  ~AliasSetTracker() { clear(); }
+
+  /// add methods - These methods are used to add different types of
+  /// instructions to the alias sets.  Adding a new instruction can result in
+  /// one of three actions happening:
+  ///
+  ///   1. If the instruction doesn't alias any other sets, create a new set.
+  ///   2. If the instruction aliases exactly one set, add it to the set
+  ///   3. If the instruction aliases multiple sets, merge the sets, and add
+  ///      the instruction to the result.
+  ///
+  /// These methods return true if inserting the instruction resulted in the
+  /// addition of a new alias set (i.e., the pointer did not alias anything).
+  ///
+  bool add(Value *Ptr, uint64_t Size, const MDNode *TBAAInfo); // Add a location
+  bool add(LoadInst *LI);
+  bool add(StoreInst *SI);
+  bool add(VAArgInst *VAAI);
+  bool add(Instruction *I);       // Dispatch to one of the other add methods...
+  void add(BasicBlock &BB);       // Add all instructions in basic block
+  void add(const AliasSetTracker &AST); // Add alias relations from another AST
+  bool addUnknown(Instruction *I);
+
+  /// remove methods - These methods are used to remove all entries that might
+  /// be aliased by the specified instruction.  These methods return true if any
+  /// alias sets were eliminated.
+  // Remove a location
+  bool remove(Value *Ptr, uint64_t Size, const MDNode *TBAAInfo);
+  bool remove(LoadInst *LI);
+  bool remove(StoreInst *SI);
+  bool remove(VAArgInst *VAAI);
+  bool remove(Instruction *I);
+  void remove(AliasSet &AS);
+  bool removeUnknown(Instruction *I);
+  
+  void clear();
+
+  /// getAliasSets - Return the alias sets that are active.
+  ///
+  const ilist<AliasSet> &getAliasSets() const { return AliasSets; }
+
+  /// getAliasSetForPointer - Return the alias set that the specified pointer
+  /// lives in.  If the New argument is non-null, this method sets the value to
+  /// true if a new alias set is created to contain the pointer (because the
+  /// pointer didn't alias anything).
+  AliasSet &getAliasSetForPointer(Value *P, uint64_t Size,
+                                  const MDNode *TBAAInfo,
+                                  bool *New = 0);
+
+  /// getAliasSetForPointerIfExists - Return the alias set containing the
+  /// location specified if one exists, otherwise return null.
+  AliasSet *getAliasSetForPointerIfExists(Value *P, uint64_t Size,
+                                          const MDNode *TBAAInfo) {
+    return findAliasSetForPointer(P, Size, TBAAInfo);
+  }
+
+  /// containsPointer - Return true if the specified location is represented by
+  /// this alias set, false otherwise.  This does not modify the AST object or
+  /// alias sets.
+  bool containsPointer(Value *P, uint64_t Size, const MDNode *TBAAInfo) const;
+
+  /// getAliasAnalysis - Return the underlying alias analysis object used by
+  /// this tracker.
+  AliasAnalysis &getAliasAnalysis() const { return AA; }
+
+  /// deleteValue method - This method is used to remove a pointer value from
+  /// the AliasSetTracker entirely.  It should be used when an instruction is
+  /// deleted from the program to update the AST.  If you don't use this, you
+  /// would have dangling pointers to deleted instructions.
+  ///
+  void deleteValue(Value *PtrVal);
+
+  /// copyValue - This method should be used whenever a preexisting value in the
+  /// program is copied or cloned, introducing a new value.  Note that it is ok
+  /// for clients that use this method to introduce the same value multiple
+  /// times: if the tracker already knows about a value, it will ignore the
+  /// request.
+  ///
+  void copyValue(Value *From, Value *To);
+
+
+  typedef ilist<AliasSet>::iterator iterator;
+  typedef ilist<AliasSet>::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+  const_iterator begin() const { return AliasSets.begin(); }
+  const_iterator end()   const { return AliasSets.end(); }
+
+  iterator begin() { return AliasSets.begin(); }
+  iterator end()   { return AliasSets.end(); }
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+  void dump() const;
+
+private:
+  friend class AliasSet;
+  void removeAliasSet(AliasSet *AS);
+
+  // getEntryFor - Just like operator[] on the map, except that it creates an
+  // entry for the pointer if it doesn't already exist.
+  AliasSet::PointerRec &getEntryFor(Value *V) {
+    AliasSet::PointerRec *&Entry = PointerMap[ASTCallbackVH(V, this)];
+    if (Entry == 0)
+      Entry = new AliasSet::PointerRec(V);
+    return *Entry;
+  }
+
+  AliasSet &addPointer(Value *P, uint64_t Size, const MDNode *TBAAInfo,
+                       AliasSet::AccessType E,
+                       bool &NewSet) {
+    NewSet = false;
+    AliasSet &AS = getAliasSetForPointer(P, Size, TBAAInfo, &NewSet);
+    AS.AccessTy |= E;
+    return AS;
+  }
+  AliasSet *findAliasSetForPointer(const Value *Ptr, uint64_t Size,
+                                   const MDNode *TBAAInfo);
+
+  AliasSet *findAliasSetForUnknownInst(Instruction *Inst);
+};
+
+inline raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const AliasSetTracker &AST) {
+  AST.print(OS);
+  return OS;
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyImpl.h

@@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
+//===---- BlockFrequencyImpl.h - Machine Block Frequency Implementation ---===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// Shared implementation of BlockFrequency for IR and Machine Instructions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_BLOCKFREQUENCYIMPL_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_BLOCKFREQUENCYIMPL_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/PostOrderIterator.h"
+#include "llvm/CodeGen/MachineBasicBlock.h"
+#include "llvm/CodeGen/MachineFunction.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/BlockFrequency.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
+#include <string>
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+
+class BlockFrequencyInfo;
+class MachineBlockFrequencyInfo;
+
+/// BlockFrequencyImpl implements block frequency algorithm for IR and
+/// Machine Instructions. Algorithm starts with value 1024 (START_FREQ)
+/// for the entry block and then propagates frequencies using branch weights
+/// from (Machine)BranchProbabilityInfo. LoopInfo is not required because
+/// algorithm can find "backedges" by itself.
+template<class BlockT, class FunctionT, class BlockProbInfoT>
+class BlockFrequencyImpl {
+
+  DenseMap<const BlockT *, BlockFrequency> Freqs;
+
+  BlockProbInfoT *BPI;
+
+  FunctionT *Fn;
+
+  typedef GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> > GT;
+
+  const uint32_t EntryFreq;
+
+  std::string getBlockName(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return BB->getName().str();
+  }
+
+  std::string getBlockName(MachineBasicBlock *MBB) const {
+    std::string str;
+    raw_string_ostream ss(str);
+    ss << "BB#" << MBB->getNumber();
+
+    if (const BasicBlock *BB = MBB->getBasicBlock())
+      ss << " derived from LLVM BB " << BB->getName();
+
+    return ss.str();
+  }
+
+  void setBlockFreq(BlockT *BB, BlockFrequency Freq) {
+    Freqs[BB] = Freq;
+    DEBUG(dbgs() << "Frequency(" << getBlockName(BB) << ") = " << Freq << "\n");
+  }
+
+  /// getEdgeFreq - Return edge frequency based on SRC frequency and Src -> Dst
+  /// edge probability.
+  BlockFrequency getEdgeFreq(BlockT *Src, BlockT *Dst) const {
+    BranchProbability Prob = BPI->getEdgeProbability(Src, Dst);
+    return getBlockFreq(Src) * Prob;
+  }
+
+  /// incBlockFreq - Increase BB block frequency by FREQ.
+  ///
+  void incBlockFreq(BlockT *BB, BlockFrequency Freq) {
+    Freqs[BB] += Freq;
+    DEBUG(dbgs() << "Frequency(" << getBlockName(BB) << ") += " << Freq
+                 << " --> " << Freqs[BB] << "\n");
+  }
+
+  /// divBlockFreq - Divide BB block frequency by PROB. If Prob = 0 do nothing.
+  ///
+  void divBlockFreq(BlockT *BB, BranchProbability Prob) {
+    uint64_t N = Prob.getNumerator();
+    assert(N && "Illegal division by zero!");
+    uint64_t D = Prob.getDenominator();
+    uint64_t Freq = (Freqs[BB].getFrequency() * D) / N;
+
+    // Should we assert it?
+    if (Freq > UINT32_MAX)
+      Freq = UINT32_MAX;
+
+    Freqs[BB] = BlockFrequency(Freq);
+    DEBUG(dbgs() << "Frequency(" << getBlockName(BB) << ") /= (" << Prob
+                 << ") --> " << Freqs[BB] << "\n");
+  }
+
+  // All blocks in postorder.
+  std::vector<BlockT *> POT;
+
+  // Map Block -> Position in reverse-postorder list.
+  DenseMap<BlockT *, unsigned> RPO;
+
+  // Cycle Probability for each bloch.
+  DenseMap<BlockT *, uint32_t> CycleProb;
+
+  // (reverse-)postorder traversal iterators.
+  typedef typename std::vector<BlockT *>::iterator pot_iterator;
+  typedef typename std::vector<BlockT *>::reverse_iterator rpot_iterator;
+
+  pot_iterator pot_begin() { return POT.begin(); }
+  pot_iterator pot_end() { return POT.end(); }
+
+  rpot_iterator rpot_begin() { return POT.rbegin(); }
+  rpot_iterator rpot_end() { return POT.rend(); }
+
+  rpot_iterator rpot_at(BlockT *BB) {
+    rpot_iterator I = rpot_begin();
+    unsigned idx = RPO[BB];
+    assert(idx);
+    std::advance(I, idx - 1);
+
+    assert(*I == BB);
+    return I;
+  }
+
+
+  /// isReachable - Returns if BB block is reachable from the entry.
+  ///
+  bool isReachable(BlockT *BB) {
+    return RPO.count(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// isBackedge - Return if edge Src -> Dst is a backedge.
+  ///
+  bool isBackedge(BlockT *Src, BlockT *Dst) {
+    assert(isReachable(Src));
+    assert(isReachable(Dst));
+
+    unsigned a = RPO[Src];
+    unsigned b = RPO[Dst];
+
+    return a >= b;
+  }
+
+  /// getSingleBlockPred - return single BB block predecessor or NULL if
+  /// BB has none or more predecessors.
+  BlockT *getSingleBlockPred(BlockT *BB) {
+    typename GT::ChildIteratorType
+      PI = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_begin(BB),
+      PE = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_end(BB);
+
+    if (PI == PE)
+      return 0;
+
+    BlockT *Pred = *PI;
+
+    ++PI;
+    if (PI != PE)
+      return 0;
+
+    return Pred;
+  }
+
+  void doBlock(BlockT *BB, BlockT *LoopHead,
+               SmallPtrSet<BlockT *, 8> &BlocksInLoop) {
+
+    DEBUG(dbgs() << "doBlock(" << getBlockName(BB) << ")\n");
+    setBlockFreq(BB, 0);
+
+    if (BB == LoopHead) {
+      setBlockFreq(BB, EntryFreq);
+      return;
+    }
+
+    if(BlockT *Pred = getSingleBlockPred(BB)) {
+      if (BlocksInLoop.count(Pred))
+        setBlockFreq(BB, getEdgeFreq(Pred, BB));
+      // TODO: else? irreducible, ignore it for now.
+      return;
+    }
+
+    bool isInLoop = false;
+    bool isLoopHead = false;
+
+    for (typename GT::ChildIteratorType
+         PI = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_begin(BB),
+         PE = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_end(BB);
+         PI != PE; ++PI) {
+      BlockT *Pred = *PI;
+
+      if (isReachable(Pred) && isBackedge(Pred, BB)) {
+        isLoopHead = true;
+      } else if (BlocksInLoop.count(Pred)) {
+        incBlockFreq(BB, getEdgeFreq(Pred, BB));
+        isInLoop = true;
+      }
+      // TODO: else? irreducible.
+    }
+
+    if (!isInLoop)
+      return;
+
+    if (!isLoopHead)
+      return;
+
+    assert(EntryFreq >= CycleProb[BB]);
+    uint32_t CProb = CycleProb[BB];
+    uint32_t Numerator = EntryFreq - CProb ? EntryFreq - CProb : 1;
+    divBlockFreq(BB, BranchProbability(Numerator, EntryFreq));
+  }
+
+  /// doLoop - Propagate block frequency down through the loop.
+  void doLoop(BlockT *Head, BlockT *Tail) {
+    DEBUG(dbgs() << "doLoop(" << getBlockName(Head) << ", "
+                 << getBlockName(Tail) << ")\n");
+
+    SmallPtrSet<BlockT *, 8> BlocksInLoop;
+
+    for (rpot_iterator I = rpot_at(Head), E = rpot_at(Tail); ; ++I) {
+      BlockT *BB = *I;
+      doBlock(BB, Head, BlocksInLoop);
+
+      BlocksInLoop.insert(BB);
+      if (I == E)
+        break;
+    }
+
+    // Compute loop's cyclic probability using backedges probabilities.
+    for (typename GT::ChildIteratorType
+         PI = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_begin(Head),
+         PE = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_end(Head);
+         PI != PE; ++PI) {
+      BlockT *Pred = *PI;
+      assert(Pred);
+      if (isReachable(Pred) && isBackedge(Pred, Head)) {
+        uint64_t N = getEdgeFreq(Pred, Head).getFrequency();
+        uint64_t D = getBlockFreq(Head).getFrequency();
+        assert(N <= EntryFreq && "Backedge frequency must be <= EntryFreq!");
+        uint64_t Res = (N * EntryFreq) / D;
+
+        assert(Res <= UINT32_MAX);
+        CycleProb[Head] += (uint32_t) Res;
+        DEBUG(dbgs() << "  CycleProb[" << getBlockName(Head) << "] += " << Res
+                     << " --> " << CycleProb[Head] << "\n");
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  friend class BlockFrequencyInfo;
+  friend class MachineBlockFrequencyInfo;
+
+  BlockFrequencyImpl() : EntryFreq(BlockFrequency::getEntryFrequency()) { }
+
+  void doFunction(FunctionT *fn, BlockProbInfoT *bpi) {
+    Fn = fn;
+    BPI = bpi;
+
+    // Clear everything.
+    RPO.clear();
+    POT.clear();
+    CycleProb.clear();
+    Freqs.clear();
+
+    BlockT *EntryBlock = fn->begin();
+
+    std::copy(po_begin(EntryBlock), po_end(EntryBlock), std::back_inserter(POT));
+
+    unsigned RPOidx = 0;
+    for (rpot_iterator I = rpot_begin(), E = rpot_end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      BlockT *BB = *I;
+      RPO[BB] = ++RPOidx;
+      DEBUG(dbgs() << "RPO[" << getBlockName(BB) << "] = " << RPO[BB] << "\n");
+    }
+
+    // Travel over all blocks in postorder.
+    for (pot_iterator I = pot_begin(), E = pot_end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      BlockT *BB = *I;
+      BlockT *LastTail = 0;
+      DEBUG(dbgs() << "POT: " << getBlockName(BB) << "\n");
+
+      for (typename GT::ChildIteratorType
+           PI = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_begin(BB),
+           PE = GraphTraits< Inverse<BlockT *> >::child_end(BB);
+           PI != PE; ++PI) {
+
+        BlockT *Pred = *PI;
+        if (isReachable(Pred) && isBackedge(Pred, BB)
+            && (!LastTail || RPO[Pred] > RPO[LastTail]))
+          LastTail = Pred;
+      }
+
+      if (LastTail)
+        doLoop(BB, LastTail);
+    }
+
+    // At the end assume the whole function as a loop, and travel over it once
+    // again.
+    doLoop(*(rpot_begin()), *(pot_begin()));
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// getBlockFreq - Return block frequency. Return 0 if we don't have it.
+  BlockFrequency getBlockFreq(const BlockT *BB) const {
+    typename DenseMap<const BlockT *, BlockFrequency>::const_iterator
+      I = Freqs.find(BB);
+    if (I != Freqs.end())
+      return I->second;
+    return 0;
+  }
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
+    OS << "\n\n---- Block Freqs ----\n";
+    for (typename FunctionT::iterator I = Fn->begin(), E = Fn->end(); I != E;) {
+      BlockT *BB = I++;
+      OS << " " << getBlockName(BB) << " = " << getBlockFreq(BB) << "\n";
+
+      for (typename GraphTraits<BlockT *>::ChildIteratorType
+           SI = GraphTraits<BlockT *>::child_begin(BB),
+           SE = GraphTraits<BlockT *>::child_end(BB); SI != SE; ++SI) {
+        BlockT *Succ = *SI;
+        OS << "  " << getBlockName(BB) << " -> " << getBlockName(Succ)
+           << " = " << getEdgeFreq(BB, Succ) << "\n";
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  void dump() const {
+    print(dbgs());
+  }
+};
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+//========-------- BlockFrequencyInfo.h - Block Frequency Analysis -------========//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// Loops should be simplified before this analysis.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_BLOCKFREQUENCYINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_BLOCKFREQUENCYINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/BlockFrequency.h"
+#include <climits>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class BranchProbabilityInfo;
+template<class BlockT, class FunctionT, class BranchProbInfoT>
+class BlockFrequencyImpl;
+
+/// BlockFrequencyInfo pass uses BlockFrequencyImpl implementation to estimate
+/// IR basic block frequencies.
+class BlockFrequencyInfo : public FunctionPass {
+
+  BlockFrequencyImpl<BasicBlock, Function, BranchProbabilityInfo> *BFI;
+
+public:
+  static char ID;
+
+  BlockFrequencyInfo();
+
+  ~BlockFrequencyInfo();
+
+  void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+
+  bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+  void print(raw_ostream &O, const Module *M) const;
+
+  /// getblockFreq - Return block frequency. Return 0 if we don't have the
+  /// information. Please note that initial frequency is equal to 1024. It means
+  /// that we should not rely on the value itself, but only on the comparison to
+  /// the other block frequencies. We do this to avoid using of floating points.
+  ///
+  BlockFrequency getBlockFreq(const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+};
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+//===--- BranchProbabilityInfo.h - Branch Probability Analysis --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This pass is used to evaluate branch probabilties.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_BRANCHPROBABILITYINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_BRANCHPROBABILITYINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/InitializePasses.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+class LoopInfo;
+class raw_ostream;
+
+/// \brief Analysis pass providing branch probability information.
+///
+/// This is a function analysis pass which provides information on the relative
+/// probabilities of each "edge" in the function's CFG where such an edge is
+/// defined by a pair (PredBlock and an index in the successors). The
+/// probability of an edge from one block is always relative to the
+/// probabilities of other edges from the block. The probabilites of all edges
+/// from a block sum to exactly one (100%).
+/// We use a pair (PredBlock and an index in the successors) to uniquely
+/// identify an edge, since we can have multiple edges from Src to Dst.
+/// As an example, we can have a switch which jumps to Dst with value 0 and
+/// value 10.
+class BranchProbabilityInfo : public FunctionPass {
+public:
+  static char ID;
+
+  BranchProbabilityInfo() : FunctionPass(ID) {
+    initializeBranchProbabilityInfoPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+  }
+
+  void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+  bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module *M = 0) const;
+
+  /// \brief Get an edge's probability, relative to other out-edges of the Src.
+  ///
+  /// This routine provides access to the fractional probability between zero
+  /// (0%) and one (100%) of this edge executing, relative to other edges
+  /// leaving the 'Src' block. The returned probability is never zero, and can
+  /// only be one if the source block has only one successor.
+  BranchProbability getEdgeProbability(const BasicBlock *Src,
+                                       unsigned IndexInSuccessors) const;
+
+  /// \brief Get the probability of going from Src to Dst.
+  ///
+  /// It returns the sum of all probabilities for edges from Src to Dst.
+  BranchProbability getEdgeProbability(const BasicBlock *Src,
+                                       const BasicBlock *Dst) const;
+
+  /// \brief Test if an edge is hot relative to other out-edges of the Src.
+  ///
+  /// Check whether this edge out of the source block is 'hot'. We define hot
+  /// as having a relative probability >= 80%.
+  bool isEdgeHot(const BasicBlock *Src, const BasicBlock *Dst) const;
+
+  /// \brief Retrieve the hot successor of a block if one exists.
+  ///
+  /// Given a basic block, look through its successors and if one exists for
+  /// which \see isEdgeHot would return true, return that successor block.
+  BasicBlock *getHotSucc(BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// \brief Print an edge's probability.
+  ///
+  /// Retrieves an edge's probability similarly to \see getEdgeProbability, but
+  /// then prints that probability to the provided stream. That stream is then
+  /// returned.
+  raw_ostream &printEdgeProbability(raw_ostream &OS, const BasicBlock *Src,
+                                    const BasicBlock *Dst) const;
+
+  /// \brief Get the raw edge weight calculated for the edge.
+  ///
+  /// This returns the raw edge weight. It is guaranteed to fall between 1 and
+  /// UINT32_MAX. Note that the raw edge weight is not meaningful in isolation.
+  /// This interface should be very carefully, and primarily by routines that
+  /// are updating the analysis by later calling setEdgeWeight.
+  uint32_t getEdgeWeight(const BasicBlock *Src,
+                         unsigned IndexInSuccessors) const;
+
+  /// \brief Get the raw edge weight calculated for the block pair.
+  ///
+  /// This returns the sum of all raw edge weights from Src to Dst.
+  /// It is guaranteed to fall between 1 and UINT32_MAX.
+  uint32_t getEdgeWeight(const BasicBlock *Src, const BasicBlock *Dst) const;
+
+  /// \brief Set the raw edge weight for a given edge.
+  ///
+  /// This allows a pass to explicitly set the edge weight for an edge. It can
+  /// be used when updating the CFG to update and preserve the branch
+  /// probability information. Read the implementation of how these edge
+  /// weights are calculated carefully before using!
+  void setEdgeWeight(const BasicBlock *Src, unsigned IndexInSuccessors,
+                     uint32_t Weight);
+
+private:
+  // Since we allow duplicate edges from one basic block to another, we use
+  // a pair (PredBlock and an index in the successors) to specify an edge.
+  typedef std::pair<const BasicBlock *, unsigned> Edge;
+
+  // Default weight value. Used when we don't have information about the edge.
+  // TODO: DEFAULT_WEIGHT makes sense during static predication, when none of
+  // the successors have a weight yet. But it doesn't make sense when providing
+  // weight to an edge that may have siblings with non-zero weights. This can
+  // be handled various ways, but it's probably fine for an edge with unknown
+  // weight to just "inherit" the non-zero weight of an adjacent successor.
+  static const uint32_t DEFAULT_WEIGHT = 16;
+
+  DenseMap<Edge, uint32_t> Weights;
+
+  /// \brief Handle to the LoopInfo analysis.
+  LoopInfo *LI;
+
+  /// \brief Track the last function we run over for printing.
+  Function *LastF;
+
+  /// \brief Track the set of blocks directly succeeded by a returning block.
+  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> PostDominatedByUnreachable;
+
+  /// \brief Get sum of the block successors' weights.
+  uint32_t getSumForBlock(const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  bool calcUnreachableHeuristics(BasicBlock *BB);
+  bool calcMetadataWeights(BasicBlock *BB);
+  bool calcPointerHeuristics(BasicBlock *BB);
+  bool calcLoopBranchHeuristics(BasicBlock *BB);
+  bool calcZeroHeuristics(BasicBlock *BB);
+  bool calcFloatingPointHeuristics(BasicBlock *BB);
+  bool calcInvokeHeuristics(BasicBlock *BB);
+};
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/CFGPrinter.h

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+//===-- CFGPrinter.h - CFG printer external interface -----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines external functions that can be called to explicitly
+// instantiate the CFG printer.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CFGPRINTER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CFGPRINTER_H
+
+#include "llvm/Assembly/Writer.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CFG.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/GraphWriter.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+template<>
+struct DOTGraphTraits<const Function*> : public DefaultDOTGraphTraits {
+
+  DOTGraphTraits (bool isSimple=false) : DefaultDOTGraphTraits(isSimple) {}
+
+  static std::string getGraphName(const Function *F) {
+    return "CFG for '" + F->getName().str() + "' function";
+  }
+
+  static std::string getSimpleNodeLabel(const BasicBlock *Node,
+                                        const Function *) {
+    if (!Node->getName().empty())
+      return Node->getName().str();
+
+    std::string Str;
+    raw_string_ostream OS(Str);
+
+    WriteAsOperand(OS, Node, false);
+    return OS.str();
+  }
+
+  static std::string getCompleteNodeLabel(const BasicBlock *Node, 
+                                          const Function *) {
+    std::string Str;
+    raw_string_ostream OS(Str);
+
+    if (Node->getName().empty()) {
+      WriteAsOperand(OS, Node, false);
+      OS << ":";
+    }
+
+    OS << *Node;
+    std::string OutStr = OS.str();
+    if (OutStr[0] == '\n') OutStr.erase(OutStr.begin());
+
+    // Process string output to make it nicer...
+    for (unsigned i = 0; i != OutStr.length(); ++i)
+      if (OutStr[i] == '\n') {                            // Left justify
+        OutStr[i] = '\\';
+        OutStr.insert(OutStr.begin()+i+1, 'l');
+      } else if (OutStr[i] == ';') {                      // Delete comments!
+        unsigned Idx = OutStr.find('\n', i+1);            // Find end of line
+        OutStr.erase(OutStr.begin()+i, OutStr.begin()+Idx);
+        --i;
+      }
+
+    return OutStr;
+  }
+
+  std::string getNodeLabel(const BasicBlock *Node,
+                           const Function *Graph) {
+    if (isSimple())
+      return getSimpleNodeLabel(Node, Graph);
+    else
+      return getCompleteNodeLabel(Node, Graph);
+  }
+
+  static std::string getEdgeSourceLabel(const BasicBlock *Node,
+                                        succ_const_iterator I) {
+    // Label source of conditional branches with "T" or "F"
+    if (const BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Node->getTerminator()))
+      if (BI->isConditional())
+        return (I == succ_begin(Node)) ? "T" : "F";
+    
+    // Label source of switch edges with the associated value.
+    if (const SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(Node->getTerminator())) {
+      unsigned SuccNo = I.getSuccessorIndex();
+
+      if (SuccNo == 0) return "def";
+      
+      std::string Str;
+      raw_string_ostream OS(Str);
+      SwitchInst::ConstCaseIt Case =
+          SwitchInst::ConstCaseIt::fromSuccessorIndex(SI, SuccNo); 
+      OS << Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
+      return OS.str();
+    }    
+    return "";
+  }
+};
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class FunctionPass;
+  FunctionPass *createCFGPrinterPass ();
+  FunctionPass *createCFGOnlyPrinterPass ();
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/CallGraph.h

@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+//===- CallGraph.h - Build a Module's call graph ----------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This interface is used to build and manipulate a call graph, which is a very
+// useful tool for interprocedural optimization.
+//
+// Every function in a module is represented as a node in the call graph.  The
+// callgraph node keeps track of which functions the are called by the function
+// corresponding to the node.
+//
+// A call graph may contain nodes where the function that they correspond to is
+// null.  These 'external' nodes are used to represent control flow that is not
+// represented (or analyzable) in the module.  In particular, this analysis
+// builds one external node such that:
+//   1. All functions in the module without internal linkage will have edges
+//      from this external node, indicating that they could be called by
+//      functions outside of the module.
+//   2. All functions whose address is used for something more than a direct
+//      call, for example being stored into a memory location will also have an
+//      edge from this external node.  Since they may be called by an unknown
+//      caller later, they must be tracked as such.
+//
+// There is a second external node added for calls that leave this module.
+// Functions have a call edge to the external node iff:
+//   1. The function is external, reflecting the fact that they could call
+//      anything without internal linkage or that has its address taken.
+//   2. The function contains an indirect function call.
+//
+// As an extension in the future, there may be multiple nodes with a null
+// function.  These will be used when we can prove (through pointer analysis)
+// that an indirect call site can call only a specific set of functions.
+//
+// Because of these properties, the CallGraph captures a conservative superset
+// of all of the caller-callee relationships, which is useful for
+// transformations.
+//
+// The CallGraph class also attempts to figure out what the root of the
+// CallGraph is, which it currently does by looking for a function named 'main'.
+// If no function named 'main' is found, the external node is used as the entry
+// node, reflecting the fact that any function without internal linkage could
+// be called into (which is common for libraries).
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CALLGRAPH_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CALLGRAPH_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/GraphTraits.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CallSite.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/IncludeFile.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+#include <map>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Function;
+class Module;
+class CallGraphNode;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// CallGraph class definition
+//
+class CallGraph {
+protected:
+  Module *Mod;              // The module this call graph represents
+
+  typedef std::map<const Function *, CallGraphNode *> FunctionMapTy;
+  FunctionMapTy FunctionMap;    // Map from a function to its node
+
+public:
+  static char ID; // Class identification, replacement for typeinfo
+  //===---------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Accessors.
+  //
+  typedef FunctionMapTy::iterator iterator;
+  typedef FunctionMapTy::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+  /// getModule - Return the module the call graph corresponds to.
+  ///
+  Module &getModule() const { return *Mod; }
+
+  inline       iterator begin()       { return FunctionMap.begin(); }
+  inline       iterator end()         { return FunctionMap.end();   }
+  inline const_iterator begin() const { return FunctionMap.begin(); }
+  inline const_iterator end()   const { return FunctionMap.end();   }
+
+  // Subscripting operators, return the call graph node for the provided
+  // function
+  inline const CallGraphNode *operator[](const Function *F) const {
+    const_iterator I = FunctionMap.find(F);
+    assert(I != FunctionMap.end() && "Function not in callgraph!");
+    return I->second;
+  }
+  inline CallGraphNode *operator[](const Function *F) {
+    const_iterator I = FunctionMap.find(F);
+    assert(I != FunctionMap.end() && "Function not in callgraph!");
+    return I->second;
+  }
+
+  /// Returns the CallGraphNode which is used to represent undetermined calls
+  /// into the callgraph.  Override this if you want behavioral inheritance.
+  virtual CallGraphNode* getExternalCallingNode() const { return 0; }
+  virtual CallGraphNode* getCallsExternalNode()   const { return 0; }
+
+  /// Return the root/main method in the module, or some other root node, such
+  /// as the externalcallingnode.  Overload these if you behavioral
+  /// inheritance.
+  virtual CallGraphNode* getRoot() { return 0; }
+  virtual const CallGraphNode* getRoot() const { return 0; }
+
+  //===---------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Functions to keep a call graph up to date with a function that has been
+  // modified.
+  //
+
+  /// removeFunctionFromModule - Unlink the function from this module, returning
+  /// it.  Because this removes the function from the module, the call graph
+  /// node is destroyed.  This is only valid if the function does not call any
+  /// other functions (ie, there are no edges in it's CGN).  The easiest way to
+  /// do this is to dropAllReferences before calling this.
+  ///
+  Function *removeFunctionFromModule(CallGraphNode *CGN);
+  Function *removeFunctionFromModule(Function *F) {
+    return removeFunctionFromModule((*this)[F]);
+  }
+
+  /// getOrInsertFunction - This method is identical to calling operator[], but
+  /// it will insert a new CallGraphNode for the specified function if one does
+  /// not already exist.
+  CallGraphNode *getOrInsertFunction(const Function *F);
+
+  /// spliceFunction - Replace the function represented by this node by another.
+  /// This does not rescan the body of the function, so it is suitable when
+  /// splicing the body of one function to another while also updating all
+  /// callers from the old function to the new.
+  ///
+  void spliceFunction(const Function *From, const Function *To);
+
+  //===---------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Pass infrastructure interface glue code.
+  //
+protected:
+  CallGraph() {}
+
+public:
+  virtual ~CallGraph() { destroy(); }
+
+  /// initialize - Call this method before calling other methods,
+  /// re/initializes the state of the CallGraph.
+  ///
+  void initialize(Module &M);
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &o, Module *) const;
+  void dump() const;
+protected:
+  // destroy - Release memory for the call graph
+  virtual void destroy();
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// CallGraphNode class definition.
+//
+class CallGraphNode {
+  friend class CallGraph;
+  
+  AssertingVH<Function> F;
+
+  // CallRecord - This is a pair of the calling instruction (a call or invoke)
+  // and the callgraph node being called.
+public:
+  typedef std::pair<WeakVH, CallGraphNode*> CallRecord;
+private:
+  std::vector<CallRecord> CalledFunctions;
+  
+  /// NumReferences - This is the number of times that this CallGraphNode occurs
+  /// in the CalledFunctions array of this or other CallGraphNodes.
+  unsigned NumReferences;
+
+  CallGraphNode(const CallGraphNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const CallGraphNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+ 
+  void DropRef() { --NumReferences; }
+  void AddRef() { ++NumReferences; }
+public:
+  typedef std::vector<CallRecord> CalledFunctionsVector;
+
+  
+  // CallGraphNode ctor - Create a node for the specified function.
+  inline CallGraphNode(Function *f) : F(f), NumReferences(0) {}
+  ~CallGraphNode() {
+    assert(NumReferences == 0 && "Node deleted while references remain");
+  }
+  
+  //===---------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Accessor methods.
+  //
+
+  typedef std::vector<CallRecord>::iterator iterator;
+  typedef std::vector<CallRecord>::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+  // getFunction - Return the function that this call graph node represents.
+  Function *getFunction() const { return F; }
+
+  inline iterator begin() { return CalledFunctions.begin(); }
+  inline iterator end()   { return CalledFunctions.end();   }
+  inline const_iterator begin() const { return CalledFunctions.begin(); }
+  inline const_iterator end()   const { return CalledFunctions.end();   }
+  inline bool empty() const { return CalledFunctions.empty(); }
+  inline unsigned size() const { return (unsigned)CalledFunctions.size(); }
+
+  /// getNumReferences - Return the number of other CallGraphNodes in this
+  /// CallGraph that reference this node in their callee list.
+  unsigned getNumReferences() const { return NumReferences; }
+  
+  // Subscripting operator - Return the i'th called function.
+  //
+  CallGraphNode *operator[](unsigned i) const {
+    assert(i < CalledFunctions.size() && "Invalid index");
+    return CalledFunctions[i].second;
+  }
+
+  /// dump - Print out this call graph node.
+  ///
+  void dump() const;
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+
+  //===---------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Methods to keep a call graph up to date with a function that has been
+  // modified
+  //
+
+  /// removeAllCalledFunctions - As the name implies, this removes all edges
+  /// from this CallGraphNode to any functions it calls.
+  void removeAllCalledFunctions() {
+    while (!CalledFunctions.empty()) {
+      CalledFunctions.back().second->DropRef();
+      CalledFunctions.pop_back();
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /// stealCalledFunctionsFrom - Move all the callee information from N to this
+  /// node.
+  void stealCalledFunctionsFrom(CallGraphNode *N) {
+    assert(CalledFunctions.empty() &&
+           "Cannot steal callsite information if I already have some");
+    std::swap(CalledFunctions, N->CalledFunctions);
+  }
+  
+
+  /// addCalledFunction - Add a function to the list of functions called by this
+  /// one.
+  void addCalledFunction(CallSite CS, CallGraphNode *M) {
+    assert(!CS.getInstruction() ||
+           !CS.getCalledFunction() ||
+           !CS.getCalledFunction()->isIntrinsic());
+    CalledFunctions.push_back(std::make_pair(CS.getInstruction(), M));
+    M->AddRef();
+  }
+
+  void removeCallEdge(iterator I) {
+    I->second->DropRef();
+    *I = CalledFunctions.back();
+    CalledFunctions.pop_back();
+  }
+  
+  
+  /// removeCallEdgeFor - This method removes the edge in the node for the
+  /// specified call site.  Note that this method takes linear time, so it
+  /// should be used sparingly.
+  void removeCallEdgeFor(CallSite CS);
+
+  /// removeAnyCallEdgeTo - This method removes all call edges from this node
+  /// to the specified callee function.  This takes more time to execute than
+  /// removeCallEdgeTo, so it should not be used unless necessary.
+  void removeAnyCallEdgeTo(CallGraphNode *Callee);
+
+  /// removeOneAbstractEdgeTo - Remove one edge associated with a null callsite
+  /// from this node to the specified callee function.
+  void removeOneAbstractEdgeTo(CallGraphNode *Callee);
+  
+  /// replaceCallEdge - This method replaces the edge in the node for the
+  /// specified call site with a new one.  Note that this method takes linear
+  /// time, so it should be used sparingly.
+  void replaceCallEdge(CallSite CS, CallSite NewCS, CallGraphNode *NewNode);
+  
+  /// allReferencesDropped - This is a special function that should only be
+  /// used by the CallGraph class.
+  void allReferencesDropped() {
+    NumReferences = 0;
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// GraphTraits specializations for call graphs so that they can be treated as
+// graphs by the generic graph algorithms.
+//
+
+// Provide graph traits for tranversing call graphs using standard graph
+// traversals.
+template <> struct GraphTraits<CallGraphNode*> {
+  typedef CallGraphNode NodeType;
+
+  typedef CallGraphNode::CallRecord CGNPairTy;
+  typedef std::pointer_to_unary_function<CGNPairTy, CallGraphNode*> CGNDerefFun;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(CallGraphNode *CGN) { return CGN; }
+
+  typedef mapped_iterator<NodeType::iterator, CGNDerefFun> ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return map_iterator(N->begin(), CGNDerefFun(CGNDeref));
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end  (NodeType *N) {
+    return map_iterator(N->end(), CGNDerefFun(CGNDeref));
+  }
+
+  static CallGraphNode *CGNDeref(CGNPairTy P) {
+    return P.second;
+  }
+
+};
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<const CallGraphNode*> {
+  typedef const CallGraphNode NodeType;
+  typedef NodeType::const_iterator ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(const CallGraphNode *CGN) { return CGN; }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) { return N->begin();}
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end  (NodeType *N) { return N->end(); }
+};
+
+template<> struct GraphTraits<CallGraph*> : public GraphTraits<CallGraphNode*> {
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(CallGraph *CGN) {
+    return CGN->getExternalCallingNode();  // Start at the external node!
+  }
+  typedef std::pair<const Function*, CallGraphNode*> PairTy;
+  typedef std::pointer_to_unary_function<PairTy, CallGraphNode&> DerefFun;
+
+  // nodes_iterator/begin/end - Allow iteration over all nodes in the graph
+  typedef mapped_iterator<CallGraph::iterator, DerefFun> nodes_iterator;
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(CallGraph *CG) {
+    return map_iterator(CG->begin(), DerefFun(CGdereference));
+  }
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end  (CallGraph *CG) {
+    return map_iterator(CG->end(), DerefFun(CGdereference));
+  }
+
+  static CallGraphNode &CGdereference(PairTy P) {
+    return *P.second;
+  }
+};
+
+template<> struct GraphTraits<const CallGraph*> :
+  public GraphTraits<const CallGraphNode*> {
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(const CallGraph *CGN) {
+    return CGN->getExternalCallingNode();
+  }
+  // nodes_iterator/begin/end - Allow iteration over all nodes in the graph
+  typedef CallGraph::const_iterator nodes_iterator;
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(const CallGraph *CG) { return CG->begin(); }
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end  (const CallGraph *CG) { return CG->end(); }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+// Make sure that any clients of this file link in CallGraph.cpp
+FORCE_DEFINING_FILE_TO_BE_LINKED(CallGraph)
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/CallGraphSCCPass.h

@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+//===- CallGraphSCCPass.h - Pass that operates BU on call graph -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the CallGraphSCCPass class, which is used for passes which
+// are implemented as bottom-up traversals on the call graph.  Because there may
+// be cycles in the call graph, passes of this type operate on the call-graph in
+// SCC order: that is, they process function bottom-up, except for recursive
+// functions, which they process all at once.
+//
+// These passes are inherently interprocedural, and are required to keep the
+// call graph up-to-date if they do anything which could modify it.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CALLGRAPHSCCPASS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CALLGRAPHSCCPASS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/CallGraph.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class CallGraphNode;
+class CallGraph;
+class PMStack;
+class CallGraphSCC;
+  
+class CallGraphSCCPass : public Pass {
+public:
+  explicit CallGraphSCCPass(char &pid) : Pass(PT_CallGraphSCC, pid) {}
+
+  /// createPrinterPass - Get a pass that prints the Module
+  /// corresponding to a CallGraph.
+  Pass *createPrinterPass(raw_ostream &O, const std::string &Banner) const;
+
+  using llvm::Pass::doInitialization;
+  using llvm::Pass::doFinalization;
+
+  /// doInitialization - This method is called before the SCC's of the program
+  /// has been processed, allowing the pass to do initialization as necessary.
+  virtual bool doInitialization(CallGraph &CG) {
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  /// runOnSCC - This method should be implemented by the subclass to perform
+  /// whatever action is necessary for the specified SCC.  Note that
+  /// non-recursive (or only self-recursive) functions will have an SCC size of
+  /// 1, where recursive portions of the call graph will have SCC size > 1.
+  ///
+  /// SCC passes that add or delete functions to the SCC are required to update
+  /// the SCC list, otherwise stale pointers may be dereferenced.
+  ///
+  virtual bool runOnSCC(CallGraphSCC &SCC) = 0;
+
+  /// doFinalization - This method is called after the SCC's of the program has
+  /// been processed, allowing the pass to do final cleanup as necessary.
+  virtual bool doFinalization(CallGraph &CG) {
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  /// Assign pass manager to manager this pass
+  virtual void assignPassManager(PMStack &PMS,
+                                 PassManagerType PMT);
+
+  ///  Return what kind of Pass Manager can manage this pass.
+  virtual PassManagerType getPotentialPassManagerType() const {
+    return PMT_CallGraphPassManager;
+  }
+
+  /// getAnalysisUsage - For this class, we declare that we require and preserve
+  /// the call graph.  If the derived class implements this method, it should
+  /// always explicitly call the implementation here.
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &Info) const;
+};
+
+/// CallGraphSCC - This is a single SCC that a CallGraphSCCPass is run on. 
+class CallGraphSCC {
+  void *Context; // The CGPassManager object that is vending this.
+  std::vector<CallGraphNode*> Nodes;
+public:
+  CallGraphSCC(void *context) : Context(context) {}
+  
+  void initialize(CallGraphNode*const*I, CallGraphNode*const*E) {
+    Nodes.assign(I, E);
+  }
+  
+  bool isSingular() const { return Nodes.size() == 1; }
+  unsigned size() const { return Nodes.size(); }
+  
+  /// ReplaceNode - This informs the SCC and the pass manager that the specified
+  /// Old node has been deleted, and New is to be used in its place.
+  void ReplaceNode(CallGraphNode *Old, CallGraphNode *New);
+  
+  typedef std::vector<CallGraphNode*>::const_iterator iterator;
+  iterator begin() const { return Nodes.begin(); }
+  iterator end() const { return Nodes.end(); }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/CallPrinter.h

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+//===-- CallPrinter.h - Call graph printer external interface ----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines external functions that can be called to explicitly
+// instantiate the call graph printer.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CALLPRINTER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CALLPRINTER_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+  class ModulePass;
+
+  ModulePass *createCallGraphViewerPass();
+  ModulePass *createCallGraphPrinterPass();
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/CaptureTracking.h

@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+//===----- llvm/Analysis/CaptureTracking.h - Pointer capture ----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains routines that help determine which pointers are captured.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CAPTURETRACKING_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CAPTURETRACKING_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+  class Value;
+  class Use;
+
+  /// PointerMayBeCaptured - Return true if this pointer value may be captured
+  /// by the enclosing function (which is required to exist).  This routine can
+  /// be expensive, so consider caching the results.  The boolean ReturnCaptures
+  /// specifies whether returning the value (or part of it) from the function
+  /// counts as capturing it or not.  The boolean StoreCaptures specified
+  /// whether storing the value (or part of it) into memory anywhere
+  /// automatically counts as capturing it or not.
+  bool PointerMayBeCaptured(const Value *V,
+                            bool ReturnCaptures,
+                            bool StoreCaptures);
+
+  /// This callback is used in conjunction with PointerMayBeCaptured. In
+  /// addition to the interface here, you'll need to provide your own getters
+  /// to see whether anything was captured.
+  struct CaptureTracker {
+    virtual ~CaptureTracker();
+
+    /// tooManyUses - The depth of traversal has breached a limit. There may be
+    /// capturing instructions that will not be passed into captured().
+    virtual void tooManyUses() = 0;
+
+    /// shouldExplore - This is the use of a value derived from the pointer.
+    /// To prune the search (ie., assume that none of its users could possibly
+    /// capture) return false. To search it, return true.
+    ///
+    /// U->getUser() is always an Instruction.
+    virtual bool shouldExplore(Use *U);
+
+    /// captured - Information about the pointer was captured by the user of
+    /// use U. Return true to stop the traversal or false to continue looking
+    /// for more capturing instructions.
+    virtual bool captured(Use *U) = 0;
+  };
+
+  /// PointerMayBeCaptured - Visit the value and the values derived from it and
+  /// find values which appear to be capturing the pointer value. This feeds
+  /// results into and is controlled by the CaptureTracker object.
+  void PointerMayBeCaptured(const Value *V, CaptureTracker *Tracker);
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/CodeMetrics.h

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+//===- CodeMetrics.h - Code cost measurements -------------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file implements various weight measurements for code, helping
+// the Inliner and other passes decide whether to duplicate its contents.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CODEMETRICS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CODEMETRICS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CallSite.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+class BasicBlock;
+class Function;
+class Instruction;
+class DataLayout;
+class TargetTransformInfo;
+class Value;
+
+/// \brief Check whether a call will lower to something small.
+///
+/// This tests checks whether this callsite will lower to something
+/// significantly cheaper than a traditional call, often a single
+/// instruction. Note that if isInstructionFree(CS.getInstruction()) would
+/// return true, so will this function.
+bool callIsSmall(ImmutableCallSite CS);
+
+/// \brief Utility to calculate the size and a few similar metrics for a set
+/// of basic blocks.
+struct CodeMetrics {
+  /// \brief True if this function contains a call to setjmp or other functions
+  /// with attribute "returns twice" without having the attribute itself.
+  bool exposesReturnsTwice;
+
+  /// \brief True if this function calls itself.
+  bool isRecursive;
+
+  /// \brief True if this function cannot be duplicated.
+  ///
+  /// True if this function contains one or more indirect branches, or it contains
+  /// one or more 'noduplicate' instructions.
+  bool notDuplicatable;
+
+  /// \brief True if this function calls alloca (in the C sense).
+  bool usesDynamicAlloca;
+
+  /// \brief Number of instructions in the analyzed blocks.
+  unsigned NumInsts;
+
+  /// \brief Number of analyzed blocks.
+  unsigned NumBlocks;
+
+  /// \brief Keeps track of basic block code size estimates.
+  DenseMap<const BasicBlock *, unsigned> NumBBInsts;
+
+  /// \brief Keep track of the number of calls to 'big' functions.
+  unsigned NumCalls;
+
+  /// \brief The number of calls to internal functions with a single caller.
+  ///
+  /// These are likely targets for future inlining, likely exposed by
+  /// interleaved devirtualization.
+  unsigned NumInlineCandidates;
+
+  /// \brief How many instructions produce vector values.
+  ///
+  /// The inliner is more aggressive with inlining vector kernels.
+  unsigned NumVectorInsts;
+
+  /// \brief How many 'ret' instructions the blocks contain.
+  unsigned NumRets;
+
+  CodeMetrics()
+      : exposesReturnsTwice(false), isRecursive(false), notDuplicatable(false),
+        usesDynamicAlloca(false), NumInsts(0), NumBlocks(0), NumCalls(0),
+        NumInlineCandidates(0), NumVectorInsts(0), NumRets(0) {}
+
+  /// \brief Add information about a block to the current state.
+  void analyzeBasicBlock(const BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI);
+};
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h

@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+//===-- ConstantFolding.h - Fold instructions into constants --------------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares routines for folding instructions into constants when all
+// operands are constants, for example "sub i32 1, 0" -> "1".
+//
+// Also, to supplement the basic VMCore ConstantExpr simplifications,
+// this file declares some additional folding routines that can make use of
+// DataLayout information. These functions cannot go in VMCore due to library
+// dependency issues.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CONSTANTFOLDING_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CONSTANTFOLDING_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class Constant;
+  class ConstantExpr;
+  class Instruction;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class TargetLibraryInfo;
+  class Function;
+  class Type;
+  template<typename T>
+  class ArrayRef;
+
+/// ConstantFoldInstruction - Try to constant fold the specified instruction.
+/// If successful, the constant result is returned, if not, null is returned.
+/// Note that this fails if not all of the operands are constant.  Otherwise,
+/// this function can only fail when attempting to fold instructions like loads
+/// and stores, which have no constant expression form.
+Constant *ConstantFoldInstruction(Instruction *I, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                  const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0);
+
+/// ConstantFoldConstantExpression - Attempt to fold the constant expression
+/// using the specified DataLayout.  If successful, the constant result is
+/// result is returned, if not, null is returned.
+Constant *ConstantFoldConstantExpression(const ConstantExpr *CE,
+                                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0);
+
+/// ConstantFoldInstOperands - Attempt to constant fold an instruction with the
+/// specified operands.  If successful, the constant result is returned, if not,
+/// null is returned.  Note that this function can fail when attempting to 
+/// fold instructions like loads and stores, which have no constant expression 
+/// form.
+///
+Constant *ConstantFoldInstOperands(unsigned Opcode, Type *DestTy,
+                                   ArrayRef<Constant *> Ops,
+                                   const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                   const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0);
+
+/// ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands - Attempt to constant fold a compare
+/// instruction (icmp/fcmp) with the specified operands.  If it fails, it
+/// returns a constant expression of the specified operands.
+///
+Constant *ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(unsigned Predicate,
+                                          Constant *LHS, Constant *RHS,
+                                          const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0);
+
+/// ConstantFoldInsertValueInstruction - Attempt to constant fold an insertvalue
+/// instruction with the specified operands and indices.  The constant result is
+/// returned if successful; if not, null is returned.
+Constant *ConstantFoldInsertValueInstruction(Constant *Agg, Constant *Val,
+                                             ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs);
+
+/// ConstantFoldLoadFromConstPtr - Return the value that a load from C would
+/// produce if it is constant and determinable.  If this is not determinable,
+/// return null.
+Constant *ConstantFoldLoadFromConstPtr(Constant *C, const DataLayout *TD = 0);
+
+/// ConstantFoldLoadThroughGEPConstantExpr - Given a constant and a
+/// getelementptr constantexpr, return the constant value being addressed by the
+/// constant expression, or null if something is funny and we can't decide.
+Constant *ConstantFoldLoadThroughGEPConstantExpr(Constant *C, ConstantExpr *CE);
+
+/// ConstantFoldLoadThroughGEPIndices - Given a constant and getelementptr
+/// indices (with an *implied* zero pointer index that is not in the list),
+/// return the constant value being addressed by a virtual load, or null if
+/// something is funny and we can't decide.
+Constant *ConstantFoldLoadThroughGEPIndices(Constant *C,
+                                            ArrayRef<Constant*> Indices);
+
+/// canConstantFoldCallTo - Return true if its even possible to fold a call to
+/// the specified function.
+bool canConstantFoldCallTo(const Function *F);
+
+/// ConstantFoldCall - Attempt to constant fold a call to the specified function
+/// with the specified arguments, returning null if unsuccessful.
+Constant *ConstantFoldCall(Function *F, ArrayRef<Constant *> Operands,
+                           const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0);
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ConstantsScanner.h

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+//==- llvm/Analysis/ConstantsScanner.h - Iterate over constants -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This class implements an iterator to walk through the constants referenced by
+// a method.  This is used by the Bitcode & Assembly writers to build constant
+// pools.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_CONSTANTSSCANNER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_CONSTANTSSCANNER_H
+
+#include "llvm/Support/InstIterator.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Constant;
+
+class constant_iterator : public std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag,
+                                               const Constant, ptrdiff_t> {
+  const_inst_iterator InstI;                // Method instruction iterator
+  unsigned OpIdx;                           // Operand index
+
+  typedef constant_iterator _Self;
+
+  inline bool isAtConstant() const {
+    assert(!InstI.atEnd() && OpIdx < InstI->getNumOperands() &&
+           "isAtConstant called with invalid arguments!");
+    return isa<Constant>(InstI->getOperand(OpIdx));
+  }
+
+public:
+  inline constant_iterator(const Function *F) : InstI(inst_begin(F)), OpIdx(0) {
+    // Advance to first constant... if we are not already at constant or end
+    if (InstI != inst_end(F) &&                            // InstI is valid?
+        (InstI->getNumOperands() == 0 || !isAtConstant())) // Not at constant?
+      operator++();
+  }
+
+  inline constant_iterator(const Function *F, bool)   // end ctor
+    : InstI(inst_end(F)), OpIdx(0) {
+  }
+
+  inline bool operator==(const _Self& x) const { return OpIdx == x.OpIdx &&
+                                                        InstI == x.InstI; }
+  inline bool operator!=(const _Self& x) const { return !operator==(x); }
+
+  inline pointer operator*() const {
+    assert(isAtConstant() && "Dereferenced an iterator at the end!");
+    return cast<Constant>(InstI->getOperand(OpIdx));
+  }
+  inline pointer operator->() const { return operator*(); }
+
+  inline _Self& operator++() {   // Preincrement implementation
+    ++OpIdx;
+    do {
+      unsigned NumOperands = InstI->getNumOperands();
+      while (OpIdx < NumOperands && !isAtConstant()) {
+        ++OpIdx;
+      }
+
+      if (OpIdx < NumOperands) return *this;  // Found a constant!
+      ++InstI;
+      OpIdx = 0;
+    } while (!InstI.atEnd());
+
+    return *this;  // At the end of the method
+  }
+
+  inline _Self operator++(int) { // Postincrement
+    _Self tmp = *this; ++*this; return tmp;
+  }
+
+  inline bool atEnd() const { return InstI.atEnd(); }
+};
+
+inline constant_iterator constant_begin(const Function *F) {
+  return constant_iterator(F);
+}
+
+inline constant_iterator constant_end(const Function *F) {
+  return constant_iterator(F, true);
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/DOTGraphTraitsPass.h

@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+//===-- DOTGraphTraitsPass.h - Print/View dotty graphs-----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// Templates to create dotty viewer and printer passes for GraphTraits graphs.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOTGRAPHTRAITSPASS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOTGRAPHTRAITSPASS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/CFGPrinter.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+template <class Analysis, bool Simple>
+class DOTGraphTraitsViewer : public FunctionPass {
+public:
+  DOTGraphTraitsViewer(StringRef GraphName, char &ID)
+    : FunctionPass(ID), Name(GraphName) {}
+
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F) {
+    Analysis *Graph = &getAnalysis<Analysis>();
+    std::string GraphName = DOTGraphTraits<Analysis*>::getGraphName(Graph);
+    std::string Title = GraphName + " for '" + F.getName().str() + "' function";
+
+    ViewGraph(Graph, Name, Simple, Title);
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+    AU.addRequired<Analysis>();
+  }
+
+private:
+  std::string Name;
+};
+
+template <class Analysis, bool Simple>
+class DOTGraphTraitsPrinter : public FunctionPass {
+public:
+  DOTGraphTraitsPrinter(StringRef GraphName, char &ID)
+    : FunctionPass(ID), Name(GraphName) {}
+
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F) {
+    Analysis *Graph = &getAnalysis<Analysis>();
+    std::string Filename = Name + "." + F.getName().str() + ".dot";
+    std::string ErrorInfo;
+
+    errs() << "Writing '" << Filename << "'...";
+
+    raw_fd_ostream File(Filename.c_str(), ErrorInfo);
+    std::string GraphName = DOTGraphTraits<Analysis*>::getGraphName(Graph);
+    std::string Title = GraphName + " for '" + F.getName().str() + "' function";
+
+    if (ErrorInfo.empty())
+      WriteGraph(File, Graph, Simple, Title);
+    else
+      errs() << "  error opening file for writing!";
+    errs() << "\n";
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+    AU.addRequired<Analysis>();
+  }
+
+private:
+  std::string Name;
+};
+
+template <class Analysis, bool Simple>
+class DOTGraphTraitsModuleViewer : public ModulePass {
+public:
+  DOTGraphTraitsModuleViewer(StringRef GraphName, char &ID)
+    : ModulePass(ID), Name(GraphName) {}
+
+  virtual bool runOnModule(Module &M) {
+    Analysis *Graph = &getAnalysis<Analysis>();
+    std::string Title = DOTGraphTraits<Analysis*>::getGraphName(Graph);
+
+    ViewGraph(Graph, Name, Simple, Title);
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+    AU.addRequired<Analysis>();
+  }
+
+private:
+  std::string Name;
+};
+
+template <class Analysis, bool Simple>
+class DOTGraphTraitsModulePrinter : public ModulePass {
+public:
+  DOTGraphTraitsModulePrinter(StringRef GraphName, char &ID)
+    : ModulePass(ID), Name(GraphName) {}
+
+  virtual bool runOnModule(Module &M) {
+    Analysis *Graph = &getAnalysis<Analysis>();
+    std::string Filename = Name + ".dot";
+    std::string ErrorInfo;
+
+    errs() << "Writing '" << Filename << "'...";
+
+    raw_fd_ostream File(Filename.c_str(), ErrorInfo);
+    std::string Title = DOTGraphTraits<Analysis*>::getGraphName(Graph);
+
+    if (ErrorInfo.empty())
+      WriteGraph(File, Graph, Simple, Title);
+    else
+      errs() << "  error opening file for writing!";
+    errs() << "\n";
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+    AU.addRequired<Analysis>();
+  }
+
+private:
+  std::string Name;
+};
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/DependenceAnalysis.h

@@ -0,0 +1,895 @@
+//===-- llvm/Analysis/DependenceAnalysis.h -------------------- -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// DependenceAnalysis is an LLVM pass that analyses dependences between memory
+// accesses. Currently, it is an implementation of the approach described in
+//
+//            Practical Dependence Testing
+//            Goff, Kennedy, Tseng
+//            PLDI 1991
+//
+// There's a single entry point that analyzes the dependence between a pair
+// of memory references in a function, returning either NULL, for no dependence,
+// or a more-or-less detailed description of the dependence between them.
+//
+// This pass exists to support the DependenceGraph pass. There are two separate
+// passes because there's a useful separation of concerns. A dependence exists
+// if two conditions are met:
+//
+//    1) Two instructions reference the same memory location, and
+//    2) There is a flow of control leading from one instruction to the other.
+//
+// DependenceAnalysis attacks the first condition; DependenceGraph will attack
+// the second (it's not yet ready).
+//
+// Please note that this is work in progress and the interface is subject to
+// change.
+//
+// Plausible changes:
+//    Return a set of more precise dependences instead of just one dependence
+//    summarizing all.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_DEPENDENCEANALYSIS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_DEPENDENCEANALYSIS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallBitVector.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class AliasAnalysis;
+  class Loop;
+  class LoopInfo;
+  class ScalarEvolution;
+  class SCEV;
+  class SCEVConstant;
+  class raw_ostream;
+
+  /// Dependence - This class represents a dependence between two memory
+  /// memory references in a function. It contains minimal information and
+  /// is used in the very common situation where the compiler is unable to
+  /// determine anything beyond the existence of a dependence; that is, it
+  /// represents a confused dependence (see also FullDependence). In most
+  /// cases (for output, flow, and anti dependences), the dependence implies
+  /// an ordering, where the source must precede the destination; in contrast,
+  /// input dependences are unordered.
+  class Dependence {
+  public:
+    Dependence(Instruction *Source,
+               Instruction *Destination) :
+      Src(Source), Dst(Destination) {}
+    virtual ~Dependence() {}
+
+    /// Dependence::DVEntry - Each level in the distance/direction vector
+    /// has a direction (or perhaps a union of several directions), and
+    /// perhaps a distance.
+    struct DVEntry {
+      enum { NONE = 0,
+             LT = 1,
+             EQ = 2,
+             LE = 3,
+             GT = 4,
+             NE = 5,
+             GE = 6,
+             ALL = 7 };
+      unsigned char Direction : 3; // Init to ALL, then refine.
+      bool Scalar    : 1; // Init to true.
+      bool PeelFirst : 1; // Peeling the first iteration will break dependence.
+      bool PeelLast  : 1; // Peeling the last iteration will break the dependence.
+      bool Splitable : 1; // Splitting the loop will break dependence.
+      const SCEV *Distance; // NULL implies no distance available.
+      DVEntry() : Direction(ALL), Scalar(true), PeelFirst(false),
+                  PeelLast(false), Splitable(false), Distance(NULL) { }
+    };
+
+    /// getSrc - Returns the source instruction for this dependence.
+    ///
+    Instruction *getSrc() const { return Src; }
+
+    /// getDst - Returns the destination instruction for this dependence.
+    ///
+    Instruction *getDst() const { return Dst; }
+
+    /// isInput - Returns true if this is an input dependence.
+    ///
+    bool isInput() const;
+
+    /// isOutput - Returns true if this is an output dependence.
+    ///
+    bool isOutput() const;
+
+    /// isFlow - Returns true if this is a flow (aka true) dependence.
+    ///
+    bool isFlow() const;
+
+    /// isAnti - Returns true if this is an anti dependence.
+    ///
+    bool isAnti() const;
+
+    /// isOrdered - Returns true if dependence is Output, Flow, or Anti
+    ///
+    bool isOrdered() const { return isOutput() || isFlow() || isAnti(); }
+
+    /// isUnordered - Returns true if dependence is Input
+    ///
+    bool isUnordered() const { return isInput(); }
+
+    /// isLoopIndependent - Returns true if this is a loop-independent
+    /// dependence.
+    virtual bool isLoopIndependent() const { return true; }
+
+    /// isConfused - Returns true if this dependence is confused
+    /// (the compiler understands nothing and makes worst-case
+    /// assumptions).
+    virtual bool isConfused() const { return true; }
+
+    /// isConsistent - Returns true if this dependence is consistent
+    /// (occurs every time the source and destination are executed).
+    virtual bool isConsistent() const { return false; }
+
+    /// getLevels - Returns the number of common loops surrounding the
+    /// source and destination of the dependence.
+    virtual unsigned getLevels() const { return 0; }
+
+    /// getDirection - Returns the direction associated with a particular
+    /// level.
+    virtual unsigned getDirection(unsigned Level) const { return DVEntry::ALL; }
+
+    /// getDistance - Returns the distance (or NULL) associated with a
+    /// particular level.
+    virtual const SCEV *getDistance(unsigned Level) const { return NULL; }
+
+    /// isPeelFirst - Returns true if peeling the first iteration from
+    /// this loop will break this dependence.
+    virtual bool isPeelFirst(unsigned Level) const { return false; }
+
+    /// isPeelLast - Returns true if peeling the last iteration from
+    /// this loop will break this dependence.
+    virtual bool isPeelLast(unsigned Level) const { return false; }
+
+    /// isSplitable - Returns true if splitting this loop will break
+    /// the dependence.
+    virtual bool isSplitable(unsigned Level) const { return false; }
+
+    /// isScalar - Returns true if a particular level is scalar; that is,
+    /// if no subscript in the source or destination mention the induction
+    /// variable associated with the loop at this level.
+    virtual bool isScalar(unsigned Level) const;
+
+    /// dump - For debugging purposes, dumps a dependence to OS.
+    ///
+    void dump(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+  private:
+    Instruction *Src, *Dst;
+    friend class DependenceAnalysis;
+  };
+
+
+  /// FullDependence - This class represents a dependence between two memory
+  /// references in a function. It contains detailed information about the
+  /// dependence (direction vectors, etc.) and is used when the compiler is
+  /// able to accurately analyze the interaction of the references; that is,
+  /// it is not a confused dependence (see Dependence). In most cases
+  /// (for output, flow, and anti dependences), the dependence implies an
+  /// ordering, where the source must precede the destination; in contrast,
+  /// input dependences are unordered.
+  class FullDependence : public Dependence {
+  public:
+    FullDependence(Instruction *Src,
+                   Instruction *Dst,
+                   bool LoopIndependent,
+                   unsigned Levels);
+    ~FullDependence() {
+      delete[] DV;
+    }
+
+    /// isLoopIndependent - Returns true if this is a loop-independent
+    /// dependence.
+    bool isLoopIndependent() const { return LoopIndependent; }
+
+    /// isConfused - Returns true if this dependence is confused
+    /// (the compiler understands nothing and makes worst-case
+    /// assumptions).
+    bool isConfused() const { return false; }
+
+    /// isConsistent - Returns true if this dependence is consistent
+    /// (occurs every time the source and destination are executed).
+    bool isConsistent() const { return Consistent; }
+
+    /// getLevels - Returns the number of common loops surrounding the
+    /// source and destination of the dependence.
+    unsigned getLevels() const { return Levels; }
+
+    /// getDirection - Returns the direction associated with a particular
+    /// level.
+    unsigned getDirection(unsigned Level) const;
+
+    /// getDistance - Returns the distance (or NULL) associated with a
+    /// particular level.
+    const SCEV *getDistance(unsigned Level) const;
+
+    /// isPeelFirst - Returns true if peeling the first iteration from
+    /// this loop will break this dependence.
+    bool isPeelFirst(unsigned Level) const;
+
+    /// isPeelLast - Returns true if peeling the last iteration from
+    /// this loop will break this dependence.
+    bool isPeelLast(unsigned Level) const;
+
+    /// isSplitable - Returns true if splitting the loop will break
+    /// the dependence.
+    bool isSplitable(unsigned Level) const;
+
+    /// isScalar - Returns true if a particular level is scalar; that is,
+    /// if no subscript in the source or destination mention the induction
+    /// variable associated with the loop at this level.
+    bool isScalar(unsigned Level) const;
+  private:
+    unsigned short Levels;
+    bool LoopIndependent;
+    bool Consistent; // Init to true, then refine.
+    DVEntry *DV;
+    friend class DependenceAnalysis;
+  };
+
+
+  /// DependenceAnalysis - This class is the main dependence-analysis driver.
+  ///
+  class DependenceAnalysis : public FunctionPass {
+    void operator=(const DependenceAnalysis &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+    DependenceAnalysis(const DependenceAnalysis &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  public:
+    /// depends - Tests for a dependence between the Src and Dst instructions.
+    /// Returns NULL if no dependence; otherwise, returns a Dependence (or a
+    /// FullDependence) with as much information as can be gleaned.
+    /// The flag PossiblyLoopIndependent should be set by the caller
+    /// if it appears that control flow can reach from Src to Dst
+    /// without traversing a loop back edge.
+    Dependence *depends(Instruction *Src,
+                        Instruction *Dst,
+                        bool PossiblyLoopIndependent);
+
+    /// getSplitIteration - Give a dependence that's splittable at some
+    /// particular level, return the iteration that should be used to split
+    /// the loop.
+    ///
+    /// Generally, the dependence analyzer will be used to build
+    /// a dependence graph for a function (basically a map from instructions
+    /// to dependences). Looking for cycles in the graph shows us loops
+    /// that cannot be trivially vectorized/parallelized.
+    ///
+    /// We can try to improve the situation by examining all the dependences
+    /// that make up the cycle, looking for ones we can break.
+    /// Sometimes, peeling the first or last iteration of a loop will break
+    /// dependences, and there are flags for those possibilities.
+    /// Sometimes, splitting a loop at some other iteration will do the trick,
+    /// and we've got a flag for that case. Rather than waste the space to
+    /// record the exact iteration (since we rarely know), we provide
+    /// a method that calculates the iteration. It's a drag that it must work
+    /// from scratch, but wonderful in that it's possible.
+    ///
+    /// Here's an example:
+    ///
+    ///    for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+    ///        A[i] = ...
+    ///        ... = A[11 - i]
+    ///
+    /// There's a loop-carried flow dependence from the store to the load,
+    /// found by the weak-crossing SIV test. The dependence will have a flag,
+    /// indicating that the dependence can be broken by splitting the loop.
+    /// Calling getSplitIteration will return 5.
+    /// Splitting the loop breaks the dependence, like so:
+    ///
+    ///    for (i = 0; i <= 5; i++)
+    ///        A[i] = ...
+    ///        ... = A[11 - i]
+    ///    for (i = 6; i < 10; i++)
+    ///        A[i] = ...
+    ///        ... = A[11 - i]
+    ///
+    /// breaks the dependence and allows us to vectorize/parallelize
+    /// both loops.
+    const SCEV *getSplitIteration(const Dependence *Dep, unsigned Level);
+
+  private:
+    AliasAnalysis *AA;
+    ScalarEvolution *SE;
+    LoopInfo *LI;
+    Function *F;
+
+    /// Subscript - This private struct represents a pair of subscripts from
+    /// a pair of potentially multi-dimensional array references. We use a
+    /// vector of them to guide subscript partitioning.
+    struct Subscript {
+      const SCEV *Src;
+      const SCEV *Dst;
+      enum ClassificationKind { ZIV, SIV, RDIV, MIV, NonLinear } Classification;
+      SmallBitVector Loops;
+      SmallBitVector GroupLoops;
+      SmallBitVector Group;
+    };
+
+    struct CoefficientInfo {
+      const SCEV *Coeff;
+      const SCEV *PosPart;
+      const SCEV *NegPart;
+      const SCEV *Iterations;
+    };
+
+    struct BoundInfo {
+      const SCEV *Iterations;
+      const SCEV *Upper[8];
+      const SCEV *Lower[8];
+      unsigned char Direction;
+      unsigned char DirSet;
+    };
+
+    /// Constraint - This private class represents a constraint, as defined
+    /// in the paper
+    ///
+    ///           Practical Dependence Testing
+    ///           Goff, Kennedy, Tseng
+    ///           PLDI 1991
+    ///
+    /// There are 5 kinds of constraint, in a hierarchy.
+    ///   1) Any - indicates no constraint, any dependence is possible.
+    ///   2) Line - A line ax + by = c, where a, b, and c are parameters,
+    ///             representing the dependence equation.
+    ///   3) Distance - The value d of the dependence distance;
+    ///   4) Point - A point <x, y> representing the dependence from
+    ///              iteration x to iteration y.
+    ///   5) Empty - No dependence is possible.
+    class Constraint {
+    private:
+      enum ConstraintKind { Empty, Point, Distance, Line, Any } Kind;
+      ScalarEvolution *SE;
+      const SCEV *A;
+      const SCEV *B;
+      const SCEV *C;
+      const Loop *AssociatedLoop;
+    public:
+      /// isEmpty - Return true if the constraint is of kind Empty.
+      bool isEmpty() const { return Kind == Empty; }
+
+      /// isPoint - Return true if the constraint is of kind Point.
+      bool isPoint() const { return Kind == Point; }
+
+      /// isDistance - Return true if the constraint is of kind Distance.
+      bool isDistance() const { return Kind == Distance; }
+
+      /// isLine - Return true if the constraint is of kind Line.
+      /// Since Distance's can also be represented as Lines, we also return
+      /// true if the constraint is of kind Distance.
+      bool isLine() const { return Kind == Line || Kind == Distance; }
+
+      /// isAny - Return true if the constraint is of kind Any;
+      bool isAny() const { return Kind == Any; }
+
+      /// getX - If constraint is a point <X, Y>, returns X.
+      /// Otherwise assert.
+      const SCEV *getX() const;
+
+      /// getY - If constraint is a point <X, Y>, returns Y.
+      /// Otherwise assert.
+      const SCEV *getY() const;
+
+      /// getA - If constraint is a line AX + BY = C, returns A.
+      /// Otherwise assert.
+      const SCEV *getA() const;
+
+      /// getB - If constraint is a line AX + BY = C, returns B.
+      /// Otherwise assert.
+      const SCEV *getB() const;
+
+      /// getC - If constraint is a line AX + BY = C, returns C.
+      /// Otherwise assert.
+      const SCEV *getC() const;
+
+      /// getD - If constraint is a distance, returns D.
+      /// Otherwise assert.
+      const SCEV *getD() const;
+
+      /// getAssociatedLoop - Returns the loop associated with this constraint.
+      const Loop *getAssociatedLoop() const;
+
+      /// setPoint - Change a constraint to Point.
+      void setPoint(const SCEV *X, const SCEV *Y, const Loop *CurrentLoop);
+
+      /// setLine - Change a constraint to Line.
+      void setLine(const SCEV *A, const SCEV *B,
+                   const SCEV *C, const Loop *CurrentLoop);
+
+      /// setDistance - Change a constraint to Distance.
+      void setDistance(const SCEV *D, const Loop *CurrentLoop);
+
+      /// setEmpty - Change a constraint to Empty.
+      void setEmpty();
+
+      /// setAny - Change a constraint to Any.
+      void setAny(ScalarEvolution *SE);
+
+      /// dump - For debugging purposes. Dumps the constraint
+      /// out to OS.
+      void dump(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+    };
+
+
+    /// establishNestingLevels - Examines the loop nesting of the Src and Dst
+    /// instructions and establishes their shared loops. Sets the variables
+    /// CommonLevels, SrcLevels, and MaxLevels.
+    /// The source and destination instructions needn't be contained in the same
+    /// loop. The routine establishNestingLevels finds the level of most deeply
+    /// nested loop that contains them both, CommonLevels. An instruction that's
+    /// not contained in a loop is at level = 0. MaxLevels is equal to the level
+    /// of the source plus the level of the destination, minus CommonLevels.
+    /// This lets us allocate vectors MaxLevels in length, with room for every
+    /// distinct loop referenced in both the source and destination subscripts.
+    /// The variable SrcLevels is the nesting depth of the source instruction.
+    /// It's used to help calculate distinct loops referenced by the destination.
+    /// Here's the map from loops to levels:
+    ///            0 - unused
+    ///            1 - outermost common loop
+    ///          ... - other common loops
+    /// CommonLevels - innermost common loop
+    ///          ... - loops containing Src but not Dst
+    ///    SrcLevels - innermost loop containing Src but not Dst
+    ///          ... - loops containing Dst but not Src
+    ///    MaxLevels - innermost loop containing Dst but not Src
+    /// Consider the follow code fragment:
+    ///    for (a = ...) {
+    ///      for (b = ...) {
+    ///        for (c = ...) {
+    ///          for (d = ...) {
+    ///            A[] = ...;
+    ///          }
+    ///        }
+    ///        for (e = ...) {
+    ///          for (f = ...) {
+    ///            for (g = ...) {
+    ///              ... = A[];
+    ///            }
+    ///          }
+    ///        }
+    ///      }
+    ///    }
+    /// If we're looking at the possibility of a dependence between the store
+    /// to A (the Src) and the load from A (the Dst), we'll note that they
+    /// have 2 loops in common, so CommonLevels will equal 2 and the direction
+    /// vector for Result will have 2 entries. SrcLevels = 4 and MaxLevels = 7.
+    /// A map from loop names to level indices would look like
+    ///     a - 1
+    ///     b - 2 = CommonLevels
+    ///     c - 3
+    ///     d - 4 = SrcLevels
+    ///     e - 5
+    ///     f - 6
+    ///     g - 7 = MaxLevels
+    void establishNestingLevels(const Instruction *Src,
+                                const Instruction *Dst);
+
+    unsigned CommonLevels, SrcLevels, MaxLevels;
+
+    /// mapSrcLoop - Given one of the loops containing the source, return
+    /// its level index in our numbering scheme.
+    unsigned mapSrcLoop(const Loop *SrcLoop) const;
+
+    /// mapDstLoop - Given one of the loops containing the destination,
+    /// return its level index in our numbering scheme.
+    unsigned mapDstLoop(const Loop *DstLoop) const;
+
+    /// isLoopInvariant - Returns true if Expression is loop invariant
+    /// in LoopNest.
+    bool isLoopInvariant(const SCEV *Expression, const Loop *LoopNest) const;
+
+    /// removeMatchingExtensions - Examines a subscript pair.
+    /// If the source and destination are identically sign (or zero)
+    /// extended, it strips off the extension in an effort to
+    /// simplify the actual analysis.
+    void removeMatchingExtensions(Subscript *Pair);
+
+    /// collectCommonLoops - Finds the set of loops from the LoopNest that
+    /// have a level <= CommonLevels and are referred to by the SCEV Expression.
+    void collectCommonLoops(const SCEV *Expression,
+                            const Loop *LoopNest,
+                            SmallBitVector &Loops) const;
+
+    /// checkSrcSubscript - Examines the SCEV Src, returning true iff it's
+    /// linear. Collect the set of loops mentioned by Src.
+    bool checkSrcSubscript(const SCEV *Src,
+                           const Loop *LoopNest,
+                           SmallBitVector &Loops);
+
+    /// checkDstSubscript - Examines the SCEV Dst, returning true iff it's
+    /// linear. Collect the set of loops mentioned by Dst.
+    bool checkDstSubscript(const SCEV *Dst,
+                           const Loop *LoopNest,
+                           SmallBitVector &Loops);
+
+    /// isKnownPredicate - Compare X and Y using the predicate Pred.
+    /// Basically a wrapper for SCEV::isKnownPredicate,
+    /// but tries harder, especially in the presence of sign and zero
+    /// extensions and symbolics.
+    bool isKnownPredicate(ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                          const SCEV *X,
+                          const SCEV *Y) const;
+
+    /// collectUpperBound - All subscripts are the same type (on my machine,
+    /// an i64). The loop bound may be a smaller type. collectUpperBound
+    /// find the bound, if available, and zero extends it to the Type T.
+    /// (I zero extend since the bound should always be >= 0.)
+    /// If no upper bound is available, return NULL.
+    const SCEV *collectUpperBound(const Loop *l, Type *T) const;
+
+    /// collectConstantUpperBound - Calls collectUpperBound(), then
+    /// attempts to cast it to SCEVConstant. If the cast fails,
+    /// returns NULL.
+    const SCEVConstant *collectConstantUpperBound(const Loop *l, Type *T) const;
+
+    /// classifyPair - Examines the subscript pair (the Src and Dst SCEVs)
+    /// and classifies it as either ZIV, SIV, RDIV, MIV, or Nonlinear.
+    /// Collects the associated loops in a set.
+    Subscript::ClassificationKind classifyPair(const SCEV *Src,
+                                           const Loop *SrcLoopNest,
+                                           const SCEV *Dst,
+                                           const Loop *DstLoopNest,
+                                           SmallBitVector &Loops);
+
+    /// testZIV - Tests the ZIV subscript pair (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// If the dependence isn't proven to exist,
+    /// marks the Result as inconsistent.
+    bool testZIV(const SCEV *Src,
+                 const SCEV *Dst,
+                 FullDependence &Result) const;
+
+    /// testSIV - Tests the SIV subscript pair (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a1*i] and [c2 + a2*j], where
+    /// i and j are induction variables, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a1 and a2 are constant.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Sets appropriate direction vector entry and, when possible,
+    /// the distance vector entry.
+    /// If the dependence isn't proven to exist,
+    /// marks the Result as inconsistent.
+    bool testSIV(const SCEV *Src,
+                 const SCEV *Dst,
+                 unsigned &Level,
+                 FullDependence &Result,
+                 Constraint &NewConstraint,
+                 const SCEV *&SplitIter) const;
+
+    /// testRDIV - Tests the RDIV subscript pair (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a1*i] and [c2 + a2*j]
+    /// where i and j are induction variables, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a1 and a2 are constant.
+    /// With minor algebra, this test can also be used for things like
+    /// [c1 + a1*i + a2*j][c2].
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Marks the Result as inconsistent.
+    bool testRDIV(const SCEV *Src,
+                  const SCEV *Dst,
+                  FullDependence &Result) const;
+
+    /// testMIV - Tests the MIV subscript pair (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Returns true if dependence disproved.
+    /// Can sometimes refine direction vectors.
+    bool testMIV(const SCEV *Src,
+                 const SCEV *Dst,
+                 const SmallBitVector &Loops,
+                 FullDependence &Result) const;
+
+    /// strongSIVtest - Tests the strong SIV subscript pair (Src and Dst)
+    /// for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a*i] and [c2 + a*i],
+    /// where i is an induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a is a constant
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Sets appropriate direction and distance.
+    bool strongSIVtest(const SCEV *Coeff,
+                       const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                       const SCEV *DstConst,
+                       const Loop *CurrentLoop,
+                       unsigned Level,
+                       FullDependence &Result,
+                       Constraint &NewConstraint) const;
+
+    /// weakCrossingSIVtest - Tests the weak-crossing SIV subscript pair
+    /// (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a*i] and [c2 - a*i],
+    /// where i is an induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a is a constant.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Sets appropriate direction entry.
+    /// Set consistent to false.
+    /// Marks the dependence as splitable.
+    bool weakCrossingSIVtest(const SCEV *SrcCoeff,
+                             const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                             const SCEV *DstConst,
+                             const Loop *CurrentLoop,
+                             unsigned Level,
+                             FullDependence &Result,
+                             Constraint &NewConstraint,
+                             const SCEV *&SplitIter) const;
+
+    /// ExactSIVtest - Tests the SIV subscript pair
+    /// (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a1*i] and [c2 + a2*i],
+    /// where i is an induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a1 and a2 are constant.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Sets appropriate direction entry.
+    /// Set consistent to false.
+    bool exactSIVtest(const SCEV *SrcCoeff,
+                      const SCEV *DstCoeff,
+                      const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                      const SCEV *DstConst,
+                      const Loop *CurrentLoop,
+                      unsigned Level,
+                      FullDependence &Result,
+                      Constraint &NewConstraint) const;
+
+    /// weakZeroSrcSIVtest - Tests the weak-zero SIV subscript pair
+    /// (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1] and [c2 + a*i],
+    /// where i is an induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a is a constant. See also weakZeroDstSIVtest.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Sets appropriate direction entry.
+    /// Set consistent to false.
+    /// If loop peeling will break the dependence, mark appropriately.
+    bool weakZeroSrcSIVtest(const SCEV *DstCoeff,
+                            const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                            const SCEV *DstConst,
+                            const Loop *CurrentLoop,
+                            unsigned Level,
+                            FullDependence &Result,
+                            Constraint &NewConstraint) const;
+
+    /// weakZeroDstSIVtest - Tests the weak-zero SIV subscript pair
+    /// (Src and Dst) for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a*i] and [c2],
+    /// where i is an induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a is a constant. See also weakZeroSrcSIVtest.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// If there might be a dependence, returns false.
+    /// Sets appropriate direction entry.
+    /// Set consistent to false.
+    /// If loop peeling will break the dependence, mark appropriately.
+    bool weakZeroDstSIVtest(const SCEV *SrcCoeff,
+                            const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                            const SCEV *DstConst,
+                            const Loop *CurrentLoop,
+                            unsigned Level,
+                            FullDependence &Result,
+                            Constraint &NewConstraint) const;
+
+    /// exactRDIVtest - Tests the RDIV subscript pair for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a*i] and [c2 + b*j],
+    /// where i and j are induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a and b are constants.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// Marks the result as inconsistent.
+    /// Works in some cases that symbolicRDIVtest doesn't,
+    /// and vice versa.
+    bool exactRDIVtest(const SCEV *SrcCoeff,
+                       const SCEV *DstCoeff,
+                       const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                       const SCEV *DstConst,
+                       const Loop *SrcLoop,
+                       const Loop *DstLoop,
+                       FullDependence &Result) const;
+
+    /// symbolicRDIVtest - Tests the RDIV subscript pair for dependence.
+    /// Things of the form [c1 + a*i] and [c2 + b*j],
+    /// where i and j are induction variable, c1 and c2 are loop invariant,
+    /// and a and b are constants.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// Marks the result as inconsistent.
+    /// Works in some cases that exactRDIVtest doesn't,
+    /// and vice versa. Can also be used as a backup for
+    /// ordinary SIV tests.
+    bool symbolicRDIVtest(const SCEV *SrcCoeff,
+                          const SCEV *DstCoeff,
+                          const SCEV *SrcConst,
+                          const SCEV *DstConst,
+                          const Loop *SrcLoop,
+                          const Loop *DstLoop) const;
+
+    /// gcdMIVtest - Tests an MIV subscript pair for dependence.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// Marks the result as inconsistent.
+    /// Can sometimes disprove the equal direction for 1 or more loops.
+    //  Can handle some symbolics that even the SIV tests don't get,
+    /// so we use it as a backup for everything.
+    bool gcdMIVtest(const SCEV *Src,
+                    const SCEV *Dst,
+                    FullDependence &Result) const;
+
+    /// banerjeeMIVtest - Tests an MIV subscript pair for dependence.
+    /// Returns true if any possible dependence is disproved.
+    /// Marks the result as inconsistent.
+    /// Computes directions.
+    bool banerjeeMIVtest(const SCEV *Src,
+                         const SCEV *Dst,
+                         const SmallBitVector &Loops,
+                         FullDependence &Result) const;
+
+    /// collectCoefficientInfo - Walks through the subscript,
+    /// collecting each coefficient, the associated loop bounds,
+    /// and recording its positive and negative parts for later use.
+    CoefficientInfo *collectCoeffInfo(const SCEV *Subscript,
+                                      bool SrcFlag,
+                                      const SCEV *&Constant) const;
+
+    /// getPositivePart - X^+ = max(X, 0).
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getPositivePart(const SCEV *X) const;
+
+    /// getNegativePart - X^- = min(X, 0).
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getNegativePart(const SCEV *X) const;
+
+    /// getLowerBound - Looks through all the bounds info and
+    /// computes the lower bound given the current direction settings
+    /// at each level.
+    const SCEV *getLowerBound(BoundInfo *Bound) const;
+
+    /// getUpperBound - Looks through all the bounds info and
+    /// computes the upper bound given the current direction settings
+    /// at each level.
+    const SCEV *getUpperBound(BoundInfo *Bound) const;
+
+    /// exploreDirections - Hierarchically expands the direction vector
+    /// search space, combining the directions of discovered dependences
+    /// in the DirSet field of Bound. Returns the number of distinct
+    /// dependences discovered. If the dependence is disproved,
+    /// it will return 0.
+    unsigned exploreDirections(unsigned Level,
+                               CoefficientInfo *A,
+                               CoefficientInfo *B,
+                               BoundInfo *Bound,
+                               const SmallBitVector &Loops,
+                               unsigned &DepthExpanded,
+                               const SCEV *Delta) const;
+
+    /// testBounds - Returns true iff the current bounds are plausible.
+    ///
+    bool testBounds(unsigned char DirKind,
+                    unsigned Level,
+                    BoundInfo *Bound,
+                    const SCEV *Delta) const;
+
+    /// findBoundsALL - Computes the upper and lower bounds for level K
+    /// using the * direction. Records them in Bound.
+    void findBoundsALL(CoefficientInfo *A,
+                       CoefficientInfo *B,
+                       BoundInfo *Bound,
+                       unsigned K) const;
+
+    /// findBoundsLT - Computes the upper and lower bounds for level K
+    /// using the < direction. Records them in Bound.
+    void findBoundsLT(CoefficientInfo *A,
+                      CoefficientInfo *B,
+                      BoundInfo *Bound,
+                      unsigned K) const;
+
+    /// findBoundsGT - Computes the upper and lower bounds for level K
+    /// using the > direction. Records them in Bound.
+    void findBoundsGT(CoefficientInfo *A,
+                      CoefficientInfo *B,
+                      BoundInfo *Bound,
+                      unsigned K) const;
+
+    /// findBoundsEQ - Computes the upper and lower bounds for level K
+    /// using the = direction. Records them in Bound.
+    void findBoundsEQ(CoefficientInfo *A,
+                      CoefficientInfo *B,
+                      BoundInfo *Bound,
+                      unsigned K) const;
+
+    /// intersectConstraints - Updates X with the intersection
+    /// of the Constraints X and Y. Returns true if X has changed.
+    bool intersectConstraints(Constraint *X,
+                              const Constraint *Y);
+
+    /// propagate - Review the constraints, looking for opportunities
+    /// to simplify a subscript pair (Src and Dst).
+    /// Return true if some simplification occurs.
+    /// If the simplification isn't exact (that is, if it is conservative
+    /// in terms of dependence), set consistent to false.
+    bool propagate(const SCEV *&Src,
+                   const SCEV *&Dst,
+                   SmallBitVector &Loops,
+                   SmallVector<Constraint, 4> &Constraints,
+                   bool &Consistent);
+
+    /// propagateDistance - Attempt to propagate a distance
+    /// constraint into a subscript pair (Src and Dst).
+    /// Return true if some simplification occurs.
+    /// If the simplification isn't exact (that is, if it is conservative
+    /// in terms of dependence), set consistent to false.
+    bool propagateDistance(const SCEV *&Src,
+                           const SCEV *&Dst,
+                           Constraint &CurConstraint,
+                           bool &Consistent);
+
+    /// propagatePoint - Attempt to propagate a point
+    /// constraint into a subscript pair (Src and Dst).
+    /// Return true if some simplification occurs.
+    bool propagatePoint(const SCEV *&Src,
+                        const SCEV *&Dst,
+                        Constraint &CurConstraint);
+
+    /// propagateLine - Attempt to propagate a line
+    /// constraint into a subscript pair (Src and Dst).
+    /// Return true if some simplification occurs.
+    /// If the simplification isn't exact (that is, if it is conservative
+    /// in terms of dependence), set consistent to false.
+    bool propagateLine(const SCEV *&Src,
+                       const SCEV *&Dst,
+                       Constraint &CurConstraint,
+                       bool &Consistent);
+
+    /// findCoefficient - Given a linear SCEV,
+    /// return the coefficient corresponding to specified loop.
+    /// If there isn't one, return the SCEV constant 0.
+    /// For example, given a*i + b*j + c*k, returning the coefficient
+    /// corresponding to the j loop would yield b.
+    const SCEV *findCoefficient(const SCEV *Expr,
+                                const Loop *TargetLoop) const;
+
+    /// zeroCoefficient - Given a linear SCEV,
+    /// return the SCEV given by zeroing out the coefficient
+    /// corresponding to the specified loop.
+    /// For example, given a*i + b*j + c*k, zeroing the coefficient
+    /// corresponding to the j loop would yield a*i + c*k.
+    const SCEV *zeroCoefficient(const SCEV *Expr,
+                                const Loop *TargetLoop) const;
+
+    /// addToCoefficient - Given a linear SCEV Expr,
+    /// return the SCEV given by adding some Value to the
+    /// coefficient corresponding to the specified TargetLoop.
+    /// For example, given a*i + b*j + c*k, adding 1 to the coefficient
+    /// corresponding to the j loop would yield a*i + (b+1)*j + c*k.
+    const SCEV *addToCoefficient(const SCEV *Expr,
+                                 const Loop *TargetLoop,
+                                 const SCEV *Value)  const;
+
+    /// updateDirection - Update direction vector entry
+    /// based on the current constraint.
+    void updateDirection(Dependence::DVEntry &Level,
+                         const Constraint &CurConstraint) const;
+  public:
+    static char ID; // Class identification, replacement for typeinfo
+    DependenceAnalysis() : FunctionPass(ID) {
+      initializeDependenceAnalysisPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+    }
+
+    bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+    void releaseMemory();
+    void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &) const;
+    void print(raw_ostream &, const Module * = 0) const;
+  }; // class DependenceAnalysis
+
+  /// createDependenceAnalysisPass - This creates an instance of the
+  /// DependenceAnalysis pass.
+  FunctionPass *createDependenceAnalysisPass();
+
+} // namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/DomPrinter.h

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+//===-- DomPrinter.h - Dom printer external interface ------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines external functions that can be called to explicitly
+// instantiate the dominance tree printer.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMPRINTER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMPRINTER_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class FunctionPass;
+  FunctionPass *createDomPrinterPass();
+  FunctionPass *createDomOnlyPrinterPass();
+  FunctionPass *createDomViewerPass();
+  FunctionPass *createDomOnlyViewerPass();
+  FunctionPass *createPostDomPrinterPass();
+  FunctionPass *createPostDomOnlyPrinterPass();
+  FunctionPass *createPostDomViewerPass();
+  FunctionPass *createPostDomOnlyViewerPass();
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/DominanceFrontier.h

@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/DominanceFrontier.h - Dominator Frontiers --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the DominanceFrontier class, which calculate and holds the
+// dominance frontier for a function.
+//
+// This should be considered deprecated, don't add any more uses of this data
+// structure.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMINANCEFRONTIER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMINANCEFRONTIER_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/Dominators.h"
+#include <map>
+#include <set>
+
+namespace llvm {
+  
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// DominanceFrontierBase - Common base class for computing forward and inverse
+/// dominance frontiers for a function.
+///
+class DominanceFrontierBase : public FunctionPass {
+public:
+  typedef std::set<BasicBlock*>             DomSetType;    // Dom set for a bb
+  typedef std::map<BasicBlock*, DomSetType> DomSetMapType; // Dom set map
+protected:
+  DomSetMapType Frontiers;
+  std::vector<BasicBlock*> Roots;
+  const bool IsPostDominators;
+
+public:
+  DominanceFrontierBase(char &ID, bool isPostDom)
+    : FunctionPass(ID), IsPostDominators(isPostDom) {}
+
+  /// getRoots - Return the root blocks of the current CFG.  This may include
+  /// multiple blocks if we are computing post dominators.  For forward
+  /// dominators, this will always be a single block (the entry node).
+  ///
+  inline const std::vector<BasicBlock*> &getRoots() const { return Roots; }
+
+  /// isPostDominator - Returns true if analysis based of postdoms
+  ///
+  bool isPostDominator() const { return IsPostDominators; }
+
+  virtual void releaseMemory() { Frontiers.clear(); }
+
+  // Accessor interface:
+  typedef DomSetMapType::iterator iterator;
+  typedef DomSetMapType::const_iterator const_iterator;
+  iterator       begin()       { return Frontiers.begin(); }
+  const_iterator begin() const { return Frontiers.begin(); }
+  iterator       end()         { return Frontiers.end(); }
+  const_iterator end()   const { return Frontiers.end(); }
+  iterator       find(BasicBlock *B)       { return Frontiers.find(B); }
+  const_iterator find(BasicBlock *B) const { return Frontiers.find(B); }
+
+  iterator addBasicBlock(BasicBlock *BB, const DomSetType &frontier) {
+    assert(find(BB) == end() && "Block already in DominanceFrontier!");
+    return Frontiers.insert(std::make_pair(BB, frontier)).first;
+  }
+
+  /// removeBlock - Remove basic block BB's frontier.
+  void removeBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
+    assert(find(BB) != end() && "Block is not in DominanceFrontier!");
+    for (iterator I = begin(), E = end(); I != E; ++I)
+      I->second.erase(BB);
+    Frontiers.erase(BB);
+  }
+
+  void addToFrontier(iterator I, BasicBlock *Node) {
+    assert(I != end() && "BB is not in DominanceFrontier!");
+    I->second.insert(Node);
+  }
+
+  void removeFromFrontier(iterator I, BasicBlock *Node) {
+    assert(I != end() && "BB is not in DominanceFrontier!");
+    assert(I->second.count(Node) && "Node is not in DominanceFrontier of BB");
+    I->second.erase(Node);
+  }
+
+  /// compareDomSet - Return false if two domsets match. Otherwise
+  /// return true;
+  bool compareDomSet(DomSetType &DS1, const DomSetType &DS2) const {
+    std::set<BasicBlock *> tmpSet;
+    for (DomSetType::const_iterator I = DS2.begin(),
+           E = DS2.end(); I != E; ++I)
+      tmpSet.insert(*I);
+
+    for (DomSetType::const_iterator I = DS1.begin(),
+           E = DS1.end(); I != E; ) {
+      BasicBlock *Node = *I++;
+
+      if (tmpSet.erase(Node) == 0)
+        // Node is in DS1 but not in DS2.
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    if (!tmpSet.empty())
+      // There are nodes that are in DS2 but not in DS1.
+      return true;
+
+    // DS1 and DS2 matches.
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  /// compare - Return true if the other dominance frontier base matches
+  /// this dominance frontier base. Otherwise return false.
+  bool compare(DominanceFrontierBase &Other) const {
+    DomSetMapType tmpFrontiers;
+    for (DomSetMapType::const_iterator I = Other.begin(),
+           E = Other.end(); I != E; ++I)
+      tmpFrontiers.insert(std::make_pair(I->first, I->second));
+
+    for (DomSetMapType::iterator I = tmpFrontiers.begin(),
+           E = tmpFrontiers.end(); I != E; ) {
+      BasicBlock *Node = I->first;
+      const_iterator DFI = find(Node);
+      if (DFI == end())
+        return true;
+
+      if (compareDomSet(I->second, DFI->second))
+        return true;
+
+      ++I;
+      tmpFrontiers.erase(Node);
+    }
+
+    if (!tmpFrontiers.empty())
+      return true;
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  /// print - Convert to human readable form
+  ///
+  virtual void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module* = 0) const;
+
+  /// dump - Dump the dominance frontier to dbgs().
+  void dump() const;
+};
+
+
+//===-------------------------------------
+/// DominanceFrontier Class - Concrete subclass of DominanceFrontierBase that is
+/// used to compute a forward dominator frontiers.
+///
+class DominanceFrontier : public DominanceFrontierBase {
+  virtual void anchor();
+public:
+  static char ID; // Pass ID, replacement for typeid
+  DominanceFrontier() :
+    DominanceFrontierBase(ID, false) {
+      initializeDominanceFrontierPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+    }
+
+  BasicBlock *getRoot() const {
+    assert(Roots.size() == 1 && "Should always have entry node!");
+    return Roots[0];
+  }
+
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &) {
+    Frontiers.clear();
+    DominatorTree &DT = getAnalysis<DominatorTree>();
+    Roots = DT.getRoots();
+    assert(Roots.size() == 1 && "Only one entry block for forward domfronts!");
+    calculate(DT, DT[Roots[0]]);
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+    AU.addRequired<DominatorTree>();
+  }
+
+  const DomSetType &calculate(const DominatorTree &DT,
+                              const DomTreeNode *Node);
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/DominatorInternals.h

@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+//=== llvm/Analysis/DominatorInternals.h - Dominator Calculation -*- C++ -*-==//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMINATOR_INTERNALS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMINATOR_INTERNALS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/Dominators.h"
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// DominatorTree construction - This pass constructs immediate dominator
+// information for a flow-graph based on the algorithm described in this
+// document:
+//
+//   A Fast Algorithm for Finding Dominators in a Flowgraph
+//   T. Lengauer & R. Tarjan, ACM TOPLAS July 1979, pgs 121-141.
+//
+// This implements the O(n*log(n)) versions of EVAL and LINK, because it turns
+// out that the theoretically slower O(n*log(n)) implementation is actually
+// faster than the almost-linear O(n*alpha(n)) version, even for large CFGs.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+template<class GraphT>
+unsigned DFSPass(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>& DT,
+                 typename GraphT::NodeType* V, unsigned N) {
+  // This is more understandable as a recursive algorithm, but we can't use the
+  // recursive algorithm due to stack depth issues.  Keep it here for
+  // documentation purposes.
+#if 0
+  InfoRec &VInfo = DT.Info[DT.Roots[i]];
+  VInfo.DFSNum = VInfo.Semi = ++N;
+  VInfo.Label = V;
+
+  Vertex.push_back(V);        // Vertex[n] = V;
+
+  for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(V), E = succ_end(V); SI != E; ++SI) {
+    InfoRec &SuccVInfo = DT.Info[*SI];
+    if (SuccVInfo.Semi == 0) {
+      SuccVInfo.Parent = V;
+      N = DTDFSPass(DT, *SI, N);
+    }
+  }
+#else
+  bool IsChildOfArtificialExit = (N != 0);
+
+  SmallVector<std::pair<typename GraphT::NodeType*,
+                        typename GraphT::ChildIteratorType>, 32> Worklist;
+  Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(V, GraphT::child_begin(V)));
+  while (!Worklist.empty()) {
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* BB = Worklist.back().first;
+    typename GraphT::ChildIteratorType NextSucc = Worklist.back().second;
+
+    typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &BBInfo =
+                                                                    DT.Info[BB];
+
+    // First time we visited this BB?
+    if (NextSucc == GraphT::child_begin(BB)) {
+      BBInfo.DFSNum = BBInfo.Semi = ++N;
+      BBInfo.Label = BB;
+
+      DT.Vertex.push_back(BB);       // Vertex[n] = V;
+
+      if (IsChildOfArtificialExit)
+        BBInfo.Parent = 1;
+
+      IsChildOfArtificialExit = false;
+    }
+
+    // store the DFS number of the current BB - the reference to BBInfo might
+    // get invalidated when processing the successors.
+    unsigned BBDFSNum = BBInfo.DFSNum;
+
+    // If we are done with this block, remove it from the worklist.
+    if (NextSucc == GraphT::child_end(BB)) {
+      Worklist.pop_back();
+      continue;
+    }
+
+    // Increment the successor number for the next time we get to it.
+    ++Worklist.back().second;
+    
+    // Visit the successor next, if it isn't already visited.
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* Succ = *NextSucc;
+
+    typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &SuccVInfo =
+                                                                  DT.Info[Succ];
+    if (SuccVInfo.Semi == 0) {
+      SuccVInfo.Parent = BBDFSNum;
+      Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(Succ, GraphT::child_begin(Succ)));
+    }
+  }
+#endif
+    return N;
+}
+
+template<class GraphT>
+typename GraphT::NodeType* 
+Eval(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>& DT,
+     typename GraphT::NodeType *VIn, unsigned LastLinked) {
+  typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &VInInfo =
+                                                                  DT.Info[VIn];
+  if (VInInfo.DFSNum < LastLinked)
+    return VIn;
+
+  SmallVector<typename GraphT::NodeType*, 32> Work;
+  SmallPtrSet<typename GraphT::NodeType*, 32> Visited;
+
+  if (VInInfo.Parent >= LastLinked)
+    Work.push_back(VIn);
+  
+  while (!Work.empty()) {
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* V = Work.back();
+    typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &VInfo =
+                                                                     DT.Info[V];
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* VAncestor = DT.Vertex[VInfo.Parent];
+
+    // Process Ancestor first
+    if (Visited.insert(VAncestor) && VInfo.Parent >= LastLinked) {
+      Work.push_back(VAncestor);
+      continue;
+    } 
+    Work.pop_back(); 
+
+    // Update VInfo based on Ancestor info
+    if (VInfo.Parent < LastLinked)
+      continue;
+
+    typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &VAInfo =
+                                                             DT.Info[VAncestor];
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* VAncestorLabel = VAInfo.Label;
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* VLabel = VInfo.Label;
+    if (DT.Info[VAncestorLabel].Semi < DT.Info[VLabel].Semi)
+      VInfo.Label = VAncestorLabel;
+    VInfo.Parent = VAInfo.Parent;
+  }
+
+  return VInInfo.Label;
+}
+
+template<class FuncT, class NodeT>
+void Calculate(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphTraits<NodeT>::NodeType>& DT,
+               FuncT& F) {
+  typedef GraphTraits<NodeT> GraphT;
+
+  unsigned N = 0;
+  bool MultipleRoots = (DT.Roots.size() > 1);
+  if (MultipleRoots) {
+    typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &BBInfo =
+        DT.Info[NULL];
+    BBInfo.DFSNum = BBInfo.Semi = ++N;
+    BBInfo.Label = NULL;
+
+    DT.Vertex.push_back(NULL);       // Vertex[n] = V;
+  }
+
+  // Step #1: Number blocks in depth-first order and initialize variables used
+  // in later stages of the algorithm.
+  for (unsigned i = 0, e = static_cast<unsigned>(DT.Roots.size());
+       i != e; ++i)
+    N = DFSPass<GraphT>(DT, DT.Roots[i], N);
+
+  // it might be that some blocks did not get a DFS number (e.g., blocks of 
+  // infinite loops). In these cases an artificial exit node is required.
+  MultipleRoots |= (DT.isPostDominator() && N != GraphTraits<FuncT*>::size(&F));
+
+  // When naively implemented, the Lengauer-Tarjan algorithm requires a separate
+  // bucket for each vertex. However, this is unnecessary, because each vertex
+  // is only placed into a single bucket (that of its semidominator), and each
+  // vertex's bucket is processed before it is added to any bucket itself.
+  //
+  // Instead of using a bucket per vertex, we use a single array Buckets that
+  // has two purposes. Before the vertex V with preorder number i is processed,
+  // Buckets[i] stores the index of the first element in V's bucket. After V's
+  // bucket is processed, Buckets[i] stores the index of the next element in the
+  // bucket containing V, if any.
+  SmallVector<unsigned, 32> Buckets;
+  Buckets.resize(N + 1);
+  for (unsigned i = 1; i <= N; ++i)
+    Buckets[i] = i;
+
+  for (unsigned i = N; i >= 2; --i) {
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* W = DT.Vertex[i];
+    typename DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>::InfoRec &WInfo =
+                                                                     DT.Info[W];
+
+    // Step #2: Implicitly define the immediate dominator of vertices
+    for (unsigned j = i; Buckets[j] != i; j = Buckets[j]) {
+      typename GraphT::NodeType* V = DT.Vertex[Buckets[j]];
+      typename GraphT::NodeType* U = Eval<GraphT>(DT, V, i + 1);
+      DT.IDoms[V] = DT.Info[U].Semi < i ? U : W;
+    }
+
+    // Step #3: Calculate the semidominators of all vertices
+
+    // initialize the semi dominator to point to the parent node
+    WInfo.Semi = WInfo.Parent;
+    typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<NodeT> > InvTraits;
+    for (typename InvTraits::ChildIteratorType CI =
+         InvTraits::child_begin(W),
+         E = InvTraits::child_end(W); CI != E; ++CI) {
+      typename InvTraits::NodeType *N = *CI;
+      if (DT.Info.count(N)) {  // Only if this predecessor is reachable!
+        unsigned SemiU = DT.Info[Eval<GraphT>(DT, N, i + 1)].Semi;
+        if (SemiU < WInfo.Semi)
+          WInfo.Semi = SemiU;
+      }
+    }
+
+    // If V is a non-root vertex and sdom(V) = parent(V), then idom(V) is
+    // necessarily parent(V). In this case, set idom(V) here and avoid placing
+    // V into a bucket.
+    if (WInfo.Semi == WInfo.Parent) {
+      DT.IDoms[W] = DT.Vertex[WInfo.Parent];
+    } else {
+      Buckets[i] = Buckets[WInfo.Semi];
+      Buckets[WInfo.Semi] = i;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (N >= 1) {
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* Root = DT.Vertex[1];
+    for (unsigned j = 1; Buckets[j] != 1; j = Buckets[j]) {
+      typename GraphT::NodeType* V = DT.Vertex[Buckets[j]];
+      DT.IDoms[V] = Root;
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Step #4: Explicitly define the immediate dominator of each vertex
+  for (unsigned i = 2; i <= N; ++i) {
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* W = DT.Vertex[i];
+    typename GraphT::NodeType*& WIDom = DT.IDoms[W];
+    if (WIDom != DT.Vertex[DT.Info[W].Semi])
+      WIDom = DT.IDoms[WIDom];
+  }
+
+  if (DT.Roots.empty()) return;
+
+  // Add a node for the root.  This node might be the actual root, if there is
+  // one exit block, or it may be the virtual exit (denoted by (BasicBlock *)0)
+  // which postdominates all real exits if there are multiple exit blocks, or
+  // an infinite loop.
+  typename GraphT::NodeType* Root = !MultipleRoots ? DT.Roots[0] : 0;
+
+  DT.DomTreeNodes[Root] = DT.RootNode =
+                        new DomTreeNodeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>(Root, 0);
+
+  // Loop over all of the reachable blocks in the function...
+  for (unsigned i = 2; i <= N; ++i) {
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* W = DT.Vertex[i];
+
+    DomTreeNodeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType> *BBNode = DT.DomTreeNodes[W];
+    if (BBNode) continue;  // Haven't calculated this node yet?
+
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* ImmDom = DT.getIDom(W);
+
+    assert(ImmDom || DT.DomTreeNodes[NULL]);
+
+    // Get or calculate the node for the immediate dominator
+    DomTreeNodeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType> *IDomNode =
+                                                     DT.getNodeForBlock(ImmDom);
+
+    // Add a new tree node for this BasicBlock, and link it as a child of
+    // IDomNode
+    DomTreeNodeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType> *C =
+                    new DomTreeNodeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>(W, IDomNode);
+    DT.DomTreeNodes[W] = IDomNode->addChild(C);
+  }
+
+  // Free temporary memory used to construct idom's
+  DT.IDoms.clear();
+  DT.Info.clear();
+  std::vector<typename GraphT::NodeType*>().swap(DT.Vertex);
+
+  DT.updateDFSNumbers();
+}
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Dominators.h

@@ -0,0 +1,920 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/Dominators.h - Dominator Info Calculation --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the DominatorTree class, which provides fast and efficient
+// dominance queries.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMINATORS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_DOMINATORS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/DepthFirstIterator.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/GraphTraits.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CFG.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
+#include <algorithm>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// DominatorBase - Base class that other, more interesting dominator analyses
+/// inherit from.
+///
+template <class NodeT>
+class DominatorBase {
+protected:
+  std::vector<NodeT*> Roots;
+  const bool IsPostDominators;
+  inline explicit DominatorBase(bool isPostDom) :
+    Roots(), IsPostDominators(isPostDom) {}
+public:
+
+  /// getRoots - Return the root blocks of the current CFG.  This may include
+  /// multiple blocks if we are computing post dominators.  For forward
+  /// dominators, this will always be a single block (the entry node).
+  ///
+  inline const std::vector<NodeT*> &getRoots() const { return Roots; }
+
+  /// isPostDominator - Returns true if analysis based of postdoms
+  ///
+  bool isPostDominator() const { return IsPostDominators; }
+};
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// DomTreeNode - Dominator Tree Node
+template<class NodeT> class DominatorTreeBase;
+struct PostDominatorTree;
+class MachineBasicBlock;
+
+template <class NodeT>
+class DomTreeNodeBase {
+  NodeT *TheBB;
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDom;
+  std::vector<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *> Children;
+  int DFSNumIn, DFSNumOut;
+
+  template<class N> friend class DominatorTreeBase;
+  friend struct PostDominatorTree;
+public:
+  typedef typename std::vector<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *>::iterator iterator;
+  typedef typename std::vector<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *>::const_iterator
+                   const_iterator;
+
+  iterator begin()             { return Children.begin(); }
+  iterator end()               { return Children.end(); }
+  const_iterator begin() const { return Children.begin(); }
+  const_iterator end()   const { return Children.end(); }
+
+  NodeT *getBlock() const { return TheBB; }
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *getIDom() const { return IDom; }
+  const std::vector<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>*> &getChildren() const {
+    return Children;
+  }
+
+  DomTreeNodeBase(NodeT *BB, DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *iDom)
+    : TheBB(BB), IDom(iDom), DFSNumIn(-1), DFSNumOut(-1) { }
+
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *addChild(DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *C) {
+    Children.push_back(C);
+    return C;
+  }
+
+  size_t getNumChildren() const {
+    return Children.size();
+  }
+
+  void clearAllChildren() {
+    Children.clear();
+  }
+
+  bool compare(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *Other) const {
+    if (getNumChildren() != Other->getNumChildren())
+      return true;
+
+    SmallPtrSet<const NodeT *, 4> OtherChildren;
+    for (const_iterator I = Other->begin(), E = Other->end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      const NodeT *Nd = (*I)->getBlock();
+      OtherChildren.insert(Nd);
+    }
+
+    for (const_iterator I = begin(), E = end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      const NodeT *N = (*I)->getBlock();
+      if (OtherChildren.count(N) == 0)
+        return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  void setIDom(DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *NewIDom) {
+    assert(IDom && "No immediate dominator?");
+    if (IDom != NewIDom) {
+      typename std::vector<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>*>::iterator I =
+                  std::find(IDom->Children.begin(), IDom->Children.end(), this);
+      assert(I != IDom->Children.end() &&
+             "Not in immediate dominator children set!");
+      // I am no longer your child...
+      IDom->Children.erase(I);
+
+      // Switch to new dominator
+      IDom = NewIDom;
+      IDom->Children.push_back(this);
+    }
+  }
+
+  /// getDFSNumIn/getDFSNumOut - These are an internal implementation detail, do
+  /// not call them.
+  unsigned getDFSNumIn() const { return DFSNumIn; }
+  unsigned getDFSNumOut() const { return DFSNumOut; }
+private:
+  // Return true if this node is dominated by other. Use this only if DFS info
+  // is valid.
+  bool DominatedBy(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *other) const {
+    return this->DFSNumIn >= other->DFSNumIn &&
+      this->DFSNumOut <= other->DFSNumOut;
+  }
+};
+
+EXTERN_TEMPLATE_INSTANTIATION(class DomTreeNodeBase<BasicBlock>);
+EXTERN_TEMPLATE_INSTANTIATION(class DomTreeNodeBase<MachineBasicBlock>);
+
+template<class NodeT>
+inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &o,
+                               const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *Node) {
+  if (Node->getBlock())
+    WriteAsOperand(o, Node->getBlock(), false);
+  else
+    o << " <<exit node>>";
+
+  o << " {" << Node->getDFSNumIn() << "," << Node->getDFSNumOut() << "}";
+
+  return o << "\n";
+}
+
+template<class NodeT>
+inline void PrintDomTree(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *N, raw_ostream &o,
+                         unsigned Lev) {
+  o.indent(2*Lev) << "[" << Lev << "] " << N;
+  for (typename DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>::const_iterator I = N->begin(),
+       E = N->end(); I != E; ++I)
+    PrintDomTree<NodeT>(*I, o, Lev+1);
+}
+
+typedef DomTreeNodeBase<BasicBlock> DomTreeNode;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// DominatorTree - Calculate the immediate dominator tree for a function.
+///
+
+template<class FuncT, class N>
+void Calculate(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphTraits<N>::NodeType>& DT,
+               FuncT& F);
+
+template<class NodeT>
+class DominatorTreeBase : public DominatorBase<NodeT> {
+  bool dominatedBySlowTreeWalk(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *A,
+                               const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *B) const {
+    assert(A != B);
+    assert(isReachableFromEntry(B));
+    assert(isReachableFromEntry(A));
+
+    const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDom;
+    while ((IDom = B->getIDom()) != 0 && IDom != A && IDom != B)
+      B = IDom;   // Walk up the tree
+    return IDom != 0;
+  }
+
+protected:
+  typedef DenseMap<NodeT*, DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>*> DomTreeNodeMapType;
+  DomTreeNodeMapType DomTreeNodes;
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *RootNode;
+
+  bool DFSInfoValid;
+  unsigned int SlowQueries;
+  // Information record used during immediate dominators computation.
+  struct InfoRec {
+    unsigned DFSNum;
+    unsigned Parent;
+    unsigned Semi;
+    NodeT *Label;
+
+    InfoRec() : DFSNum(0), Parent(0), Semi(0), Label(0) {}
+  };
+
+  DenseMap<NodeT*, NodeT*> IDoms;
+
+  // Vertex - Map the DFS number to the BasicBlock*
+  std::vector<NodeT*> Vertex;
+
+  // Info - Collection of information used during the computation of idoms.
+  DenseMap<NodeT*, InfoRec> Info;
+
+  void reset() {
+    for (typename DomTreeNodeMapType::iterator I = this->DomTreeNodes.begin(),
+           E = DomTreeNodes.end(); I != E; ++I)
+      delete I->second;
+    DomTreeNodes.clear();
+    IDoms.clear();
+    this->Roots.clear();
+    Vertex.clear();
+    RootNode = 0;
+  }
+
+  // NewBB is split and now it has one successor. Update dominator tree to
+  // reflect this change.
+  template<class N, class GraphT>
+  void Split(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>& DT,
+             typename GraphT::NodeType* NewBB) {
+    assert(std::distance(GraphT::child_begin(NewBB),
+                         GraphT::child_end(NewBB)) == 1 &&
+           "NewBB should have a single successor!");
+    typename GraphT::NodeType* NewBBSucc = *GraphT::child_begin(NewBB);
+
+    std::vector<typename GraphT::NodeType*> PredBlocks;
+    typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<N> > InvTraits;
+    for (typename InvTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+         InvTraits::child_begin(NewBB),
+         PE = InvTraits::child_end(NewBB); PI != PE; ++PI)
+      PredBlocks.push_back(*PI);
+
+    assert(!PredBlocks.empty() && "No predblocks?");
+
+    bool NewBBDominatesNewBBSucc = true;
+    for (typename InvTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+         InvTraits::child_begin(NewBBSucc),
+         E = InvTraits::child_end(NewBBSucc); PI != E; ++PI) {
+      typename InvTraits::NodeType *ND = *PI;
+      if (ND != NewBB && !DT.dominates(NewBBSucc, ND) &&
+          DT.isReachableFromEntry(ND)) {
+        NewBBDominatesNewBBSucc = false;
+        break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    // Find NewBB's immediate dominator and create new dominator tree node for
+    // NewBB.
+    NodeT *NewBBIDom = 0;
+    unsigned i = 0;
+    for (i = 0; i < PredBlocks.size(); ++i)
+      if (DT.isReachableFromEntry(PredBlocks[i])) {
+        NewBBIDom = PredBlocks[i];
+        break;
+      }
+
+    // It's possible that none of the predecessors of NewBB are reachable;
+    // in that case, NewBB itself is unreachable, so nothing needs to be
+    // changed.
+    if (!NewBBIDom)
+      return;
+
+    for (i = i + 1; i < PredBlocks.size(); ++i) {
+      if (DT.isReachableFromEntry(PredBlocks[i]))
+        NewBBIDom = DT.findNearestCommonDominator(NewBBIDom, PredBlocks[i]);
+    }
+
+    // Create the new dominator tree node... and set the idom of NewBB.
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *NewBBNode = DT.addNewBlock(NewBB, NewBBIDom);
+
+    // If NewBB strictly dominates other blocks, then it is now the immediate
+    // dominator of NewBBSucc.  Update the dominator tree as appropriate.
+    if (NewBBDominatesNewBBSucc) {
+      DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *NewBBSuccNode = DT.getNode(NewBBSucc);
+      DT.changeImmediateDominator(NewBBSuccNode, NewBBNode);
+    }
+  }
+
+public:
+  explicit DominatorTreeBase(bool isPostDom)
+    : DominatorBase<NodeT>(isPostDom), DFSInfoValid(false), SlowQueries(0) {}
+  virtual ~DominatorTreeBase() { reset(); }
+
+  /// compare - Return false if the other dominator tree base matches this
+  /// dominator tree base. Otherwise return true.
+  bool compare(DominatorTreeBase &Other) const {
+
+    const DomTreeNodeMapType &OtherDomTreeNodes = Other.DomTreeNodes;
+    if (DomTreeNodes.size() != OtherDomTreeNodes.size())
+      return true;
+
+    for (typename DomTreeNodeMapType::const_iterator
+           I = this->DomTreeNodes.begin(),
+           E = this->DomTreeNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      NodeT *BB = I->first;
+      typename DomTreeNodeMapType::const_iterator OI = OtherDomTreeNodes.find(BB);
+      if (OI == OtherDomTreeNodes.end())
+        return true;
+
+      DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>* MyNd = I->second;
+      DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>* OtherNd = OI->second;
+
+      if (MyNd->compare(OtherNd))
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual void releaseMemory() { reset(); }
+
+  /// getNode - return the (Post)DominatorTree node for the specified basic
+  /// block.  This is the same as using operator[] on this class.
+  ///
+  inline DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *getNode(NodeT *BB) const {
+    return DomTreeNodes.lookup(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// getRootNode - This returns the entry node for the CFG of the function.  If
+  /// this tree represents the post-dominance relations for a function, however,
+  /// this root may be a node with the block == NULL.  This is the case when
+  /// there are multiple exit nodes from a particular function.  Consumers of
+  /// post-dominance information must be capable of dealing with this
+  /// possibility.
+  ///
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *getRootNode() { return RootNode; }
+  const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *getRootNode() const { return RootNode; }
+
+  /// properlyDominates - Returns true iff A dominates B and A != B.
+  /// Note that this is not a constant time operation!
+  ///
+  bool properlyDominates(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *A,
+                         const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *B) {
+    if (A == 0 || B == 0)
+      return false;
+    if (A == B)
+      return false;
+    return dominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  bool properlyDominates(const NodeT *A, const NodeT *B);
+
+  /// isReachableFromEntry - Return true if A is dominated by the entry
+  /// block of the function containing it.
+  bool isReachableFromEntry(const NodeT* A) const {
+    assert(!this->isPostDominator() &&
+           "This is not implemented for post dominators");
+    return isReachableFromEntry(getNode(const_cast<NodeT *>(A)));
+  }
+
+  inline bool isReachableFromEntry(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *A) const {
+    return A;
+  }
+
+  /// dominates - Returns true iff A dominates B.  Note that this is not a
+  /// constant time operation!
+  ///
+  inline bool dominates(const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *A,
+                        const DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *B) {
+    // A node trivially dominates itself.
+    if (B == A)
+      return true;
+
+    // An unreachable node is dominated by anything.
+    if (!isReachableFromEntry(B))
+      return true;
+
+    // And dominates nothing.
+    if (!isReachableFromEntry(A))
+      return false;
+
+    // Compare the result of the tree walk and the dfs numbers, if expensive
+    // checks are enabled.
+#ifdef XDEBUG
+    assert((!DFSInfoValid ||
+            (dominatedBySlowTreeWalk(A, B) == B->DominatedBy(A))) &&
+           "Tree walk disagrees with dfs numbers!");
+#endif
+
+    if (DFSInfoValid)
+      return B->DominatedBy(A);
+
+    // If we end up with too many slow queries, just update the
+    // DFS numbers on the theory that we are going to keep querying.
+    SlowQueries++;
+    if (SlowQueries > 32) {
+      updateDFSNumbers();
+      return B->DominatedBy(A);
+    }
+
+    return dominatedBySlowTreeWalk(A, B);
+  }
+
+  bool dominates(const NodeT *A, const NodeT *B);
+
+  NodeT *getRoot() const {
+    assert(this->Roots.size() == 1 && "Should always have entry node!");
+    return this->Roots[0];
+  }
+
+  /// findNearestCommonDominator - Find nearest common dominator basic block
+  /// for basic block A and B. If there is no such block then return NULL.
+  NodeT *findNearestCommonDominator(NodeT *A, NodeT *B) {
+    assert(A->getParent() == B->getParent() &&
+           "Two blocks are not in same function");
+
+    // If either A or B is a entry block then it is nearest common dominator
+    // (for forward-dominators).
+    if (!this->isPostDominator()) {
+      NodeT &Entry = A->getParent()->front();
+      if (A == &Entry || B == &Entry)
+        return &Entry;
+    }
+
+    // If B dominates A then B is nearest common dominator.
+    if (dominates(B, A))
+      return B;
+
+    // If A dominates B then A is nearest common dominator.
+    if (dominates(A, B))
+      return A;
+
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *NodeA = getNode(A);
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *NodeB = getNode(B);
+
+    // Collect NodeA dominators set.
+    SmallPtrSet<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>*, 16> NodeADoms;
+    NodeADoms.insert(NodeA);
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDomA = NodeA->getIDom();
+    while (IDomA) {
+      NodeADoms.insert(IDomA);
+      IDomA = IDomA->getIDom();
+    }
+
+    // Walk NodeB immediate dominators chain and find common dominator node.
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDomB = NodeB->getIDom();
+    while (IDomB) {
+      if (NodeADoms.count(IDomB) != 0)
+        return IDomB->getBlock();
+
+      IDomB = IDomB->getIDom();
+    }
+
+    return NULL;
+  }
+
+  const NodeT *findNearestCommonDominator(const NodeT *A, const NodeT *B) {
+    // Cast away the const qualifiers here. This is ok since
+    // const is re-introduced on the return type.
+    return findNearestCommonDominator(const_cast<NodeT *>(A),
+                                      const_cast<NodeT *>(B));
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // API to update (Post)DominatorTree information based on modifications to
+  // the CFG...
+
+  /// addNewBlock - Add a new node to the dominator tree information.  This
+  /// creates a new node as a child of DomBB dominator node,linking it into
+  /// the children list of the immediate dominator.
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *addNewBlock(NodeT *BB, NodeT *DomBB) {
+    assert(getNode(BB) == 0 && "Block already in dominator tree!");
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDomNode = getNode(DomBB);
+    assert(IDomNode && "Not immediate dominator specified for block!");
+    DFSInfoValid = false;
+    return DomTreeNodes[BB] =
+      IDomNode->addChild(new DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>(BB, IDomNode));
+  }
+
+  /// changeImmediateDominator - This method is used to update the dominator
+  /// tree information when a node's immediate dominator changes.
+  ///
+  void changeImmediateDominator(DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *N,
+                                DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *NewIDom) {
+    assert(N && NewIDom && "Cannot change null node pointers!");
+    DFSInfoValid = false;
+    N->setIDom(NewIDom);
+  }
+
+  void changeImmediateDominator(NodeT *BB, NodeT *NewBB) {
+    changeImmediateDominator(getNode(BB), getNode(NewBB));
+  }
+
+  /// eraseNode - Removes a node from the dominator tree. Block must not
+  /// dominate any other blocks. Removes node from its immediate dominator's
+  /// children list. Deletes dominator node associated with basic block BB.
+  void eraseNode(NodeT *BB) {
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *Node = getNode(BB);
+    assert(Node && "Removing node that isn't in dominator tree.");
+    assert(Node->getChildren().empty() && "Node is not a leaf node.");
+
+      // Remove node from immediate dominator's children list.
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDom = Node->getIDom();
+    if (IDom) {
+      typename std::vector<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>*>::iterator I =
+        std::find(IDom->Children.begin(), IDom->Children.end(), Node);
+      assert(I != IDom->Children.end() &&
+             "Not in immediate dominator children set!");
+      // I am no longer your child...
+      IDom->Children.erase(I);
+    }
+
+    DomTreeNodes.erase(BB);
+    delete Node;
+  }
+
+  /// removeNode - Removes a node from the dominator tree.  Block must not
+  /// dominate any other blocks.  Invalidates any node pointing to removed
+  /// block.
+  void removeNode(NodeT *BB) {
+    assert(getNode(BB) && "Removing node that isn't in dominator tree.");
+    DomTreeNodes.erase(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// splitBlock - BB is split and now it has one successor. Update dominator
+  /// tree to reflect this change.
+  void splitBlock(NodeT* NewBB) {
+    if (this->IsPostDominators)
+      this->Split<Inverse<NodeT*>, GraphTraits<Inverse<NodeT*> > >(*this, NewBB);
+    else
+      this->Split<NodeT*, GraphTraits<NodeT*> >(*this, NewBB);
+  }
+
+  /// print - Convert to human readable form
+  ///
+  void print(raw_ostream &o) const {
+    o << "=============================--------------------------------\n";
+    if (this->isPostDominator())
+      o << "Inorder PostDominator Tree: ";
+    else
+      o << "Inorder Dominator Tree: ";
+    if (!this->DFSInfoValid)
+      o << "DFSNumbers invalid: " << SlowQueries << " slow queries.";
+    o << "\n";
+
+    // The postdom tree can have a null root if there are no returns.
+    if (getRootNode())
+      PrintDomTree<NodeT>(getRootNode(), o, 1);
+  }
+
+protected:
+  template<class GraphT>
+  friend typename GraphT::NodeType* Eval(
+                               DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>& DT,
+                                         typename GraphT::NodeType* V,
+                                         unsigned LastLinked);
+
+  template<class GraphT>
+  friend unsigned DFSPass(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphT::NodeType>& DT,
+                          typename GraphT::NodeType* V,
+                          unsigned N);
+
+  template<class FuncT, class N>
+  friend void Calculate(DominatorTreeBase<typename GraphTraits<N>::NodeType>& DT,
+                        FuncT& F);
+
+  /// updateDFSNumbers - Assign In and Out numbers to the nodes while walking
+  /// dominator tree in dfs order.
+  void updateDFSNumbers() {
+    unsigned DFSNum = 0;
+
+    SmallVector<std::pair<DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>*,
+                typename DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>::iterator>, 32> WorkStack;
+
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *ThisRoot = getRootNode();
+
+    if (!ThisRoot)
+      return;
+
+    // Even in the case of multiple exits that form the post dominator root
+    // nodes, do not iterate over all exits, but start from the virtual root
+    // node. Otherwise bbs, that are not post dominated by any exit but by the
+    // virtual root node, will never be assigned a DFS number.
+    WorkStack.push_back(std::make_pair(ThisRoot, ThisRoot->begin()));
+    ThisRoot->DFSNumIn = DFSNum++;
+
+    while (!WorkStack.empty()) {
+      DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *Node = WorkStack.back().first;
+      typename DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>::iterator ChildIt =
+        WorkStack.back().second;
+
+      // If we visited all of the children of this node, "recurse" back up the
+      // stack setting the DFOutNum.
+      if (ChildIt == Node->end()) {
+        Node->DFSNumOut = DFSNum++;
+        WorkStack.pop_back();
+      } else {
+        // Otherwise, recursively visit this child.
+        DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *Child = *ChildIt;
+        ++WorkStack.back().second;
+
+        WorkStack.push_back(std::make_pair(Child, Child->begin()));
+        Child->DFSNumIn = DFSNum++;
+      }
+    }
+
+    SlowQueries = 0;
+    DFSInfoValid = true;
+  }
+
+  DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *getNodeForBlock(NodeT *BB) {
+    if (DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *Node = getNode(BB))
+      return Node;
+
+    // Haven't calculated this node yet?  Get or calculate the node for the
+    // immediate dominator.
+    NodeT *IDom = getIDom(BB);
+
+    assert(IDom || this->DomTreeNodes[NULL]);
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *IDomNode = getNodeForBlock(IDom);
+
+    // Add a new tree node for this BasicBlock, and link it as a child of
+    // IDomNode
+    DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT> *C = new DomTreeNodeBase<NodeT>(BB, IDomNode);
+    return this->DomTreeNodes[BB] = IDomNode->addChild(C);
+  }
+
+  inline NodeT *getIDom(NodeT *BB) const {
+    return IDoms.lookup(BB);
+  }
+
+  inline void addRoot(NodeT* BB) {
+    this->Roots.push_back(BB);
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// recalculate - compute a dominator tree for the given function
+  template<class FT>
+  void recalculate(FT& F) {
+    typedef GraphTraits<FT*> TraitsTy;
+    reset();
+    this->Vertex.push_back(0);
+
+    if (!this->IsPostDominators) {
+      // Initialize root
+      NodeT *entry = TraitsTy::getEntryNode(&F);
+      this->Roots.push_back(entry);
+      this->IDoms[entry] = 0;
+      this->DomTreeNodes[entry] = 0;
+
+      Calculate<FT, NodeT*>(*this, F);
+    } else {
+      // Initialize the roots list
+      for (typename TraitsTy::nodes_iterator I = TraitsTy::nodes_begin(&F),
+                                        E = TraitsTy::nodes_end(&F); I != E; ++I) {
+        if (TraitsTy::child_begin(I) == TraitsTy::child_end(I))
+          addRoot(I);
+
+        // Prepopulate maps so that we don't get iterator invalidation issues later.
+        this->IDoms[I] = 0;
+        this->DomTreeNodes[I] = 0;
+      }
+
+      Calculate<FT, Inverse<NodeT*> >(*this, F);
+    }
+  }
+};
+
+// These two functions are declared out of line as a workaround for building
+// with old (< r147295) versions of clang because of pr11642.
+template<class NodeT>
+bool DominatorTreeBase<NodeT>::dominates(const NodeT *A, const NodeT *B) {
+  if (A == B)
+    return true;
+
+  // Cast away the const qualifiers here. This is ok since
+  // this function doesn't actually return the values returned
+  // from getNode.
+  return dominates(getNode(const_cast<NodeT *>(A)),
+                   getNode(const_cast<NodeT *>(B)));
+}
+template<class NodeT>
+bool
+DominatorTreeBase<NodeT>::properlyDominates(const NodeT *A, const NodeT *B) {
+  if (A == B)
+    return false;
+
+  // Cast away the const qualifiers here. This is ok since
+  // this function doesn't actually return the values returned
+  // from getNode.
+  return dominates(getNode(const_cast<NodeT *>(A)),
+                   getNode(const_cast<NodeT *>(B)));
+}
+
+EXTERN_TEMPLATE_INSTANTIATION(class DominatorTreeBase<BasicBlock>);
+
+class BasicBlockEdge {
+  const BasicBlock *Start;
+  const BasicBlock *End;
+public:
+  BasicBlockEdge(const BasicBlock *Start_, const BasicBlock *End_) :
+    Start(Start_), End(End_) { }
+  const BasicBlock *getStart() const {
+    return Start;
+  }
+  const BasicBlock *getEnd() const {
+    return End;
+  }
+  bool isSingleEdge() const;
+};
+
+//===-------------------------------------
+/// DominatorTree Class - Concrete subclass of DominatorTreeBase that is used to
+/// compute a normal dominator tree.
+///
+class DominatorTree : public FunctionPass {
+public:
+  static char ID; // Pass ID, replacement for typeid
+  DominatorTreeBase<BasicBlock>* DT;
+
+  DominatorTree() : FunctionPass(ID) {
+    initializeDominatorTreePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+    DT = new DominatorTreeBase<BasicBlock>(false);
+  }
+
+  ~DominatorTree() {
+    delete DT;
+  }
+
+  DominatorTreeBase<BasicBlock>& getBase() { return *DT; }
+
+  /// getRoots - Return the root blocks of the current CFG.  This may include
+  /// multiple blocks if we are computing post dominators.  For forward
+  /// dominators, this will always be a single block (the entry node).
+  ///
+  inline const std::vector<BasicBlock*> &getRoots() const {
+    return DT->getRoots();
+  }
+
+  inline BasicBlock *getRoot() const {
+    return DT->getRoot();
+  }
+
+  inline DomTreeNode *getRootNode() const {
+    return DT->getRootNode();
+  }
+
+  /// compare - Return false if the other dominator tree matches this
+  /// dominator tree. Otherwise return true.
+  inline bool compare(DominatorTree &Other) const {
+    DomTreeNode *R = getRootNode();
+    DomTreeNode *OtherR = Other.getRootNode();
+
+    if (!R || !OtherR || R->getBlock() != OtherR->getBlock())
+      return true;
+
+    if (DT->compare(Other.getBase()))
+      return true;
+
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+
+  virtual void verifyAnalysis() const;
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+  }
+
+  inline bool dominates(const DomTreeNode* A, const DomTreeNode* B) const {
+    return DT->dominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline bool dominates(const BasicBlock* A, const BasicBlock* B) const {
+    return DT->dominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  // dominates - Return true if Def dominates a use in User. This performs
+  // the special checks necessary if Def and User are in the same basic block.
+  // Note that Def doesn't dominate a use in Def itself!
+  bool dominates(const Instruction *Def, const Use &U) const;
+  bool dominates(const Instruction *Def, const Instruction *User) const;
+  bool dominates(const Instruction *Def, const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+  bool dominates(const BasicBlockEdge &BBE, const Use &U) const;
+  bool dominates(const BasicBlockEdge &BBE, const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  bool properlyDominates(const DomTreeNode *A, const DomTreeNode *B) const {
+    return DT->properlyDominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  bool properlyDominates(const BasicBlock *A, const BasicBlock *B) const {
+    return DT->properlyDominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  /// findNearestCommonDominator - Find nearest common dominator basic block
+  /// for basic block A and B. If there is no such block then return NULL.
+  inline BasicBlock *findNearestCommonDominator(BasicBlock *A, BasicBlock *B) {
+    return DT->findNearestCommonDominator(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline const BasicBlock *findNearestCommonDominator(const BasicBlock *A,
+                                                      const BasicBlock *B) {
+    return DT->findNearestCommonDominator(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline DomTreeNode *operator[](BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return DT->getNode(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// getNode - return the (Post)DominatorTree node for the specified basic
+  /// block.  This is the same as using operator[] on this class.
+  ///
+  inline DomTreeNode *getNode(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return DT->getNode(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// addNewBlock - Add a new node to the dominator tree information.  This
+  /// creates a new node as a child of DomBB dominator node,linking it into
+  /// the children list of the immediate dominator.
+  inline DomTreeNode *addNewBlock(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DomBB) {
+    return DT->addNewBlock(BB, DomBB);
+  }
+
+  /// changeImmediateDominator - This method is used to update the dominator
+  /// tree information when a node's immediate dominator changes.
+  ///
+  inline void changeImmediateDominator(BasicBlock *N, BasicBlock* NewIDom) {
+    DT->changeImmediateDominator(N, NewIDom);
+  }
+
+  inline void changeImmediateDominator(DomTreeNode *N, DomTreeNode* NewIDom) {
+    DT->changeImmediateDominator(N, NewIDom);
+  }
+
+  /// eraseNode - Removes a node from the dominator tree. Block must not
+  /// dominate any other blocks. Removes node from its immediate dominator's
+  /// children list. Deletes dominator node associated with basic block BB.
+  inline void eraseNode(BasicBlock *BB) {
+    DT->eraseNode(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// splitBlock - BB is split and now it has one successor. Update dominator
+  /// tree to reflect this change.
+  inline void splitBlock(BasicBlock* NewBB) {
+    DT->splitBlock(NewBB);
+  }
+
+  bool isReachableFromEntry(const BasicBlock* A) const {
+    return DT->isReachableFromEntry(A);
+  }
+
+  bool isReachableFromEntry(const Use &U) const;
+
+
+  virtual void releaseMemory() {
+    DT->releaseMemory();
+  }
+
+  virtual void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module* M= 0) const;
+};
+
+//===-------------------------------------
+/// DominatorTree GraphTraits specialization so the DominatorTree can be
+/// iterable by generic graph iterators.
+///
+template <> struct GraphTraits<DomTreeNode*> {
+  typedef DomTreeNode NodeType;
+  typedef NodeType::iterator  ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(NodeType *N) {
+    return N;
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->begin();
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->end();
+  }
+
+  typedef df_iterator<DomTreeNode*> nodes_iterator;
+
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(DomTreeNode *N) {
+    return df_begin(getEntryNode(N));
+  }
+
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end(DomTreeNode *N) {
+    return df_end(getEntryNode(N));
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<DominatorTree*>
+  : public GraphTraits<DomTreeNode*> {
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(DominatorTree *DT) {
+    return DT->getRootNode();
+  }
+
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(DominatorTree *N) {
+    return df_begin(getEntryNode(N));
+  }
+
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end(DominatorTree *N) {
+    return df_end(getEntryNode(N));
+  }
+};
+
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/FindUsedTypes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/FindUsedTypes.h - Find all Types in use ----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This pass is used to seek out all of the types in use by the program.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_FINDUSEDTYPES_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_FINDUSEDTYPES_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Type;
+class Value;
+
+class FindUsedTypes : public ModulePass {
+  SetVector<Type *> UsedTypes;
+public:
+  static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
+  FindUsedTypes() : ModulePass(ID) {
+    initializeFindUsedTypesPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+  }
+
+  /// getTypes - After the pass has been run, return the set containing all of
+  /// the types used in the module.
+  ///
+  const SetVector<Type *> &getTypes() const { return UsedTypes; }
+
+  /// Print the types found in the module.  If the optional Module parameter is
+  /// passed in, then the types are printed symbolically if possible, using the
+  /// symbol table from the module.
+  ///
+  void print(raw_ostream &o, const Module *M) const;
+
+private:
+  /// IncorporateType - Incorporate one type and all of its subtypes into the
+  /// collection of used types.
+  ///
+  void IncorporateType(Type *Ty);
+
+  /// IncorporateValue - Incorporate all of the types used by this value.
+  ///
+  void IncorporateValue(const Value *V);
+
+public:
+  /// run - This incorporates all types used by the specified module
+  bool runOnModule(Module &M);
+
+  /// getAnalysisUsage - We do not modify anything.
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/IVUsers.h

@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/IVUsers.h - Induction Variable Users -------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file implements bookkeeping for "interesting" users of expressions
+// computed from induction variables.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_IVUSERS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_IVUSERS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopPass.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionNormalization.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class DominatorTree;
+class Instruction;
+class Value;
+class ScalarEvolution;
+class SCEV;
+class IVUsers;
+class DataLayout;
+
+/// IVStrideUse - Keep track of one use of a strided induction variable.
+/// The Expr member keeps track of the expression, User is the actual user
+/// instruction of the operand, and 'OperandValToReplace' is the operand of
+/// the User that is the use.
+class IVStrideUse : public CallbackVH, public ilist_node<IVStrideUse> {
+  friend class IVUsers;
+public:
+  IVStrideUse(IVUsers *P, Instruction* U, Value *O)
+    : CallbackVH(U), Parent(P), OperandValToReplace(O) {
+  }
+
+  /// getUser - Return the user instruction for this use.
+  Instruction *getUser() const {
+    return cast<Instruction>(getValPtr());
+  }
+
+  /// setUser - Assign a new user instruction for this use.
+  void setUser(Instruction *NewUser) {
+    setValPtr(NewUser);
+  }
+
+  /// getOperandValToReplace - Return the Value of the operand in the user
+  /// instruction that this IVStrideUse is representing.
+  Value *getOperandValToReplace() const {
+    return OperandValToReplace;
+  }
+
+  /// setOperandValToReplace - Assign a new Value as the operand value
+  /// to replace.
+  void setOperandValToReplace(Value *Op) {
+    OperandValToReplace = Op;
+  }
+
+  /// getPostIncLoops - Return the set of loops for which the expression has
+  /// been adjusted to use post-inc mode.
+  const PostIncLoopSet &getPostIncLoops() const {
+    return PostIncLoops;
+  }
+
+  /// transformToPostInc - Transform the expression to post-inc form for the
+  /// given loop.
+  void transformToPostInc(const Loop *L);
+
+private:
+  /// Parent - a pointer to the IVUsers that owns this IVStrideUse.
+  IVUsers *Parent;
+
+  /// OperandValToReplace - The Value of the operand in the user instruction
+  /// that this IVStrideUse is representing.
+  WeakVH OperandValToReplace;
+
+  /// PostIncLoops - The set of loops for which Expr has been adjusted to
+  /// use post-inc mode. This corresponds with SCEVExpander's post-inc concept.
+  PostIncLoopSet PostIncLoops;
+
+  /// Deleted - Implementation of CallbackVH virtual function to
+  /// receive notification when the User is deleted.
+  virtual void deleted();
+};
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<IVStrideUse>
+  : public ilist_default_traits<IVStrideUse> {
+  // createSentinel is used to get hold of a node that marks the end of
+  // the list...
+  // The sentinel is relative to this instance, so we use a non-static
+  // method.
+  IVStrideUse *createSentinel() const {
+    // since i(p)lists always publicly derive from the corresponding
+    // traits, placing a data member in this class will augment i(p)list.
+    // But since the NodeTy is expected to publicly derive from
+    // ilist_node<NodeTy>, there is a legal viable downcast from it
+    // to NodeTy. We use this trick to superpose i(p)list with a "ghostly"
+    // NodeTy, which becomes the sentinel. Dereferencing the sentinel is
+    // forbidden (save the ilist_node<NodeTy>) so no one will ever notice
+    // the superposition.
+    return static_cast<IVStrideUse*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(IVStrideUse*) {}
+
+  IVStrideUse *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  IVStrideUse *ensureHead(IVStrideUse*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(IVStrideUse*, IVStrideUse*) {}
+
+private:
+  mutable ilist_node<IVStrideUse> Sentinel;
+};
+
+class IVUsers : public LoopPass {
+  friend class IVStrideUse;
+  Loop *L;
+  LoopInfo *LI;
+  DominatorTree *DT;
+  ScalarEvolution *SE;
+  DataLayout *TD;
+  SmallPtrSet<Instruction*,16> Processed;
+
+  /// IVUses - A list of all tracked IV uses of induction variable expressions
+  /// we are interested in.
+  ilist<IVStrideUse> IVUses;
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+
+  virtual bool runOnLoop(Loop *L, LPPassManager &LPM);
+
+  virtual void releaseMemory();
+
+public:
+  static char ID; // Pass ID, replacement for typeid
+  IVUsers();
+
+  Loop *getLoop() const { return L; }
+
+  /// AddUsersIfInteresting - Inspect the specified Instruction.  If it is a
+  /// reducible SCEV, recursively add its users to the IVUsesByStride set and
+  /// return true.  Otherwise, return false.
+  bool AddUsersIfInteresting(Instruction *I);
+
+  IVStrideUse &AddUser(Instruction *User, Value *Operand);
+
+  /// getReplacementExpr - Return a SCEV expression which computes the
+  /// value of the OperandValToReplace of the given IVStrideUse.
+  const SCEV *getReplacementExpr(const IVStrideUse &IU) const;
+
+  /// getExpr - Return the expression for the use.
+  const SCEV *getExpr(const IVStrideUse &IU) const;
+
+  const SCEV *getStride(const IVStrideUse &IU, const Loop *L) const;
+
+  typedef ilist<IVStrideUse>::iterator iterator;
+  typedef ilist<IVStrideUse>::const_iterator const_iterator;
+  iterator begin() { return IVUses.begin(); }
+  iterator end()   { return IVUses.end(); }
+  const_iterator begin() const { return IVUses.begin(); }
+  const_iterator end() const   { return IVUses.end(); }
+  bool empty() const { return IVUses.empty(); }
+
+  bool isIVUserOrOperand(Instruction *Inst) const {
+    return Processed.count(Inst);
+  }
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module* = 0) const;
+
+  /// dump - This method is used for debugging.
+  void dump() const;
+protected:
+  bool AddUsersImpl(Instruction *I, SmallPtrSet<Loop*,16> &SimpleLoopNests);
+};
+
+Pass *createIVUsersPass();
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/InlineCost.h

@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+//===- InlineCost.h - Cost analysis for inliner -----------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file implements heuristics for inlining decisions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_INLINECOST_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_INLINECOST_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/CodeMetrics.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/CallGraphSCCPass.h"
+#include <cassert>
+#include <climits>
+
+namespace llvm {
+class CallSite;
+class DataLayout;
+class Function;
+class TargetTransformInfo;
+
+namespace InlineConstants {
+  // Various magic constants used to adjust heuristics.
+  const int InstrCost = 5;
+  const int IndirectCallThreshold = 100;
+  const int CallPenalty = 25;
+  const int LastCallToStaticBonus = -15000;
+  const int ColdccPenalty = 2000;
+  const int NoreturnPenalty = 10000;
+  /// Do not inline functions which allocate this many bytes on the stack
+  /// when the caller is recursive.
+  const unsigned TotalAllocaSizeRecursiveCaller = 1024;
+}
+
+/// \brief Represents the cost of inlining a function.
+///
+/// This supports special values for functions which should "always" or
+/// "never" be inlined. Otherwise, the cost represents a unitless amount;
+/// smaller values increase the likelihood of the function being inlined.
+///
+/// Objects of this type also provide the adjusted threshold for inlining
+/// based on the information available for a particular callsite. They can be
+/// directly tested to determine if inlining should occur given the cost and
+/// threshold for this cost metric.
+class InlineCost {
+  enum SentinelValues {
+    AlwaysInlineCost = INT_MIN,
+    NeverInlineCost = INT_MAX
+  };
+
+  /// \brief The estimated cost of inlining this callsite.
+  const int Cost;
+
+  /// \brief The adjusted threshold against which this cost was computed.
+  const int Threshold;
+
+  // Trivial constructor, interesting logic in the factory functions below.
+  InlineCost(int Cost, int Threshold) : Cost(Cost), Threshold(Threshold) {}
+
+public:
+  static InlineCost get(int Cost, int Threshold) {
+    assert(Cost > AlwaysInlineCost && "Cost crosses sentinel value");
+    assert(Cost < NeverInlineCost && "Cost crosses sentinel value");
+    return InlineCost(Cost, Threshold);
+  }
+  static InlineCost getAlways() {
+    return InlineCost(AlwaysInlineCost, 0);
+  }
+  static InlineCost getNever() {
+    return InlineCost(NeverInlineCost, 0);
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Test whether the inline cost is low enough for inlining.
+  operator bool() const {
+    return Cost < Threshold;
+  }
+
+  bool isAlways() const { return Cost == AlwaysInlineCost; }
+  bool isNever() const { return Cost == NeverInlineCost; }
+  bool isVariable() const { return !isAlways() && !isNever(); }
+
+  /// \brief Get the inline cost estimate.
+  /// It is an error to call this on an "always" or "never" InlineCost.
+  int getCost() const {
+    assert(isVariable() && "Invalid access of InlineCost");
+    return Cost;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Get the cost delta from the threshold for inlining.
+  /// Only valid if the cost is of the variable kind. Returns a negative
+  /// value if the cost is too high to inline.
+  int getCostDelta() const { return Threshold - getCost(); }
+};
+
+/// \brief Cost analyzer used by inliner.
+class InlineCostAnalysis : public CallGraphSCCPass {
+  const DataLayout *TD;
+  const TargetTransformInfo *TTI;
+
+public:
+  static char ID;
+
+  InlineCostAnalysis();
+  ~InlineCostAnalysis();
+
+  // Pass interface implementation.
+  void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+  bool runOnSCC(CallGraphSCC &SCC);
+
+  /// \brief Get an InlineCost object representing the cost of inlining this
+  /// callsite.
+  ///
+  /// Note that threshold is passed into this function. Only costs below the
+  /// threshold are computed with any accuracy. The threshold can be used to
+  /// bound the computation necessary to determine whether the cost is
+  /// sufficiently low to warrant inlining.
+  ///
+  /// Also note that calling this function *dynamically* computes the cost of
+  /// inlining the callsite. It is an expensive, heavyweight call.
+  InlineCost getInlineCost(CallSite CS, int Threshold);
+
+  /// \brief Get an InlineCost with the callee explicitly specified.
+  /// This allows you to calculate the cost of inlining a function via a
+  /// pointer. This behaves exactly as the version with no explicit callee
+  /// parameter in all other respects.
+  //
+  //  Note: This is used by out-of-tree passes, please do not remove without
+  //  adding a replacement API.
+  InlineCost getInlineCost(CallSite CS, Function *Callee, int Threshold);
+
+  /// \brief Minimal filter to detect invalid constructs for inlining.
+  bool isInlineViable(Function &Callee);
+};
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h

@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+//===-- InstructionSimplify.h - Fold instructions into simpler forms ------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares routines for folding instructions into simpler forms
+// that do not require creating new instructions.  This does constant folding
+// ("add i32 1, 1" -> "2") but can also handle non-constant operands, either
+// returning a constant ("and i32 %x, 0" -> "0") or an already existing value
+// ("and i32 %x, %x" -> "%x").  If the simplification is also an instruction
+// then it dominates the original instruction.
+//
+// These routines implicitly resolve undef uses. The easiest way to be safe when
+// using these routines to obtain simplified values for existing instructions is
+// to always replace all uses of the instructions with the resulting simplified
+// values. This will prevent other code from seeing the same undef uses and
+// resolving them to different values.
+//
+// These routines are designed to tolerate moderately incomplete IR, such as
+// instructions that are not connected to basic blocks yet. However, they do
+// require that all the IR that they encounter be valid. In particular, they
+// require that all non-constant values be defined in the same function, and the
+// same call context of that function (and not split between caller and callee
+// contexts of a directly recursive call, for example).
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_INSTRUCTIONSIMPLIFY_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_INSTRUCTIONSIMPLIFY_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  template<typename T>
+  class ArrayRef;
+  class DominatorTree;
+  class Instruction;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class FastMathFlags;
+  class TargetLibraryInfo;
+  class Type;
+  class Value;
+
+  /// SimplifyAddInst - Given operands for an Add, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyAddInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, bool isNSW, bool isNUW,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifySubInst - Given operands for a Sub, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifySubInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, bool isNSW, bool isNUW,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// Given operands for an FAdd, see if we can fold the result.  If not, this
+  /// returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyFAddInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, FastMathFlags FMF,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// Given operands for an FSub, see if we can fold the result.  If not, this
+  /// returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyFSubInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, FastMathFlags FMF,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// Given operands for an FMul, see if we can fold the result.  If not, this
+  /// returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyFMulInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS,
+                          FastMathFlags FMF,
+                          const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyMulInst - Given operands for a Mul, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyMulInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifySDivInst - Given operands for an SDiv, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifySDivInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyUDivInst - Given operands for a UDiv, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyUDivInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyFDivInst - Given operands for an FDiv, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyFDivInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifySRemInst - Given operands for an SRem, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifySRemInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyURemInst - Given operands for a URem, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyURemInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyFRemInst - Given operands for an FRem, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyFRemInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyShlInst - Given operands for a Shl, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyShlInst(Value *Op0, Value *Op1, bool isNSW, bool isNUW,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyLShrInst - Given operands for a LShr, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyLShrInst(Value *Op0, Value *Op1, bool isExact,
+                          const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyAShrInst - Given operands for a AShr, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyAShrInst(Value *Op0, Value *Op1, bool isExact,
+                          const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyAndInst - Given operands for an And, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyAndInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyOrInst - Given operands for an Or, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyOrInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                        const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                        const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyXorInst - Given operands for a Xor, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyXorInst(Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyICmpInst - Given operands for an ICmpInst, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyICmpInst(unsigned Predicate, Value *LHS, Value *RHS,
+                          const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyFCmpInst - Given operands for an FCmpInst, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyFCmpInst(unsigned Predicate, Value *LHS, Value *RHS,
+                          const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                          const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifySelectInst - Given operands for a SelectInst, see if we can fold
+  /// the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifySelectInst(Value *Cond, Value *TrueVal, Value *FalseVal,
+                            const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                            const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                            const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyGEPInst - Given operands for an GetElementPtrInst, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyGEPInst(ArrayRef<Value *> Ops, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyInsertValueInst - Given operands for an InsertValueInst, see if we
+  /// can fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyInsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val,
+                                 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
+                                 const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                                 const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyTruncInst - Given operands for an TruncInst, see if we can fold
+  /// the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyTruncInst(Value *Op, Type *Ty, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                           const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                           const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  //=== Helper functions for higher up the class hierarchy.
+
+
+  /// SimplifyCmpInst - Given operands for a CmpInst, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyCmpInst(unsigned Predicate, Value *LHS, Value *RHS,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                         const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyBinOp - Given operands for a BinaryOperator, see if we can
+  /// fold the result.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyBinOp(unsigned Opcode, Value *LHS, Value *RHS,
+                       const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                       const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                       const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// \brief Given a function and iterators over arguments, see if we can fold
+  /// the result.
+  ///
+  /// If this call could not be simplified returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyCall(Value *V, User::op_iterator ArgBegin,
+                      User::op_iterator ArgEnd, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                      const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                      const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// \brief Given a function and set of arguments, see if we can fold the
+  /// result.
+  ///
+  /// If this call could not be simplified returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyCall(Value *V, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
+                      const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                      const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                      const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// SimplifyInstruction - See if we can compute a simplified version of this
+  /// instruction.  If not, this returns null.
+  Value *SimplifyInstruction(Instruction *I, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                             const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                             const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+
+  /// \brief Replace all uses of 'I' with 'SimpleV' and simplify the uses
+  /// recursively.
+  ///
+  /// This first performs a normal RAUW of I with SimpleV. It then recursively
+  /// attempts to simplify those users updated by the operation. The 'I'
+  /// instruction must not be equal to the simplified value 'SimpleV'.
+  ///
+  /// The function returns true if any simplifications were performed.
+  bool replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(Instruction *I, Value *SimpleV,
+                                     const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                     const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                                     const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+
+  /// \brief Recursively attempt to simplify an instruction.
+  ///
+  /// This routine uses SimplifyInstruction to simplify 'I', and if successful
+  /// replaces uses of 'I' with the simplified value. It then recurses on each
+  /// of the users impacted. It returns true if any simplifications were
+  /// performed.
+  bool recursivelySimplifyInstruction(Instruction *I,
+                                      const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                                      const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI = 0,
+                                      const DominatorTree *DT = 0);
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif
+

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Interval.h

@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/Interval.h - Interval Class Declaration ----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the Interval class, which
+// represents a set of CFG nodes and is a portion of an interval partition.
+//
+// Intervals have some interesting and useful properties, including the
+// following:
+//    1. The header node of an interval dominates all of the elements of the
+//       interval
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_INTERVAL_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_INTERVAL_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/GraphTraits.h"
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class BasicBlock;
+class raw_ostream;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+/// Interval Class - An Interval is a set of nodes defined such that every node
+/// in the interval has all of its predecessors in the interval (except for the
+/// header)
+///
+class Interval {
+  /// HeaderNode - The header BasicBlock, which dominates all BasicBlocks in this
+  /// interval.  Also, any loops in this interval must go through the HeaderNode.
+  ///
+  BasicBlock *HeaderNode;
+public:
+  typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*>::iterator succ_iterator;
+  typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*>::iterator pred_iterator;
+  typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*>::iterator node_iterator;
+
+  inline Interval(BasicBlock *Header) : HeaderNode(Header) {
+    Nodes.push_back(Header);
+  }
+
+  inline Interval(const Interval &I) // copy ctor
+    : HeaderNode(I.HeaderNode), Nodes(I.Nodes), Successors(I.Successors) {}
+
+  inline BasicBlock *getHeaderNode() const { return HeaderNode; }
+
+  /// Nodes - The basic blocks in this interval.
+  ///
+  std::vector<BasicBlock*> Nodes;
+
+  /// Successors - List of BasicBlocks that are reachable directly from nodes in
+  /// this interval, but are not in the interval themselves.
+  /// These nodes necessarily must be header nodes for other intervals.
+  ///
+  std::vector<BasicBlock*> Successors;
+
+  /// Predecessors - List of BasicBlocks that have this Interval's header block
+  /// as one of their successors.
+  ///
+  std::vector<BasicBlock*> Predecessors;
+
+  /// contains - Find out if a basic block is in this interval
+  inline bool contains(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    for (unsigned i = 0; i < Nodes.size(); ++i)
+      if (Nodes[i] == BB) return true;
+    return false;
+    // I don't want the dependency on <algorithm>
+    //return find(Nodes.begin(), Nodes.end(), BB) != Nodes.end();
+  }
+
+  /// isSuccessor - find out if a basic block is a successor of this Interval
+  inline bool isSuccessor(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    for (unsigned i = 0; i < Successors.size(); ++i)
+      if (Successors[i] == BB) return true;
+    return false;
+    // I don't want the dependency on <algorithm>
+    //return find(Successors.begin(), Successors.end(), BB) != Successors.end();
+  }
+
+  /// Equality operator.  It is only valid to compare two intervals from the
+  /// same partition, because of this, all we have to check is the header node
+  /// for equality.
+  ///
+  inline bool operator==(const Interval &I) const {
+    return HeaderNode == I.HeaderNode;
+  }
+
+  /// isLoop - Find out if there is a back edge in this interval...
+  bool isLoop() const;
+
+  /// print - Show contents in human readable format...
+  void print(raw_ostream &O) const;
+};
+
+/// succ_begin/succ_end - define methods so that Intervals may be used
+/// just like BasicBlocks can with the succ_* functions, and *::succ_iterator.
+///
+inline Interval::succ_iterator succ_begin(Interval *I) {
+  return I->Successors.begin();
+}
+inline Interval::succ_iterator succ_end(Interval *I)   {
+  return I->Successors.end();
+}
+
+/// pred_begin/pred_end - define methods so that Intervals may be used
+/// just like BasicBlocks can with the pred_* functions, and *::pred_iterator.
+///
+inline Interval::pred_iterator pred_begin(Interval *I) {
+  return I->Predecessors.begin();
+}
+inline Interval::pred_iterator pred_end(Interval *I)   {
+  return I->Predecessors.end();
+}
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<Interval*> {
+  typedef Interval NodeType;
+  typedef Interval::succ_iterator ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(Interval *I) { return I; }
+
+  /// nodes_iterator/begin/end - Allow iteration over all nodes in the graph
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return succ_begin(N);
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return succ_end(N);
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<Inverse<Interval*> > {
+  typedef Interval NodeType;
+  typedef Interval::pred_iterator ChildIteratorType;
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(Inverse<Interval *> G) { return G.Graph; }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return pred_begin(N);
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return pred_end(N);
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/IntervalIterator.h

@@ -0,0 +1,259 @@
+//===- IntervalIterator.h - Interval Iterator Declaration -------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines an iterator that enumerates the intervals in a control flow
+// graph of some sort.  This iterator is parametric, allowing iterator over the
+// following types of graphs:
+//
+//  1. A Function* object, composed of BasicBlock nodes.
+//  2. An IntervalPartition& object, composed of Interval nodes.
+//
+// This iterator is defined to walk the control flow graph, returning intervals
+// in depth first order.  These intervals are completely filled in except for
+// the predecessor fields (the successor information is filled in however).
+//
+// By default, the intervals created by this iterator are deleted after they
+// are no longer any use to the iterator.  This behavior can be changed by
+// passing a false value into the intervals_begin() function. This causes the
+// IOwnMem member to be set, and the intervals to not be deleted.
+//
+// It is only safe to use this if all of the intervals are deleted by the caller
+// and all of the intervals are processed.  However, the user of the iterator is
+// not allowed to modify or delete the intervals until after the iterator has
+// been used completely.  The IntervalPartition class uses this functionality.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_INTERVALITERATOR_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_INTERVALITERATOR_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/IntervalPartition.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CFG.h"
+#include <algorithm>
+#include <set>
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+// getNodeHeader - Given a source graph node and the source graph, return the
+// BasicBlock that is the header node.  This is the opposite of
+// getSourceGraphNode.
+//
+inline BasicBlock *getNodeHeader(BasicBlock *BB) { return BB; }
+inline BasicBlock *getNodeHeader(Interval *I) { return I->getHeaderNode(); }
+
+// getSourceGraphNode - Given a BasicBlock and the source graph, return the
+// source graph node that corresponds to the BasicBlock.  This is the opposite
+// of getNodeHeader.
+//
+inline BasicBlock *getSourceGraphNode(Function *, BasicBlock *BB) {
+  return BB;
+}
+inline Interval *getSourceGraphNode(IntervalPartition *IP, BasicBlock *BB) {
+  return IP->getBlockInterval(BB);
+}
+
+// addNodeToInterval - This method exists to assist the generic ProcessNode
+// with the task of adding a node to the new interval, depending on the
+// type of the source node.  In the case of a CFG source graph (BasicBlock
+// case), the BasicBlock itself is added to the interval.
+//
+inline void addNodeToInterval(Interval *Int, BasicBlock *BB) {
+  Int->Nodes.push_back(BB);
+}
+
+// addNodeToInterval - This method exists to assist the generic ProcessNode
+// with the task of adding a node to the new interval, depending on the
+// type of the source node.  In the case of a CFG source graph (BasicBlock
+// case), the BasicBlock itself is added to the interval.  In the case of
+// an IntervalPartition source graph (Interval case), all of the member
+// BasicBlocks are added to the interval.
+//
+inline void addNodeToInterval(Interval *Int, Interval *I) {
+  // Add all of the nodes in I as new nodes in Int.
+  copy(I->Nodes.begin(), I->Nodes.end(), back_inserter(Int->Nodes));
+}
+
+
+
+
+
+template<class NodeTy, class OrigContainer_t, class GT = GraphTraits<NodeTy*>,
+         class IGT = GraphTraits<Inverse<NodeTy*> > >
+class IntervalIterator {
+  std::vector<std::pair<Interval*, typename Interval::succ_iterator> > IntStack;
+  std::set<BasicBlock*> Visited;
+  OrigContainer_t *OrigContainer;
+  bool IOwnMem;     // If True, delete intervals when done with them
+                    // See file header for conditions of use
+public:
+  typedef IntervalIterator<NodeTy, OrigContainer_t> _Self;
+  typedef std::forward_iterator_tag iterator_category;
+
+  IntervalIterator() {} // End iterator, empty stack
+  IntervalIterator(Function *M, bool OwnMemory) : IOwnMem(OwnMemory) {
+    OrigContainer = M;
+    if (!ProcessInterval(&M->front())) {
+      llvm_unreachable("ProcessInterval should never fail for first interval!");
+    }
+  }
+
+  IntervalIterator(IntervalPartition &IP, bool OwnMemory) : IOwnMem(OwnMemory) {
+    OrigContainer = &IP;
+    if (!ProcessInterval(IP.getRootInterval())) {
+      llvm_unreachable("ProcessInterval should never fail for first interval!");
+    }
+  }
+
+  inline ~IntervalIterator() {
+    if (IOwnMem)
+      while (!IntStack.empty()) {
+        delete operator*();
+        IntStack.pop_back();
+      }
+  }
+
+  inline bool operator==(const _Self& x) const { return IntStack == x.IntStack;}
+  inline bool operator!=(const _Self& x) const { return !operator==(x); }
+
+  inline const Interval *operator*() const { return IntStack.back().first; }
+  inline       Interval *operator*()       { return IntStack.back().first; }
+  inline const Interval *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
+  inline       Interval *operator->()       { return operator*(); }
+
+  _Self& operator++() {  // Preincrement
+    assert(!IntStack.empty() && "Attempting to use interval iterator at end!");
+    do {
+      // All of the intervals on the stack have been visited.  Try visiting
+      // their successors now.
+      Interval::succ_iterator &SuccIt = IntStack.back().second,
+                                EndIt = succ_end(IntStack.back().first);
+      while (SuccIt != EndIt) {                 // Loop over all interval succs
+        bool Done = ProcessInterval(getSourceGraphNode(OrigContainer, *SuccIt));
+        ++SuccIt;                               // Increment iterator
+        if (Done) return *this;                 // Found a new interval! Use it!
+      }
+
+      // Free interval memory... if necessary
+      if (IOwnMem) delete IntStack.back().first;
+
+      // We ran out of successors for this interval... pop off the stack
+      IntStack.pop_back();
+    } while (!IntStack.empty());
+
+    return *this;
+  }
+  inline _Self operator++(int) { // Postincrement
+    _Self tmp = *this; ++*this; return tmp;
+  }
+
+private:
+  // ProcessInterval - This method is used during the construction of the
+  // interval graph.  It walks through the source graph, recursively creating
+  // an interval per invocation until the entire graph is covered.  This uses
+  // the ProcessNode method to add all of the nodes to the interval.
+  //
+  // This method is templated because it may operate on two different source
+  // graphs: a basic block graph, or a preexisting interval graph.
+  //
+  bool ProcessInterval(NodeTy *Node) {
+    BasicBlock *Header = getNodeHeader(Node);
+    if (Visited.count(Header)) return false;
+
+    Interval *Int = new Interval(Header);
+    Visited.insert(Header);   // The header has now been visited!
+
+    // Check all of our successors to see if they are in the interval...
+    for (typename GT::ChildIteratorType I = GT::child_begin(Node),
+           E = GT::child_end(Node); I != E; ++I)
+      ProcessNode(Int, getSourceGraphNode(OrigContainer, *I));
+
+    IntStack.push_back(std::make_pair(Int, succ_begin(Int)));
+    return true;
+  }
+
+  // ProcessNode - This method is called by ProcessInterval to add nodes to the
+  // interval being constructed, and it is also called recursively as it walks
+  // the source graph.  A node is added to the current interval only if all of
+  // its predecessors are already in the graph.  This also takes care of keeping
+  // the successor set of an interval up to date.
+  //
+  // This method is templated because it may operate on two different source
+  // graphs: a basic block graph, or a preexisting interval graph.
+  //
+  void ProcessNode(Interval *Int, NodeTy *Node) {
+    assert(Int && "Null interval == bad!");
+    assert(Node && "Null Node == bad!");
+
+    BasicBlock *NodeHeader = getNodeHeader(Node);
+
+    if (Visited.count(NodeHeader)) {     // Node already been visited?
+      if (Int->contains(NodeHeader)) {   // Already in this interval...
+        return;
+      } else {                           // In other interval, add as successor
+        if (!Int->isSuccessor(NodeHeader)) // Add only if not already in set
+          Int->Successors.push_back(NodeHeader);
+      }
+    } else {                             // Otherwise, not in interval yet
+      for (typename IGT::ChildIteratorType I = IGT::child_begin(Node),
+             E = IGT::child_end(Node); I != E; ++I) {
+        if (!Int->contains(*I)) {        // If pred not in interval, we can't be
+          if (!Int->isSuccessor(NodeHeader)) // Add only if not already in set
+            Int->Successors.push_back(NodeHeader);
+          return;                        // See you later
+        }
+      }
+
+      // If we get here, then all of the predecessors of BB are in the interval
+      // already.  In this case, we must add BB to the interval!
+      addNodeToInterval(Int, Node);
+      Visited.insert(NodeHeader);     // The node has now been visited!
+
+      if (Int->isSuccessor(NodeHeader)) {
+        // If we were in the successor list from before... remove from succ list
+        Int->Successors.erase(std::remove(Int->Successors.begin(),
+                                          Int->Successors.end(), NodeHeader),
+                              Int->Successors.end());
+      }
+
+      // Now that we have discovered that Node is in the interval, perhaps some
+      // of its successors are as well?
+      for (typename GT::ChildIteratorType It = GT::child_begin(Node),
+             End = GT::child_end(Node); It != End; ++It)
+        ProcessNode(Int, getSourceGraphNode(OrigContainer, *It));
+    }
+  }
+};
+
+typedef IntervalIterator<BasicBlock, Function> function_interval_iterator;
+typedef IntervalIterator<Interval, IntervalPartition>
+                                          interval_part_interval_iterator;
+
+
+inline function_interval_iterator intervals_begin(Function *F,
+                                                  bool DeleteInts = true) {
+  return function_interval_iterator(F, DeleteInts);
+}
+inline function_interval_iterator intervals_end(Function *) {
+  return function_interval_iterator();
+}
+
+inline interval_part_interval_iterator
+   intervals_begin(IntervalPartition &IP, bool DeleteIntervals = true) {
+  return interval_part_interval_iterator(IP, DeleteIntervals);
+}
+
+inline interval_part_interval_iterator intervals_end(IntervalPartition &IP) {
+  return interval_part_interval_iterator();
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/IntervalPartition.h

@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+//===- IntervalPartition.h - Interval partition Calculation -----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the IntervalPartition class, which
+// calculates and represents the interval partition of a function, or a
+// preexisting interval partition.
+//
+// In this way, the interval partition may be used to reduce a flow graph down
+// to its degenerate single node interval partition (unless it is irreducible).
+//
+// TODO: The IntervalPartition class should take a bool parameter that tells
+// whether it should add the "tails" of an interval to an interval itself or if
+// they should be represented as distinct intervals.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_INTERVALPARTITION_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_INTERVALPARTITION_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/Interval.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include <map>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// IntervalPartition - This class builds and holds an "interval partition" for
+// a function.  This partition divides the control flow graph into a set of
+// maximal intervals, as defined with the properties above.  Intuitively, an
+// interval is a (possibly nonexistent) loop with a "tail" of non looping
+// nodes following it.
+//
+class IntervalPartition : public FunctionPass {
+  typedef std::map<BasicBlock*, Interval*> IntervalMapTy;
+  IntervalMapTy IntervalMap;
+
+  typedef std::vector<Interval*> IntervalListTy;
+  Interval *RootInterval;
+  std::vector<Interval*> Intervals;
+
+public:
+  static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
+
+  IntervalPartition() : FunctionPass(ID), RootInterval(0) {
+    initializeIntervalPartitionPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+  }
+
+  // run - Calculate the interval partition for this function
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+
+  // IntervalPartition ctor - Build a reduced interval partition from an
+  // existing interval graph.  This takes an additional boolean parameter to
+  // distinguish it from a copy constructor.  Always pass in false for now.
+  //
+  IntervalPartition(IntervalPartition &I, bool);
+
+  // print - Show contents in human readable format...
+  virtual void print(raw_ostream &O, const Module* = 0) const;
+
+  // getRootInterval() - Return the root interval that contains the starting
+  // block of the function.
+  inline Interval *getRootInterval() { return RootInterval; }
+
+  // isDegeneratePartition() - Returns true if the interval partition contains
+  // a single interval, and thus cannot be simplified anymore.
+  bool isDegeneratePartition() { return Intervals.size() == 1; }
+
+  // TODO: isIrreducible - look for triangle graph.
+
+  // getBlockInterval - Return the interval that a basic block exists in.
+  inline Interval *getBlockInterval(BasicBlock *BB) {
+    IntervalMapTy::iterator I = IntervalMap.find(BB);
+    return I != IntervalMap.end() ? I->second : 0;
+  }
+
+  // getAnalysisUsage - Implement the Pass API
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+  }
+
+  // Interface to Intervals vector...
+  const std::vector<Interval*> &getIntervals() const { return Intervals; }
+
+  // releaseMemory - Reset state back to before function was analyzed
+  void releaseMemory();
+
+private:
+  // addIntervalToPartition - Add an interval to the internal list of intervals,
+  // and then add mappings from all of the basic blocks in the interval to the
+  // interval itself (in the IntervalMap).
+  //
+  void addIntervalToPartition(Interval *I);
+
+  // updatePredecessors - Interval generation only sets the successor fields of
+  // the interval data structures.  After interval generation is complete,
+  // run through all of the intervals and propagate successor info as
+  // predecessor info.
+  //
+  void updatePredecessors(Interval *Int);
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LazyValueInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+//===- LazyValueInfo.h - Value constraint analysis --------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the interface for lazy computation of value constraint
+// information.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LAZYVALUEINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LAZYVALUEINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class Constant;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class TargetLibraryInfo;
+  class Value;
+  
+/// LazyValueInfo - This pass computes, caches, and vends lazy value constraint
+/// information.
+class LazyValueInfo : public FunctionPass {
+  class DataLayout *TD;
+  class TargetLibraryInfo *TLI;
+  void *PImpl;
+  LazyValueInfo(const LazyValueInfo&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const LazyValueInfo&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+public:
+  static char ID;
+  LazyValueInfo() : FunctionPass(ID), PImpl(0) {
+    initializeLazyValueInfoPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+  }
+  ~LazyValueInfo() { assert(PImpl == 0 && "releaseMemory not called"); }
+
+  /// Tristate - This is used to return true/false/dunno results.
+  enum Tristate {
+    Unknown = -1, False = 0, True = 1
+  };
+  
+  
+  // Public query interface.
+  
+  /// getPredicateOnEdge - Determine whether the specified value comparison
+  /// with a constant is known to be true or false on the specified CFG edge.
+  /// Pred is a CmpInst predicate.
+  Tristate getPredicateOnEdge(unsigned Pred, Value *V, Constant *C,
+                              BasicBlock *FromBB, BasicBlock *ToBB);
+  
+  
+  /// getConstant - Determine whether the specified value is known to be a
+  /// constant at the end of the specified block.  Return null if not.
+  Constant *getConstant(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB);
+
+  /// getConstantOnEdge - Determine whether the specified value is known to be a
+  /// constant on the specified edge.  Return null if not.
+  Constant *getConstantOnEdge(Value *V, BasicBlock *FromBB, BasicBlock *ToBB);
+  
+  /// threadEdge - Inform the analysis cache that we have threaded an edge from
+  /// PredBB to OldSucc to be from PredBB to NewSucc instead.
+  void threadEdge(BasicBlock *PredBB, BasicBlock *OldSucc, BasicBlock *NewSucc);
+  
+  /// eraseBlock - Inform the analysis cache that we have erased a block.
+  void eraseBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
+  
+  // Implementation boilerplate.
+  
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+  virtual void releaseMemory();
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+};
+
+}  // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif
+

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LibCallAliasAnalysis.h

@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+//===- LibCallAliasAnalysis.h - Implement AliasAnalysis for libcalls ------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the LibCallAliasAnalysis class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LIBCALLALIASANALYSIS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LIBCALLALIASANALYSIS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/AliasAnalysis.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class LibCallInfo;
+  struct LibCallFunctionInfo;
+  
+  /// LibCallAliasAnalysis - Alias analysis driven from LibCallInfo.
+  struct LibCallAliasAnalysis : public FunctionPass, public AliasAnalysis {
+    static char ID; // Class identification
+    
+    LibCallInfo *LCI;
+    
+    explicit LibCallAliasAnalysis(LibCallInfo *LC = 0)
+        : FunctionPass(ID), LCI(LC) {
+      initializeLibCallAliasAnalysisPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+    }
+    explicit LibCallAliasAnalysis(char &ID, LibCallInfo *LC)
+        : FunctionPass(ID), LCI(LC) {
+      initializeLibCallAliasAnalysisPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+    }
+    ~LibCallAliasAnalysis();
+    
+    ModRefResult getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite CS,
+                               const Location &Loc);
+    
+    ModRefResult getModRefInfo(ImmutableCallSite CS1,
+                               ImmutableCallSite CS2) {
+      // TODO: Could compare two direct calls against each other if we cared to.
+      return AliasAnalysis::getModRefInfo(CS1, CS2);
+    }
+    
+    virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+    
+    virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F) {
+      InitializeAliasAnalysis(this);                 // set up super class
+      return false;
+    }
+    
+    /// getAdjustedAnalysisPointer - This method is used when a pass implements
+    /// an analysis interface through multiple inheritance.  If needed, it
+    /// should override this to adjust the this pointer as needed for the
+    /// specified pass info.
+    virtual void *getAdjustedAnalysisPointer(const void *PI) {
+      if (PI == &AliasAnalysis::ID)
+        return (AliasAnalysis*)this;
+      return this;
+    }
+    
+  private:
+    ModRefResult AnalyzeLibCallDetails(const LibCallFunctionInfo *FI,
+                                       ImmutableCallSite CS,
+                                       const Location &Loc);
+  };
+}  // End of llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LibCallSemantics.h

@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+//===- LibCallSemantics.h - Describe library semantics --------------------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines interfaces that can be used to describe language specific
+// runtime library interfaces (e.g. libc, libm, etc) to LLVM optimizers.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LIBCALLSEMANTICS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LIBCALLSEMANTICS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/AliasAnalysis.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+  /// LibCallLocationInfo - This struct describes a set of memory locations that
+  /// are accessed by libcalls.  Identification of a location is doing with a
+  /// simple callback function.
+  ///
+  /// For example, the LibCallInfo may be set up to model the behavior of
+  /// standard libm functions.  The location that they may be interested in is
+  /// an abstract location that represents errno for the current target.  In
+  /// this case, a location for errno is anything such that the predicate
+  /// returns true.  On Mac OS/X, this predicate would return true if the
+  /// pointer is the result of a call to "__error()".
+  ///
+  /// Locations can also be defined in a constant-sensitive way.  For example,
+  /// it is possible to define a location that returns true iff it is passed
+  /// into the call as a specific argument.  This is useful for modeling things
+  /// like "printf", which can store to memory, but only through pointers passed
+  /// with a '%n' constraint.
+  ///
+  struct LibCallLocationInfo {
+    // TODO: Flags: isContextSensitive etc.
+    
+    /// isLocation - Return a LocResult if the specified pointer refers to this
+    /// location for the specified call site.  This returns "Yes" if we can tell
+    /// that the pointer *does definitely* refer to the location, "No" if we can
+    /// tell that the location *definitely does not* refer to the location, and
+    /// returns "Unknown" if we cannot tell for certain.
+    enum LocResult {
+      Yes, No, Unknown
+    };
+    LocResult (*isLocation)(ImmutableCallSite CS,
+                            const AliasAnalysis::Location &Loc);
+  };
+  
+  /// LibCallFunctionInfo - Each record in the array of FunctionInfo structs
+  /// records the behavior of one libcall that is known by the optimizer.  This
+  /// captures things like the side effects of the call.  Side effects are
+  /// modeled both universally (in the readnone/readonly) sense, but also
+  /// potentially against a set of abstract locations defined by the optimizer.
+  /// This allows an optimizer to define that some libcall (e.g. sqrt) is
+  /// side-effect free except that it might modify errno (thus, the call is
+  /// *not* universally readonly).  Or it might say that the side effects
+  /// are unknown other than to say that errno is not modified.
+  ///
+  struct LibCallFunctionInfo {
+    /// Name - This is the name of the libcall this describes.
+    const char *Name;
+    
+    /// TODO: Constant folding function: Constant* vector -> Constant*.
+    
+    /// UniversalBehavior - This captures the absolute mod/ref behavior without
+    /// any specific context knowledge.  For example, if the function is known
+    /// to be readonly, this would be set to 'ref'.  If known to be readnone,
+    /// this is set to NoModRef.
+    AliasAnalysis::ModRefResult UniversalBehavior;
+    
+    /// LocationMRInfo - This pair captures info about whether a specific
+    /// location is modified or referenced by a libcall.
+    struct LocationMRInfo {
+      /// LocationID - ID # of the accessed location or ~0U for array end.
+      unsigned LocationID;
+      /// MRInfo - Mod/Ref info for this location.
+      AliasAnalysis::ModRefResult MRInfo;
+    };
+    
+    /// DetailsType - Indicate the sense of the LocationDetails array.  This
+    /// controls how the LocationDetails array is interpreted.
+    enum {
+      /// DoesOnly - If DetailsType is set to DoesOnly, then we know that the
+      /// *only* mod/ref behavior of this function is captured by the
+      /// LocationDetails array.  If we are trying to say that 'sqrt' can only
+      /// modify errno, we'd have the {errnoloc,mod} in the LocationDetails
+      /// array and have DetailsType set to DoesOnly.
+      DoesOnly,
+      
+      /// DoesNot - If DetailsType is set to DoesNot, then the sense of the
+      /// LocationDetails array is completely inverted.  This means that we *do
+      /// not* know everything about the side effects of this libcall, but we do
+      /// know things that the libcall cannot do.  This is useful for complex
+      /// functions like 'ctime' which have crazy mod/ref behavior, but are
+      /// known to never read or write errno.  In this case, we'd have
+      /// {errnoloc,modref} in the LocationDetails array and DetailsType would
+      /// be set to DoesNot, indicating that ctime does not read or write the
+      /// errno location.
+      DoesNot
+    } DetailsType;
+    
+    /// LocationDetails - This is a pointer to an array of LocationMRInfo
+    /// structs which indicates the behavior of the libcall w.r.t. specific
+    /// locations.  For example, if this libcall is known to only modify
+    /// 'errno', it would have a LocationDetails array with the errno ID and
+    /// 'mod' in it.  See the DetailsType field for how this is interpreted.
+    ///
+    /// In the "DoesOnly" case, this information is 'may' information for: there
+    /// is no guarantee that the specified side effect actually does happen,
+    /// just that it could.  In the "DoesNot" case, this is 'must not' info.
+    ///
+    /// If this pointer is null, no details are known.
+    ///
+    const LocationMRInfo *LocationDetails;
+  };
+  
+  
+  /// LibCallInfo - Abstract interface to query about library call information.
+  /// Instances of this class return known information about some set of
+  /// libcalls.
+  /// 
+  class LibCallInfo {
+    // Implementation details of this object, private.
+    mutable void *Impl;
+    mutable const LibCallLocationInfo *Locations;
+    mutable unsigned NumLocations;
+  public:
+    LibCallInfo() : Impl(0), Locations(0), NumLocations(0) {}
+    virtual ~LibCallInfo();
+    
+    //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+    //  Accessor Methods: Efficient access to contained data.
+    //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+    
+    /// getLocationInfo - Return information about the specified LocationID.
+    const LibCallLocationInfo &getLocationInfo(unsigned LocID) const;
+    
+    
+    /// getFunctionInfo - Return the LibCallFunctionInfo object corresponding to
+    /// the specified function if we have it.  If not, return null.
+    const LibCallFunctionInfo *getFunctionInfo(const Function *F) const;
+    
+    
+    //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+    //  Implementation Methods: Subclasses should implement these.
+    //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+    
+    /// getLocationInfo - Return descriptors for the locations referenced by
+    /// this set of libcalls.
+    virtual unsigned getLocationInfo(const LibCallLocationInfo *&Array) const {
+      return 0;
+    }
+    
+    /// getFunctionInfoArray - Return an array of descriptors that describe the
+    /// set of libcalls represented by this LibCallInfo object.  This array is
+    /// terminated by an entry with a NULL name.
+    virtual const LibCallFunctionInfo *getFunctionInfoArray() const = 0;
+  };
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Lint.h

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+//===-- llvm/Analysis/Lint.h - LLVM IR Lint ---------------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines lint interfaces that can be used for some sanity checking
+// of input to the system, and for checking that transformations
+// haven't done something bad. In contrast to the Verifier, the Lint checker
+// checks for undefined behavior or constructions with likely unintended
+// behavior.
+//
+// To see what specifically is checked, look at Lint.cpp
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LINT_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LINT_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class FunctionPass;
+class Module;
+class Function;
+
+/// @brief Create a lint pass.
+///
+/// Check a module or function.
+FunctionPass *createLintPass();
+
+/// @brief Check a module.
+///
+/// This should only be used for debugging, because it plays games with
+/// PassManagers and stuff.
+void lintModule(
+  const Module &M    ///< The module to be checked
+);
+
+// lintFunction - Check a function.
+void lintFunction(
+  const Function &F  ///< The function to be checked
+);
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Loads.h

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+//===- Loads.h - Local load analysis --------------------------------------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares simple local analyses for load instructions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOADS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOADS_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class AliasAnalysis;
+class DataLayout;
+class MDNode;
+
+/// isSafeToLoadUnconditionally - Return true if we know that executing a load
+/// from this value cannot trap.  If it is not obviously safe to load from the
+/// specified pointer, we do a quick local scan of the basic block containing
+/// ScanFrom, to determine if the address is already accessed.
+bool isSafeToLoadUnconditionally(Value *V, Instruction *ScanFrom,
+                                 unsigned Align, const DataLayout *TD = 0);
+
+/// FindAvailableLoadedValue - Scan the ScanBB block backwards (starting at
+/// the instruction before ScanFrom) checking to see if we have the value at
+/// the memory address *Ptr locally available within a small number of
+///  instructions. If the value is available, return it.
+///
+/// If not, return the iterator for the last validated instruction that the 
+/// value would be live through.  If we scanned the entire block and didn't
+/// find something that invalidates *Ptr or provides it, ScanFrom would be
+/// left at begin() and this returns null.  ScanFrom could also be left 
+///
+/// MaxInstsToScan specifies the maximum instructions to scan in the block.
+/// If it is set to 0, it will scan the whole block. You can also optionally
+/// specify an alias analysis implementation, which makes this more precise.
+///
+/// If TBAATag is non-null and a load or store is found, the TBAA tag from the
+/// load or store is recorded there.  If there is no TBAA tag or if no access
+/// is found, it is left unmodified.
+Value *FindAvailableLoadedValue(Value *Ptr, BasicBlock *ScanBB,
+                                BasicBlock::iterator &ScanFrom,
+                                unsigned MaxInstsToScan = 6,
+                                AliasAnalysis *AA = 0,
+                                MDNode **TBAATag = 0);
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LoopDependenceAnalysis.h

@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/LoopDependenceAnalysis.h --------------- -*- C++ -*---===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// LoopDependenceAnalysis is an LLVM pass that analyses dependences in memory
+// accesses in loops.
+//
+// Please note that this is work in progress and the interface is subject to
+// change.
+//
+// TODO: adapt as interface progresses
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOP_DEPENDENCE_ANALYSIS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOP_DEPENDENCE_ANALYSIS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/FoldingSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopPass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Allocator.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class AliasAnalysis;
+class AnalysisUsage;
+class ScalarEvolution;
+class SCEV;
+class Value;
+class raw_ostream;
+
+class LoopDependenceAnalysis : public LoopPass {
+  AliasAnalysis *AA;
+  ScalarEvolution *SE;
+
+  /// L - The loop we are currently analysing.
+  Loop *L;
+
+  /// TODO: doc
+  enum DependenceResult { Independent = 0, Dependent = 1, Unknown = 2 };
+
+  /// TODO: doc
+  struct Subscript {
+    /// TODO: Add distance, direction, breaking conditions, ...
+  };
+
+  /// DependencePair - Represents a data dependence relation between to memory
+  /// reference instructions.
+  struct DependencePair : public FastFoldingSetNode {
+    Value *A;
+    Value *B;
+    DependenceResult Result;
+    SmallVector<Subscript, 4> Subscripts;
+
+    DependencePair(const FoldingSetNodeID &ID, Value *a, Value *b) :
+        FastFoldingSetNode(ID), A(a), B(b), Result(Unknown), Subscripts() {}
+  };
+
+  /// findOrInsertDependencePair - Return true if a DependencePair for the
+  /// given Values already exists, false if a new DependencePair had to be
+  /// created. The third argument is set to the pair found or created.
+  bool findOrInsertDependencePair(Value*, Value*, DependencePair*&);
+
+  /// getLoops - Collect all loops of the loop nest L in which
+  /// a given SCEV is variant.
+  void getLoops(const SCEV*, DenseSet<const Loop*>*) const;
+
+  /// isLoopInvariant - True if a given SCEV is invariant in all loops of the
+  /// loop nest starting at the innermost loop L.
+  bool isLoopInvariant(const SCEV*) const;
+
+  /// isAffine - An SCEV is affine with respect to the loop nest starting at
+  /// the innermost loop L if it is of the form A+B*X where A, B are invariant
+  /// in the loop nest and X is a induction variable in the loop nest.
+  bool isAffine(const SCEV*) const;
+
+  /// TODO: doc
+  bool isZIVPair(const SCEV*, const SCEV*) const;
+  bool isSIVPair(const SCEV*, const SCEV*) const;
+  DependenceResult analyseZIV(const SCEV*, const SCEV*, Subscript*) const;
+  DependenceResult analyseSIV(const SCEV*, const SCEV*, Subscript*) const;
+  DependenceResult analyseMIV(const SCEV*, const SCEV*, Subscript*) const;
+  DependenceResult analyseSubscript(const SCEV*, const SCEV*, Subscript*) const;
+  DependenceResult analysePair(DependencePair*) const;
+
+public:
+  static char ID; // Class identification, replacement for typeinfo
+  LoopDependenceAnalysis() : LoopPass(ID) {
+    initializeLoopDependenceAnalysisPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+  }
+
+  /// isDependencePair - Check whether two values can possibly give rise to
+  /// a data dependence: that is the case if both are instructions accessing
+  /// memory and at least one of those accesses is a write.
+  bool isDependencePair(const Value*, const Value*) const;
+
+  /// depends - Return a boolean indicating if there is a data dependence
+  /// between two instructions.
+  bool depends(Value*, Value*);
+
+  bool runOnLoop(Loop*, LPPassManager&);
+  virtual void releaseMemory();
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage&) const;
+  void print(raw_ostream&, const Module* = 0) const;
+
+private:
+  FoldingSet<DependencePair> Pairs;
+  BumpPtrAllocator PairAllocator;
+}; // class LoopDependenceAnalysis
+
+// createLoopDependenceAnalysisPass - This creates an instance of the
+// LoopDependenceAnalysis pass.
+//
+LoopPass *createLoopDependenceAnalysisPass();
+
+} // namespace llvm
+
+#endif /* LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOP_DEPENDENCE_ANALYSIS_H */

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,710 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h - Natural Loop Calculator -------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the LoopInfo class that is used to identify natural loops
+// and determine the loop depth of various nodes of the CFG.  A natural loop
+// has exactly one entry-point, which is called the header. Note that natural
+// loops may actually be several loops that share the same header node.
+//
+// This analysis calculates the nesting structure of loops in a function.  For
+// each natural loop identified, this analysis identifies natural loops
+// contained entirely within the loop and the basic blocks the make up the loop.
+//
+// It can calculate on the fly various bits of information, for example:
+//
+//  * whether there is a preheader for the loop
+//  * the number of back edges to the header
+//  * whether or not a particular block branches out of the loop
+//  * the successor blocks of the loop
+//  * the loop depth
+//  * etc...
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/GraphTraits.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/Dominators.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include <algorithm>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+template<typename T>
+inline void RemoveFromVector(std::vector<T*> &V, T *N) {
+  typename std::vector<T*>::iterator I = std::find(V.begin(), V.end(), N);
+  assert(I != V.end() && "N is not in this list!");
+  V.erase(I);
+}
+
+class DominatorTree;
+class LoopInfo;
+class Loop;
+class PHINode;
+class raw_ostream;
+template<class N, class M> class LoopInfoBase;
+template<class N, class M> class LoopBase;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// LoopBase class - Instances of this class are used to represent loops that
+/// are detected in the flow graph
+///
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+class LoopBase {
+  LoopT *ParentLoop;
+  // SubLoops - Loops contained entirely within this one.
+  std::vector<LoopT *> SubLoops;
+
+  // Blocks - The list of blocks in this loop.  First entry is the header node.
+  std::vector<BlockT*> Blocks;
+
+  LoopBase(const LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT> &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>&
+    operator=(const LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT> &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+public:
+  /// Loop ctor - This creates an empty loop.
+  LoopBase() : ParentLoop(0) {}
+  ~LoopBase() {
+    for (size_t i = 0, e = SubLoops.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      delete SubLoops[i];
+  }
+
+  /// getLoopDepth - Return the nesting level of this loop.  An outer-most
+  /// loop has depth 1, for consistency with loop depth values used for basic
+  /// blocks, where depth 0 is used for blocks not inside any loops.
+  unsigned getLoopDepth() const {
+    unsigned D = 1;
+    for (const LoopT *CurLoop = ParentLoop; CurLoop;
+         CurLoop = CurLoop->ParentLoop)
+      ++D;
+    return D;
+  }
+  BlockT *getHeader() const { return Blocks.front(); }
+  LoopT *getParentLoop() const { return ParentLoop; }
+
+  /// setParentLoop is a raw interface for bypassing addChildLoop.
+  void setParentLoop(LoopT *L) { ParentLoop = L; }
+
+  /// contains - Return true if the specified loop is contained within in
+  /// this loop.
+  ///
+  bool contains(const LoopT *L) const {
+    if (L == this) return true;
+    if (L == 0)    return false;
+    return contains(L->getParentLoop());
+  }
+
+  /// contains - Return true if the specified basic block is in this loop.
+  ///
+  bool contains(const BlockT *BB) const {
+    return std::find(block_begin(), block_end(), BB) != block_end();
+  }
+
+  /// contains - Return true if the specified instruction is in this loop.
+  ///
+  template<class InstT>
+  bool contains(const InstT *Inst) const {
+    return contains(Inst->getParent());
+  }
+
+  /// iterator/begin/end - Return the loops contained entirely within this loop.
+  ///
+  const std::vector<LoopT *> &getSubLoops() const { return SubLoops; }
+  std::vector<LoopT *> &getSubLoopsVector() { return SubLoops; }
+  typedef typename std::vector<LoopT *>::const_iterator iterator;
+  typedef typename std::vector<LoopT *>::const_reverse_iterator
+    reverse_iterator;
+  iterator begin() const { return SubLoops.begin(); }
+  iterator end() const { return SubLoops.end(); }
+  reverse_iterator rbegin() const { return SubLoops.rbegin(); }
+  reverse_iterator rend() const { return SubLoops.rend(); }
+  bool empty() const { return SubLoops.empty(); }
+
+  /// getBlocks - Get a list of the basic blocks which make up this loop.
+  ///
+  const std::vector<BlockT*> &getBlocks() const { return Blocks; }
+  std::vector<BlockT*> &getBlocksVector() { return Blocks; }
+  typedef typename std::vector<BlockT*>::const_iterator block_iterator;
+  block_iterator block_begin() const { return Blocks.begin(); }
+  block_iterator block_end() const { return Blocks.end(); }
+
+  /// getNumBlocks - Get the number of blocks in this loop in constant time.
+  unsigned getNumBlocks() const {
+    return Blocks.size();
+  }
+
+  /// isLoopExiting - True if terminator in the block can branch to another
+  /// block that is outside of the current loop.
+  ///
+  bool isLoopExiting(const BlockT *BB) const {
+    typedef GraphTraits<const BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+    for (typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType SI =
+         BlockTraits::child_begin(BB),
+         SE = BlockTraits::child_end(BB); SI != SE; ++SI) {
+      if (!contains(*SI))
+        return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  /// getNumBackEdges - Calculate the number of back edges to the loop header
+  ///
+  unsigned getNumBackEdges() const {
+    unsigned NumBackEdges = 0;
+    BlockT *H = getHeader();
+
+    typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<BlockT*> > InvBlockTraits;
+    for (typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType I =
+         InvBlockTraits::child_begin(H),
+         E = InvBlockTraits::child_end(H); I != E; ++I)
+      if (contains(*I))
+        ++NumBackEdges;
+
+    return NumBackEdges;
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // APIs for simple analysis of the loop.
+  //
+  // Note that all of these methods can fail on general loops (ie, there may not
+  // be a preheader, etc).  For best success, the loop simplification and
+  // induction variable canonicalization pass should be used to normalize loops
+  // for easy analysis.  These methods assume canonical loops.
+
+  /// getExitingBlocks - Return all blocks inside the loop that have successors
+  /// outside of the loop.  These are the blocks _inside of the current loop_
+  /// which branch out.  The returned list is always unique.
+  ///
+  void getExitingBlocks(SmallVectorImpl<BlockT *> &ExitingBlocks) const;
+
+  /// getExitingBlock - If getExitingBlocks would return exactly one block,
+  /// return that block. Otherwise return null.
+  BlockT *getExitingBlock() const;
+
+  /// getExitBlocks - Return all of the successor blocks of this loop.  These
+  /// are the blocks _outside of the current loop_ which are branched to.
+  ///
+  void getExitBlocks(SmallVectorImpl<BlockT*> &ExitBlocks) const;
+
+  /// getExitBlock - If getExitBlocks would return exactly one block,
+  /// return that block. Otherwise return null.
+  BlockT *getExitBlock() const;
+
+  /// Edge type.
+  typedef std::pair<const BlockT*, const BlockT*> Edge;
+
+  /// getExitEdges - Return all pairs of (_inside_block_,_outside_block_).
+  void getExitEdges(SmallVectorImpl<Edge> &ExitEdges) const;
+
+  /// getLoopPreheader - If there is a preheader for this loop, return it.  A
+  /// loop has a preheader if there is only one edge to the header of the loop
+  /// from outside of the loop.  If this is the case, the block branching to the
+  /// header of the loop is the preheader node.
+  ///
+  /// This method returns null if there is no preheader for the loop.
+  ///
+  BlockT *getLoopPreheader() const;
+
+  /// getLoopPredecessor - If the given loop's header has exactly one unique
+  /// predecessor outside the loop, return it. Otherwise return null.
+  /// This is less strict that the loop "preheader" concept, which requires
+  /// the predecessor to have exactly one successor.
+  ///
+  BlockT *getLoopPredecessor() const;
+
+  /// getLoopLatch - If there is a single latch block for this loop, return it.
+  /// A latch block is a block that contains a branch back to the header.
+  BlockT *getLoopLatch() const;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // APIs for updating loop information after changing the CFG
+  //
+
+  /// addBasicBlockToLoop - This method is used by other analyses to update loop
+  /// information.  NewBB is set to be a new member of the current loop.
+  /// Because of this, it is added as a member of all parent loops, and is added
+  /// to the specified LoopInfo object as being in the current basic block.  It
+  /// is not valid to replace the loop header with this method.
+  ///
+  void addBasicBlockToLoop(BlockT *NewBB, LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT> &LI);
+
+  /// replaceChildLoopWith - This is used when splitting loops up.  It replaces
+  /// the OldChild entry in our children list with NewChild, and updates the
+  /// parent pointer of OldChild to be null and the NewChild to be this loop.
+  /// This updates the loop depth of the new child.
+  void replaceChildLoopWith(LoopT *OldChild, LoopT *NewChild);
+
+  /// addChildLoop - Add the specified loop to be a child of this loop.  This
+  /// updates the loop depth of the new child.
+  ///
+  void addChildLoop(LoopT *NewChild) {
+    assert(NewChild->ParentLoop == 0 && "NewChild already has a parent!");
+    NewChild->ParentLoop = static_cast<LoopT *>(this);
+    SubLoops.push_back(NewChild);
+  }
+
+  /// removeChildLoop - This removes the specified child from being a subloop of
+  /// this loop.  The loop is not deleted, as it will presumably be inserted
+  /// into another loop.
+  LoopT *removeChildLoop(iterator I) {
+    assert(I != SubLoops.end() && "Cannot remove end iterator!");
+    LoopT *Child = *I;
+    assert(Child->ParentLoop == this && "Child is not a child of this loop!");
+    SubLoops.erase(SubLoops.begin()+(I-begin()));
+    Child->ParentLoop = 0;
+    return Child;
+  }
+
+  /// addBlockEntry - This adds a basic block directly to the basic block list.
+  /// This should only be used by transformations that create new loops.  Other
+  /// transformations should use addBasicBlockToLoop.
+  void addBlockEntry(BlockT *BB) {
+    Blocks.push_back(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// moveToHeader - This method is used to move BB (which must be part of this
+  /// loop) to be the loop header of the loop (the block that dominates all
+  /// others).
+  void moveToHeader(BlockT *BB) {
+    if (Blocks[0] == BB) return;
+    for (unsigned i = 0; ; ++i) {
+      assert(i != Blocks.size() && "Loop does not contain BB!");
+      if (Blocks[i] == BB) {
+        Blocks[i] = Blocks[0];
+        Blocks[0] = BB;
+        return;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /// removeBlockFromLoop - This removes the specified basic block from the
+  /// current loop, updating the Blocks as appropriate.  This does not update
+  /// the mapping in the LoopInfo class.
+  void removeBlockFromLoop(BlockT *BB) {
+    RemoveFromVector(Blocks, BB);
+  }
+
+  /// verifyLoop - Verify loop structure
+  void verifyLoop() const;
+
+  /// verifyLoop - Verify loop structure of this loop and all nested loops.
+  void verifyLoopNest(DenseSet<const LoopT*> *Loops) const;
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS, unsigned Depth = 0) const;
+
+protected:
+  friend class LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT>;
+  explicit LoopBase(BlockT *BB) : ParentLoop(0) {
+    Blocks.push_back(BB);
+  }
+};
+
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT> &Loop) {
+  Loop.print(OS);
+  return OS;
+}
+
+// Implementation in LoopInfoImpl.h
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+__extension__ extern template class LoopBase<BasicBlock, Loop>;
+#endif
+
+class Loop : public LoopBase<BasicBlock, Loop> {
+public:
+  Loop() {}
+
+  /// isLoopInvariant - Return true if the specified value is loop invariant
+  ///
+  bool isLoopInvariant(Value *V) const;
+
+  /// hasLoopInvariantOperands - Return true if all the operands of the
+  /// specified instruction are loop invariant.
+  bool hasLoopInvariantOperands(Instruction *I) const;
+
+  /// makeLoopInvariant - If the given value is an instruction inside of the
+  /// loop and it can be hoisted, do so to make it trivially loop-invariant.
+  /// Return true if the value after any hoisting is loop invariant. This
+  /// function can be used as a slightly more aggressive replacement for
+  /// isLoopInvariant.
+  ///
+  /// If InsertPt is specified, it is the point to hoist instructions to.
+  /// If null, the terminator of the loop preheader is used.
+  ///
+  bool makeLoopInvariant(Value *V, bool &Changed,
+                         Instruction *InsertPt = 0) const;
+
+  /// makeLoopInvariant - If the given instruction is inside of the
+  /// loop and it can be hoisted, do so to make it trivially loop-invariant.
+  /// Return true if the instruction after any hoisting is loop invariant. This
+  /// function can be used as a slightly more aggressive replacement for
+  /// isLoopInvariant.
+  ///
+  /// If InsertPt is specified, it is the point to hoist instructions to.
+  /// If null, the terminator of the loop preheader is used.
+  ///
+  bool makeLoopInvariant(Instruction *I, bool &Changed,
+                         Instruction *InsertPt = 0) const;
+
+  /// getCanonicalInductionVariable - Check to see if the loop has a canonical
+  /// induction variable: an integer recurrence that starts at 0 and increments
+  /// by one each time through the loop.  If so, return the phi node that
+  /// corresponds to it.
+  ///
+  /// The IndVarSimplify pass transforms loops to have a canonical induction
+  /// variable.
+  ///
+  PHINode *getCanonicalInductionVariable() const;
+
+  /// isLCSSAForm - Return true if the Loop is in LCSSA form
+  bool isLCSSAForm(DominatorTree &DT) const;
+
+  /// isLoopSimplifyForm - Return true if the Loop is in the form that
+  /// the LoopSimplify form transforms loops to, which is sometimes called
+  /// normal form.
+  bool isLoopSimplifyForm() const;
+
+  /// isSafeToClone - Return true if the loop body is safe to clone in practice.
+  bool isSafeToClone() const;
+
+  /// Returns true if the loop is annotated parallel.
+  ///
+  /// A parallel loop can be assumed to not contain any dependencies between
+  /// iterations by the compiler. That is, any loop-carried dependency checking
+  /// can be skipped completely when parallelizing the loop on the target
+  /// machine. Thus, if the parallel loop information originates from the
+  /// programmer, e.g. via the OpenMP parallel for pragma, it is the
+  /// programmer's responsibility to ensure there are no loop-carried
+  /// dependencies. The final execution order of the instructions across
+  /// iterations is not guaranteed, thus, the end result might or might not
+  /// implement actual concurrent execution of instructions across multiple
+  /// iterations.
+  bool isAnnotatedParallel() const;
+
+  /// hasDedicatedExits - Return true if no exit block for the loop
+  /// has a predecessor that is outside the loop.
+  bool hasDedicatedExits() const;
+
+  /// getUniqueExitBlocks - Return all unique successor blocks of this loop.
+  /// These are the blocks _outside of the current loop_ which are branched to.
+  /// This assumes that loop exits are in canonical form.
+  ///
+  void getUniqueExitBlocks(SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock *> &ExitBlocks) const;
+
+  /// getUniqueExitBlock - If getUniqueExitBlocks would return exactly one
+  /// block, return that block. Otherwise return null.
+  BasicBlock *getUniqueExitBlock() const;
+
+  void dump() const;
+
+private:
+  friend class LoopInfoBase<BasicBlock, Loop>;
+  explicit Loop(BasicBlock *BB) : LoopBase<BasicBlock, Loop>(BB) {}
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// LoopInfo - This class builds and contains all of the top level loop
+/// structures in the specified function.
+///
+
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+class LoopInfoBase {
+  // BBMap - Mapping of basic blocks to the inner most loop they occur in
+  DenseMap<BlockT *, LoopT *> BBMap;
+  std::vector<LoopT *> TopLevelLoops;
+  friend class LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>;
+  friend class LoopInfo;
+
+  void operator=(const LoopInfoBase &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  LoopInfoBase(const LoopInfo &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+public:
+  LoopInfoBase() { }
+  ~LoopInfoBase() { releaseMemory(); }
+
+  void releaseMemory() {
+    for (typename std::vector<LoopT *>::iterator I =
+         TopLevelLoops.begin(), E = TopLevelLoops.end(); I != E; ++I)
+      delete *I;   // Delete all of the loops...
+
+    BBMap.clear();                           // Reset internal state of analysis
+    TopLevelLoops.clear();
+  }
+
+  /// iterator/begin/end - The interface to the top-level loops in the current
+  /// function.
+  ///
+  typedef typename std::vector<LoopT *>::const_iterator iterator;
+  typedef typename std::vector<LoopT *>::const_reverse_iterator
+    reverse_iterator;
+  iterator begin() const { return TopLevelLoops.begin(); }
+  iterator end() const { return TopLevelLoops.end(); }
+  reverse_iterator rbegin() const { return TopLevelLoops.rbegin(); }
+  reverse_iterator rend() const { return TopLevelLoops.rend(); }
+  bool empty() const { return TopLevelLoops.empty(); }
+
+  /// getLoopFor - Return the inner most loop that BB lives in.  If a basic
+  /// block is in no loop (for example the entry node), null is returned.
+  ///
+  LoopT *getLoopFor(const BlockT *BB) const {
+    return BBMap.lookup(const_cast<BlockT*>(BB));
+  }
+
+  /// operator[] - same as getLoopFor...
+  ///
+  const LoopT *operator[](const BlockT *BB) const {
+    return getLoopFor(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// getLoopDepth - Return the loop nesting level of the specified block.  A
+  /// depth of 0 means the block is not inside any loop.
+  ///
+  unsigned getLoopDepth(const BlockT *BB) const {
+    const LoopT *L = getLoopFor(BB);
+    return L ? L->getLoopDepth() : 0;
+  }
+
+  // isLoopHeader - True if the block is a loop header node
+  bool isLoopHeader(BlockT *BB) const {
+    const LoopT *L = getLoopFor(BB);
+    return L && L->getHeader() == BB;
+  }
+
+  /// removeLoop - This removes the specified top-level loop from this loop info
+  /// object.  The loop is not deleted, as it will presumably be inserted into
+  /// another loop.
+  LoopT *removeLoop(iterator I) {
+    assert(I != end() && "Cannot remove end iterator!");
+    LoopT *L = *I;
+    assert(L->getParentLoop() == 0 && "Not a top-level loop!");
+    TopLevelLoops.erase(TopLevelLoops.begin() + (I-begin()));
+    return L;
+  }
+
+  /// changeLoopFor - Change the top-level loop that contains BB to the
+  /// specified loop.  This should be used by transformations that restructure
+  /// the loop hierarchy tree.
+  void changeLoopFor(BlockT *BB, LoopT *L) {
+    if (!L) {
+      BBMap.erase(BB);
+      return;
+    }
+    BBMap[BB] = L;
+  }
+
+  /// changeTopLevelLoop - Replace the specified loop in the top-level loops
+  /// list with the indicated loop.
+  void changeTopLevelLoop(LoopT *OldLoop,
+                          LoopT *NewLoop) {
+    typename std::vector<LoopT *>::iterator I =
+                 std::find(TopLevelLoops.begin(), TopLevelLoops.end(), OldLoop);
+    assert(I != TopLevelLoops.end() && "Old loop not at top level!");
+    *I = NewLoop;
+    assert(NewLoop->ParentLoop == 0 && OldLoop->ParentLoop == 0 &&
+           "Loops already embedded into a subloop!");
+  }
+
+  /// addTopLevelLoop - This adds the specified loop to the collection of
+  /// top-level loops.
+  void addTopLevelLoop(LoopT *New) {
+    assert(New->getParentLoop() == 0 && "Loop already in subloop!");
+    TopLevelLoops.push_back(New);
+  }
+
+  /// removeBlock - This method completely removes BB from all data structures,
+  /// including all of the Loop objects it is nested in and our mapping from
+  /// BasicBlocks to loops.
+  void removeBlock(BlockT *BB) {
+    typename DenseMap<BlockT *, LoopT *>::iterator I = BBMap.find(BB);
+    if (I != BBMap.end()) {
+      for (LoopT *L = I->second; L; L = L->getParentLoop())
+        L->removeBlockFromLoop(BB);
+
+      BBMap.erase(I);
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Internals
+
+  static bool isNotAlreadyContainedIn(const LoopT *SubLoop,
+                                      const LoopT *ParentLoop) {
+    if (SubLoop == 0) return true;
+    if (SubLoop == ParentLoop) return false;
+    return isNotAlreadyContainedIn(SubLoop->getParentLoop(), ParentLoop);
+  }
+
+  /// Create the loop forest using a stable algorithm.
+  void Analyze(DominatorTreeBase<BlockT> &DomTree);
+
+  // Debugging
+
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+};
+
+// Implementation in LoopInfoImpl.h
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+__extension__ extern template class LoopInfoBase<BasicBlock, Loop>;
+#endif
+
+class LoopInfo : public FunctionPass {
+  LoopInfoBase<BasicBlock, Loop> LI;
+  friend class LoopBase<BasicBlock, Loop>;
+
+  void operator=(const LoopInfo &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  LoopInfo(const LoopInfo &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+public:
+  static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
+
+  LoopInfo() : FunctionPass(ID) {
+    initializeLoopInfoPass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+  }
+
+  LoopInfoBase<BasicBlock, Loop>& getBase() { return LI; }
+
+  /// iterator/begin/end - The interface to the top-level loops in the current
+  /// function.
+  ///
+  typedef LoopInfoBase<BasicBlock, Loop>::iterator iterator;
+  typedef LoopInfoBase<BasicBlock, Loop>::reverse_iterator reverse_iterator;
+  inline iterator begin() const { return LI.begin(); }
+  inline iterator end() const { return LI.end(); }
+  inline reverse_iterator rbegin() const { return LI.rbegin(); }
+  inline reverse_iterator rend() const { return LI.rend(); }
+  bool empty() const { return LI.empty(); }
+
+  /// getLoopFor - Return the inner most loop that BB lives in.  If a basic
+  /// block is in no loop (for example the entry node), null is returned.
+  ///
+  inline Loop *getLoopFor(const BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return LI.getLoopFor(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// operator[] - same as getLoopFor...
+  ///
+  inline const Loop *operator[](const BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return LI.getLoopFor(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// getLoopDepth - Return the loop nesting level of the specified block.  A
+  /// depth of 0 means the block is not inside any loop.
+  ///
+  inline unsigned getLoopDepth(const BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return LI.getLoopDepth(BB);
+  }
+
+  // isLoopHeader - True if the block is a loop header node
+  inline bool isLoopHeader(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return LI.isLoopHeader(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// runOnFunction - Calculate the natural loop information.
+  ///
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+
+  virtual void verifyAnalysis() const;
+
+  virtual void releaseMemory() { LI.releaseMemory(); }
+
+  virtual void print(raw_ostream &O, const Module* M = 0) const;
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+
+  /// removeLoop - This removes the specified top-level loop from this loop info
+  /// object.  The loop is not deleted, as it will presumably be inserted into
+  /// another loop.
+  inline Loop *removeLoop(iterator I) { return LI.removeLoop(I); }
+
+  /// changeLoopFor - Change the top-level loop that contains BB to the
+  /// specified loop.  This should be used by transformations that restructure
+  /// the loop hierarchy tree.
+  inline void changeLoopFor(BasicBlock *BB, Loop *L) {
+    LI.changeLoopFor(BB, L);
+  }
+
+  /// changeTopLevelLoop - Replace the specified loop in the top-level loops
+  /// list with the indicated loop.
+  inline void changeTopLevelLoop(Loop *OldLoop, Loop *NewLoop) {
+    LI.changeTopLevelLoop(OldLoop, NewLoop);
+  }
+
+  /// addTopLevelLoop - This adds the specified loop to the collection of
+  /// top-level loops.
+  inline void addTopLevelLoop(Loop *New) {
+    LI.addTopLevelLoop(New);
+  }
+
+  /// removeBlock - This method completely removes BB from all data structures,
+  /// including all of the Loop objects it is nested in and our mapping from
+  /// BasicBlocks to loops.
+  void removeBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
+    LI.removeBlock(BB);
+  }
+
+  /// updateUnloop - Update LoopInfo after removing the last backedge from a
+  /// loop--now the "unloop". This updates the loop forest and parent loops for
+  /// each block so that Unloop is no longer referenced, but the caller must
+  /// actually delete the Unloop object.
+  void updateUnloop(Loop *Unloop);
+
+  /// replacementPreservesLCSSAForm - Returns true if replacing From with To
+  /// everywhere is guaranteed to preserve LCSSA form.
+  bool replacementPreservesLCSSAForm(Instruction *From, Value *To) {
+    // Preserving LCSSA form is only problematic if the replacing value is an
+    // instruction.
+    Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(To);
+    if (!I) return true;
+    // If both instructions are defined in the same basic block then replacement
+    // cannot break LCSSA form.
+    if (I->getParent() == From->getParent())
+      return true;
+    // If the instruction is not defined in a loop then it can safely replace
+    // anything.
+    Loop *ToLoop = getLoopFor(I->getParent());
+    if (!ToLoop) return true;
+    // If the replacing instruction is defined in the same loop as the original
+    // instruction, or in a loop that contains it as an inner loop, then using
+    // it as a replacement will not break LCSSA form.
+    return ToLoop->contains(getLoopFor(From->getParent()));
+  }
+};
+
+
+// Allow clients to walk the list of nested loops...
+template <> struct GraphTraits<const Loop*> {
+  typedef const Loop NodeType;
+  typedef LoopInfo::iterator ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(const Loop *L) { return L; }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->begin();
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->end();
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<Loop*> {
+  typedef Loop NodeType;
+  typedef LoopInfo::iterator ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(Loop *L) { return L; }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->begin();
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->end();
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LoopInfoImpl.h

@@ -0,0 +1,570 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/LoopInfoImpl.h - Natural Loop Calculator ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This is the generic implementation of LoopInfo used for both Loops and
+// MachineLoops.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPINFOIMPL_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPINFOIMPL_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/PostOrderIterator.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// APIs for simple analysis of the loop. See header notes.
+
+/// getExitingBlocks - Return all blocks inside the loop that have successors
+/// outside of the loop.  These are the blocks _inside of the current loop_
+/// which branch out.  The returned list is always unique.
+///
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::
+getExitingBlocks(SmallVectorImpl<BlockT *> &ExitingBlocks) const {
+  // Sort the blocks vector so that we can use binary search to do quick
+  // lookups.
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 128> LoopBBs(block_begin(), block_end());
+  std::sort(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end());
+
+  typedef GraphTraits<BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+  for (block_iterator BI = block_begin(), BE = block_end(); BI != BE; ++BI)
+    for (typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType I =
+           BlockTraits::child_begin(*BI), E = BlockTraits::child_end(*BI);
+         I != E; ++I)
+      if (!std::binary_search(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end(), *I)) {
+        // Not in current loop? It must be an exit block.
+        ExitingBlocks.push_back(*BI);
+        break;
+      }
+}
+
+/// getExitingBlock - If getExitingBlocks would return exactly one block,
+/// return that block. Otherwise return null.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+BlockT *LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::getExitingBlock() const {
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 8> ExitingBlocks;
+  getExitingBlocks(ExitingBlocks);
+  if (ExitingBlocks.size() == 1)
+    return ExitingBlocks[0];
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/// getExitBlocks - Return all of the successor blocks of this loop.  These
+/// are the blocks _outside of the current loop_ which are branched to.
+///
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::
+getExitBlocks(SmallVectorImpl<BlockT*> &ExitBlocks) const {
+  // Sort the blocks vector so that we can use binary search to do quick
+  // lookups.
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 128> LoopBBs(block_begin(), block_end());
+  std::sort(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end());
+
+  typedef GraphTraits<BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+  for (block_iterator BI = block_begin(), BE = block_end(); BI != BE; ++BI)
+    for (typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType I =
+           BlockTraits::child_begin(*BI), E = BlockTraits::child_end(*BI);
+         I != E; ++I)
+      if (!std::binary_search(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end(), *I))
+        // Not in current loop? It must be an exit block.
+        ExitBlocks.push_back(*I);
+}
+
+/// getExitBlock - If getExitBlocks would return exactly one block,
+/// return that block. Otherwise return null.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+BlockT *LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::getExitBlock() const {
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 8> ExitBlocks;
+  getExitBlocks(ExitBlocks);
+  if (ExitBlocks.size() == 1)
+    return ExitBlocks[0];
+  return 0;
+}
+
+/// getExitEdges - Return all pairs of (_inside_block_,_outside_block_).
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::
+getExitEdges(SmallVectorImpl<Edge> &ExitEdges) const {
+  // Sort the blocks vector so that we can use binary search to do quick
+  // lookups.
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 128> LoopBBs(block_begin(), block_end());
+  array_pod_sort(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end());
+
+  typedef GraphTraits<BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+  for (block_iterator BI = block_begin(), BE = block_end(); BI != BE; ++BI)
+    for (typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType I =
+           BlockTraits::child_begin(*BI), E = BlockTraits::child_end(*BI);
+         I != E; ++I)
+      if (!std::binary_search(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end(), *I))
+        // Not in current loop? It must be an exit block.
+        ExitEdges.push_back(Edge(*BI, *I));
+}
+
+/// getLoopPreheader - If there is a preheader for this loop, return it.  A
+/// loop has a preheader if there is only one edge to the header of the loop
+/// from outside of the loop.  If this is the case, the block branching to the
+/// header of the loop is the preheader node.
+///
+/// This method returns null if there is no preheader for the loop.
+///
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+BlockT *LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::getLoopPreheader() const {
+  // Keep track of nodes outside the loop branching to the header...
+  BlockT *Out = getLoopPredecessor();
+  if (!Out) return 0;
+
+  // Make sure there is only one exit out of the preheader.
+  typedef GraphTraits<BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+  typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType SI = BlockTraits::child_begin(Out);
+  ++SI;
+  if (SI != BlockTraits::child_end(Out))
+    return 0;  // Multiple exits from the block, must not be a preheader.
+
+  // The predecessor has exactly one successor, so it is a preheader.
+  return Out;
+}
+
+/// getLoopPredecessor - If the given loop's header has exactly one unique
+/// predecessor outside the loop, return it. Otherwise return null.
+/// This is less strict that the loop "preheader" concept, which requires
+/// the predecessor to have exactly one successor.
+///
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+BlockT *LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::getLoopPredecessor() const {
+  // Keep track of nodes outside the loop branching to the header...
+  BlockT *Out = 0;
+
+  // Loop over the predecessors of the header node...
+  BlockT *Header = getHeader();
+  typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<BlockT*> > InvBlockTraits;
+  for (typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+         InvBlockTraits::child_begin(Header),
+         PE = InvBlockTraits::child_end(Header); PI != PE; ++PI) {
+    typename InvBlockTraits::NodeType *N = *PI;
+    if (!contains(N)) {     // If the block is not in the loop...
+      if (Out && Out != N)
+        return 0;             // Multiple predecessors outside the loop
+      Out = N;
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Make sure there is only one exit out of the preheader.
+  assert(Out && "Header of loop has no predecessors from outside loop?");
+  return Out;
+}
+
+/// getLoopLatch - If there is a single latch block for this loop, return it.
+/// A latch block is a block that contains a branch back to the header.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+BlockT *LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::getLoopLatch() const {
+  BlockT *Header = getHeader();
+  typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<BlockT*> > InvBlockTraits;
+  typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+    InvBlockTraits::child_begin(Header);
+  typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType PE =
+    InvBlockTraits::child_end(Header);
+  BlockT *Latch = 0;
+  for (; PI != PE; ++PI) {
+    typename InvBlockTraits::NodeType *N = *PI;
+    if (contains(N)) {
+      if (Latch) return 0;
+      Latch = N;
+    }
+  }
+
+  return Latch;
+}
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// APIs for updating loop information after changing the CFG
+//
+
+/// addBasicBlockToLoop - This method is used by other analyses to update loop
+/// information.  NewBB is set to be a new member of the current loop.
+/// Because of this, it is added as a member of all parent loops, and is added
+/// to the specified LoopInfo object as being in the current basic block.  It
+/// is not valid to replace the loop header with this method.
+///
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::
+addBasicBlockToLoop(BlockT *NewBB, LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT> &LIB) {
+  assert((Blocks.empty() || LIB[getHeader()] == this) &&
+         "Incorrect LI specified for this loop!");
+  assert(NewBB && "Cannot add a null basic block to the loop!");
+  assert(LIB[NewBB] == 0 && "BasicBlock already in the loop!");
+
+  LoopT *L = static_cast<LoopT *>(this);
+
+  // Add the loop mapping to the LoopInfo object...
+  LIB.BBMap[NewBB] = L;
+
+  // Add the basic block to this loop and all parent loops...
+  while (L) {
+    L->Blocks.push_back(NewBB);
+    L = L->getParentLoop();
+  }
+}
+
+/// replaceChildLoopWith - This is used when splitting loops up.  It replaces
+/// the OldChild entry in our children list with NewChild, and updates the
+/// parent pointer of OldChild to be null and the NewChild to be this loop.
+/// This updates the loop depth of the new child.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::
+replaceChildLoopWith(LoopT *OldChild, LoopT *NewChild) {
+  assert(OldChild->ParentLoop == this && "This loop is already broken!");
+  assert(NewChild->ParentLoop == 0 && "NewChild already has a parent!");
+  typename std::vector<LoopT *>::iterator I =
+    std::find(SubLoops.begin(), SubLoops.end(), OldChild);
+  assert(I != SubLoops.end() && "OldChild not in loop!");
+  *I = NewChild;
+  OldChild->ParentLoop = 0;
+  NewChild->ParentLoop = static_cast<LoopT *>(this);
+}
+
+/// verifyLoop - Verify loop structure
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::verifyLoop() const {
+#ifndef NDEBUG
+  assert(!Blocks.empty() && "Loop header is missing");
+
+  // Setup for using a depth-first iterator to visit every block in the loop.
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 8> ExitBBs;
+  getExitBlocks(ExitBBs);
+  llvm::SmallPtrSet<BlockT*, 8> VisitSet;
+  VisitSet.insert(ExitBBs.begin(), ExitBBs.end());
+  df_ext_iterator<BlockT*, llvm::SmallPtrSet<BlockT*, 8> >
+    BI = df_ext_begin(getHeader(), VisitSet),
+    BE = df_ext_end(getHeader(), VisitSet);
+
+  // Keep track of the number of BBs visited.
+  unsigned NumVisited = 0;
+
+  // Sort the blocks vector so that we can use binary search to do quick
+  // lookups.
+  SmallVector<BlockT*, 128> LoopBBs(block_begin(), block_end());
+  std::sort(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end());
+
+  // Check the individual blocks.
+  for ( ; BI != BE; ++BI) {
+    BlockT *BB = *BI;
+    bool HasInsideLoopSuccs = false;
+    bool HasInsideLoopPreds = false;
+    SmallVector<BlockT *, 2> OutsideLoopPreds;
+
+    typedef GraphTraits<BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+    for (typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType SI =
+           BlockTraits::child_begin(BB), SE = BlockTraits::child_end(BB);
+         SI != SE; ++SI)
+      if (std::binary_search(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end(), *SI)) {
+        HasInsideLoopSuccs = true;
+        break;
+      }
+    typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<BlockT*> > InvBlockTraits;
+    for (typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+           InvBlockTraits::child_begin(BB), PE = InvBlockTraits::child_end(BB);
+         PI != PE; ++PI) {
+      BlockT *N = *PI;
+      if (std::binary_search(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end(), N))
+        HasInsideLoopPreds = true;
+      else
+        OutsideLoopPreds.push_back(N);
+    }
+
+    if (BB == getHeader()) {
+        assert(!OutsideLoopPreds.empty() && "Loop is unreachable!");
+    } else if (!OutsideLoopPreds.empty()) {
+      // A non-header loop shouldn't be reachable from outside the loop,
+      // though it is permitted if the predecessor is not itself actually
+      // reachable.
+      BlockT *EntryBB = BB->getParent()->begin();
+        for (df_iterator<BlockT *> NI = df_begin(EntryBB),
+               NE = df_end(EntryBB); NI != NE; ++NI)
+          for (unsigned i = 0, e = OutsideLoopPreds.size(); i != e; ++i)
+            assert(*NI != OutsideLoopPreds[i] &&
+                   "Loop has multiple entry points!");
+    }
+    assert(HasInsideLoopPreds && "Loop block has no in-loop predecessors!");
+    assert(HasInsideLoopSuccs && "Loop block has no in-loop successors!");
+    assert(BB != getHeader()->getParent()->begin() &&
+           "Loop contains function entry block!");
+
+    NumVisited++;
+  }
+
+  assert(NumVisited == getNumBlocks() && "Unreachable block in loop");
+
+  // Check the subloops.
+  for (iterator I = begin(), E = end(); I != E; ++I)
+    // Each block in each subloop should be contained within this loop.
+    for (block_iterator BI = (*I)->block_begin(), BE = (*I)->block_end();
+         BI != BE; ++BI) {
+        assert(std::binary_search(LoopBBs.begin(), LoopBBs.end(), *BI) &&
+               "Loop does not contain all the blocks of a subloop!");
+    }
+
+  // Check the parent loop pointer.
+  if (ParentLoop) {
+    assert(std::find(ParentLoop->begin(), ParentLoop->end(), this) !=
+           ParentLoop->end() &&
+           "Loop is not a subloop of its parent!");
+  }
+#endif
+}
+
+/// verifyLoop - Verify loop structure of this loop and all nested loops.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::verifyLoopNest(
+  DenseSet<const LoopT*> *Loops) const {
+  Loops->insert(static_cast<const LoopT *>(this));
+  // Verify this loop.
+  verifyLoop();
+  // Verify the subloops.
+  for (iterator I = begin(), E = end(); I != E; ++I)
+    (*I)->verifyLoopNest(Loops);
+}
+
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopBase<BlockT, LoopT>::print(raw_ostream &OS, unsigned Depth) const {
+  OS.indent(Depth*2) << "Loop at depth " << getLoopDepth()
+       << " containing: ";
+
+  for (unsigned i = 0; i < getBlocks().size(); ++i) {
+    if (i) OS << ",";
+    BlockT *BB = getBlocks()[i];
+    WriteAsOperand(OS, BB, false);
+    if (BB == getHeader())    OS << "<header>";
+    if (BB == getLoopLatch()) OS << "<latch>";
+    if (isLoopExiting(BB))    OS << "<exiting>";
+  }
+  OS << "\n";
+
+  for (iterator I = begin(), E = end(); I != E; ++I)
+    (*I)->print(OS, Depth+2);
+}
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// Stable LoopInfo Analysis - Build a loop tree using stable iterators so the
+/// result does / not depend on use list (block predecessor) order.
+///
+
+/// Discover a subloop with the specified backedges such that: All blocks within
+/// this loop are mapped to this loop or a subloop. And all subloops within this
+/// loop have their parent loop set to this loop or a subloop.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+static void discoverAndMapSubloop(LoopT *L, ArrayRef<BlockT*> Backedges,
+                                  LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT> *LI,
+                                  DominatorTreeBase<BlockT> &DomTree) {
+  typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<BlockT*> > InvBlockTraits;
+
+  unsigned NumBlocks = 0;
+  unsigned NumSubloops = 0;
+
+  // Perform a backward CFG traversal using a worklist.
+  std::vector<BlockT *> ReverseCFGWorklist(Backedges.begin(), Backedges.end());
+  while (!ReverseCFGWorklist.empty()) {
+    BlockT *PredBB = ReverseCFGWorklist.back();
+    ReverseCFGWorklist.pop_back();
+
+    LoopT *Subloop = LI->getLoopFor(PredBB);
+    if (!Subloop) {
+      if (!DomTree.isReachableFromEntry(PredBB))
+        continue;
+
+      // This is an undiscovered block. Map it to the current loop.
+      LI->changeLoopFor(PredBB, L);
+      ++NumBlocks;
+      if (PredBB == L->getHeader())
+          continue;
+      // Push all block predecessors on the worklist.
+      ReverseCFGWorklist.insert(ReverseCFGWorklist.end(),
+                                InvBlockTraits::child_begin(PredBB),
+                                InvBlockTraits::child_end(PredBB));
+    }
+    else {
+      // This is a discovered block. Find its outermost discovered loop.
+      while (LoopT *Parent = Subloop->getParentLoop())
+        Subloop = Parent;
+
+      // If it is already discovered to be a subloop of this loop, continue.
+      if (Subloop == L)
+        continue;
+
+      // Discover a subloop of this loop.
+      Subloop->setParentLoop(L);
+      ++NumSubloops;
+      NumBlocks += Subloop->getBlocks().capacity();
+      PredBB = Subloop->getHeader();
+      // Continue traversal along predecessors that are not loop-back edges from
+      // within this subloop tree itself. Note that a predecessor may directly
+      // reach another subloop that is not yet discovered to be a subloop of
+      // this loop, which we must traverse.
+      for (typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+             InvBlockTraits::child_begin(PredBB),
+             PE = InvBlockTraits::child_end(PredBB); PI != PE; ++PI) {
+        if (LI->getLoopFor(*PI) != Subloop)
+          ReverseCFGWorklist.push_back(*PI);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  L->getSubLoopsVector().reserve(NumSubloops);
+  L->getBlocksVector().reserve(NumBlocks);
+}
+
+namespace {
+/// Populate all loop data in a stable order during a single forward DFS.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+class PopulateLoopsDFS {
+  typedef GraphTraits<BlockT*> BlockTraits;
+  typedef typename BlockTraits::ChildIteratorType SuccIterTy;
+
+  LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT> *LI;
+  DenseSet<const BlockT *> VisitedBlocks;
+  std::vector<std::pair<BlockT*, SuccIterTy> > DFSStack;
+
+public:
+  PopulateLoopsDFS(LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT> *li):
+    LI(li) {}
+
+  void traverse(BlockT *EntryBlock);
+
+protected:
+  void insertIntoLoop(BlockT *Block);
+
+  BlockT *dfsSource() { return DFSStack.back().first; }
+  SuccIterTy &dfsSucc() { return DFSStack.back().second; }
+  SuccIterTy dfsSuccEnd() { return BlockTraits::child_end(dfsSource()); }
+
+  void pushBlock(BlockT *Block) {
+    DFSStack.push_back(std::make_pair(Block, BlockTraits::child_begin(Block)));
+  }
+};
+} // anonymous
+
+/// Top-level driver for the forward DFS within the loop.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void PopulateLoopsDFS<BlockT, LoopT>::traverse(BlockT *EntryBlock) {
+  pushBlock(EntryBlock);
+  VisitedBlocks.insert(EntryBlock);
+  while (!DFSStack.empty()) {
+    // Traverse the leftmost path as far as possible.
+    while (dfsSucc() != dfsSuccEnd()) {
+      BlockT *BB = *dfsSucc();
+      ++dfsSucc();
+      if (!VisitedBlocks.insert(BB).second)
+        continue;
+
+      // Push the next DFS successor onto the stack.
+      pushBlock(BB);
+    }
+    // Visit the top of the stack in postorder and backtrack.
+    insertIntoLoop(dfsSource());
+    DFSStack.pop_back();
+  }
+}
+
+/// Add a single Block to its ancestor loops in PostOrder. If the block is a
+/// subloop header, add the subloop to its parent in PostOrder, then reverse the
+/// Block and Subloop vectors of the now complete subloop to achieve RPO.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void PopulateLoopsDFS<BlockT, LoopT>::insertIntoLoop(BlockT *Block) {
+  LoopT *Subloop = LI->getLoopFor(Block);
+  if (Subloop && Block == Subloop->getHeader()) {
+    // We reach this point once per subloop after processing all the blocks in
+    // the subloop.
+    if (Subloop->getParentLoop())
+      Subloop->getParentLoop()->getSubLoopsVector().push_back(Subloop);
+    else
+      LI->addTopLevelLoop(Subloop);
+
+    // For convenience, Blocks and Subloops are inserted in postorder. Reverse
+    // the lists, except for the loop header, which is always at the beginning.
+    std::reverse(Subloop->getBlocksVector().begin()+1,
+                 Subloop->getBlocksVector().end());
+    std::reverse(Subloop->getSubLoopsVector().begin(),
+                 Subloop->getSubLoopsVector().end());
+
+    Subloop = Subloop->getParentLoop();
+  }
+  for (; Subloop; Subloop = Subloop->getParentLoop())
+    Subloop->getBlocksVector().push_back(Block);
+}
+
+/// Analyze LoopInfo discovers loops during a postorder DominatorTree traversal
+/// interleaved with backward CFG traversals within each subloop
+/// (discoverAndMapSubloop). The backward traversal skips inner subloops, so
+/// this part of the algorithm is linear in the number of CFG edges. Subloop and
+/// Block vectors are then populated during a single forward CFG traversal
+/// (PopulateLoopDFS).
+///
+/// During the two CFG traversals each block is seen three times:
+/// 1) Discovered and mapped by a reverse CFG traversal.
+/// 2) Visited during a forward DFS CFG traversal.
+/// 3) Reverse-inserted in the loop in postorder following forward DFS.
+///
+/// The Block vectors are inclusive, so step 3 requires loop-depth number of
+/// insertions per block.
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT>::
+Analyze(DominatorTreeBase<BlockT> &DomTree) {
+
+  // Postorder traversal of the dominator tree.
+  DomTreeNodeBase<BlockT>* DomRoot = DomTree.getRootNode();
+  for (po_iterator<DomTreeNodeBase<BlockT>*> DomIter = po_begin(DomRoot),
+         DomEnd = po_end(DomRoot); DomIter != DomEnd; ++DomIter) {
+
+    BlockT *Header = DomIter->getBlock();
+    SmallVector<BlockT *, 4> Backedges;
+
+    // Check each predecessor of the potential loop header.
+    typedef GraphTraits<Inverse<BlockT*> > InvBlockTraits;
+    for (typename InvBlockTraits::ChildIteratorType PI =
+           InvBlockTraits::child_begin(Header),
+           PE = InvBlockTraits::child_end(Header); PI != PE; ++PI) {
+
+      BlockT *Backedge = *PI;
+
+      // If Header dominates predBB, this is a new loop. Collect the backedges.
+      if (DomTree.dominates(Header, Backedge)
+          && DomTree.isReachableFromEntry(Backedge)) {
+        Backedges.push_back(Backedge);
+      }
+    }
+    // Perform a backward CFG traversal to discover and map blocks in this loop.
+    if (!Backedges.empty()) {
+      LoopT *L = new LoopT(Header);
+      discoverAndMapSubloop(L, ArrayRef<BlockT*>(Backedges), this, DomTree);
+    }
+  }
+  // Perform a single forward CFG traversal to populate block and subloop
+  // vectors for all loops.
+  PopulateLoopsDFS<BlockT, LoopT> DFS(this);
+  DFS.traverse(DomRoot->getBlock());
+}
+
+// Debugging
+template<class BlockT, class LoopT>
+void LoopInfoBase<BlockT, LoopT>::print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
+  for (unsigned i = 0; i < TopLevelLoops.size(); ++i)
+    TopLevelLoops[i]->print(OS);
+#if 0
+  for (DenseMap<BasicBlock*, LoopT*>::const_iterator I = BBMap.begin(),
+         E = BBMap.end(); I != E; ++I)
+    OS << "BB '" << I->first->getName() << "' level = "
+       << I->second->getLoopDepth() << "\n";
+#endif
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LoopIterator.h

@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+//===--------- LoopIterator.h - Iterate over loop blocks --------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// This file defines iterators to visit the basic blocks within a loop.
+//
+// These iterators currently visit blocks within subloops as well.
+// Unfortunately we have no efficient way of summarizing loop exits which would
+// allow skipping subloops during traversal.
+//
+// If you want to visit all blocks in a loop and don't need an ordered traveral,
+// use Loop::block_begin() instead.
+//
+// This is intentionally designed to work with ill-formed loops in which the
+// backedge has been deleted. The only prerequisite is that all blocks
+// contained within the loop according to the most recent LoopInfo analysis are
+// reachable from the loop header.
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPITERATOR_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPITERATOR_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/PostOrderIterator.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class LoopBlocksTraversal;
+
+/// Store the result of a depth first search within basic blocks contained by a
+/// single loop.
+///
+/// TODO: This could be generalized for any CFG region, or the entire CFG.
+class LoopBlocksDFS {
+public:
+  /// Postorder list iterators.
+  typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*>::const_iterator POIterator;
+  typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*>::const_reverse_iterator RPOIterator;
+
+  friend class LoopBlocksTraversal;
+
+private:
+  Loop *L;
+
+  /// Map each block to its postorder number. A block is only mapped after it is
+  /// preorder visited by DFS. It's postorder number is initially zero and set
+  /// to nonzero after it is finished by postorder traversal.
+  DenseMap<BasicBlock*, unsigned> PostNumbers;
+  std::vector<BasicBlock*> PostBlocks;
+
+public:
+  LoopBlocksDFS(Loop *Container) :
+    L(Container), PostNumbers(NextPowerOf2(Container->getNumBlocks())) {
+    PostBlocks.reserve(Container->getNumBlocks());
+  }
+
+  Loop *getLoop() const { return L; }
+
+  /// Traverse the loop blocks and store the DFS result.
+  void perform(LoopInfo *LI);
+
+  /// Return true if postorder numbers are assigned to all loop blocks.
+  bool isComplete() const { return PostBlocks.size() == L->getNumBlocks(); }
+
+  /// Iterate over the cached postorder blocks.
+  POIterator beginPostorder() const {
+    assert(isComplete() && "bad loop DFS");
+    return PostBlocks.begin();
+  }
+  POIterator endPostorder() const { return PostBlocks.end(); }
+
+  /// Reverse iterate over the cached postorder blocks.
+  RPOIterator beginRPO() const {
+    assert(isComplete() && "bad loop DFS");
+    return PostBlocks.rbegin();
+  }
+  RPOIterator endRPO() const { return PostBlocks.rend(); }
+
+  /// Return true if this block has been preorder visited.
+  bool hasPreorder(BasicBlock *BB) const { return PostNumbers.count(BB); }
+
+  /// Return true if this block has a postorder number.
+  bool hasPostorder(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    DenseMap<BasicBlock*, unsigned>::const_iterator I = PostNumbers.find(BB);
+    return I != PostNumbers.end() && I->second;
+  }
+
+  /// Get a block's postorder number.
+  unsigned getPostorder(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    DenseMap<BasicBlock*, unsigned>::const_iterator I = PostNumbers.find(BB);
+    assert(I != PostNumbers.end() && "block not visited by DFS");
+    assert(I->second && "block not finished by DFS");
+    return I->second;
+  }
+
+  /// Get a block's reverse postorder number.
+  unsigned getRPO(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return 1 + PostBlocks.size() - getPostorder(BB);
+  }
+
+  void clear() {
+    PostNumbers.clear();
+    PostBlocks.clear();
+  }
+};
+
+/// Specialize po_iterator_storage to record postorder numbers.
+template<> class po_iterator_storage<LoopBlocksTraversal, true> {
+  LoopBlocksTraversal &LBT;
+public:
+  po_iterator_storage(LoopBlocksTraversal &lbs) : LBT(lbs) {}
+  // These functions are defined below.
+  bool insertEdge(BasicBlock *From, BasicBlock *To);
+  void finishPostorder(BasicBlock *BB);
+};
+
+/// Traverse the blocks in a loop using a depth-first search.
+class LoopBlocksTraversal {
+public:
+  /// Graph traversal iterator.
+  typedef po_iterator<BasicBlock*, LoopBlocksTraversal, true> POTIterator;
+
+private:
+  LoopBlocksDFS &DFS;
+  LoopInfo *LI;
+
+public:
+  LoopBlocksTraversal(LoopBlocksDFS &Storage, LoopInfo *LInfo) :
+    DFS(Storage), LI(LInfo) {}
+
+  /// Postorder traversal over the graph. This only needs to be done once.
+  /// po_iterator "automatically" calls back to visitPreorder and
+  /// finishPostorder to record the DFS result.
+  POTIterator begin() {
+    assert(DFS.PostBlocks.empty() && "Need clear DFS result before traversing");
+    assert(DFS.L->getNumBlocks() && "po_iterator cannot handle an empty graph");
+    return po_ext_begin(DFS.L->getHeader(), *this);
+  }
+  POTIterator end() {
+    // po_ext_end interface requires a basic block, but ignores its value.
+    return po_ext_end(DFS.L->getHeader(), *this);
+  }
+
+  /// Called by po_iterator upon reaching a block via a CFG edge. If this block
+  /// is contained in the loop and has not been visited, then mark it preorder
+  /// visited and return true.
+  ///
+  /// TODO: If anyone is interested, we could record preorder numbers here.
+  bool visitPreorder(BasicBlock *BB) {
+    if (!DFS.L->contains(LI->getLoopFor(BB)))
+      return false;
+
+    return DFS.PostNumbers.insert(std::make_pair(BB, 0)).second;
+  }
+
+  /// Called by po_iterator each time it advances, indicating a block's
+  /// postorder.
+  void finishPostorder(BasicBlock *BB) {
+    assert(DFS.PostNumbers.count(BB) && "Loop DFS skipped preorder");
+    DFS.PostBlocks.push_back(BB);
+    DFS.PostNumbers[BB] = DFS.PostBlocks.size();
+  }
+};
+
+inline bool po_iterator_storage<LoopBlocksTraversal, true>::
+insertEdge(BasicBlock *From, BasicBlock *To) {
+  return LBT.visitPreorder(To);
+}
+
+inline void po_iterator_storage<LoopBlocksTraversal, true>::
+finishPostorder(BasicBlock *BB) {
+  LBT.finishPostorder(BB);
+}
+
+} // End namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/LoopPass.h

@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+//===- LoopPass.h - LoopPass class ----------------------------------------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines LoopPass class. All loop optimization
+// and transformation passes are derived from LoopPass.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPPASS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_LOOPPASS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/PassManagers.h"
+#include <deque>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class LPPassManager;
+class Function;
+class PMStack;
+
+class LoopPass : public Pass {
+public:
+  explicit LoopPass(char &pid) : Pass(PT_Loop, pid) {}
+
+  /// getPrinterPass - Get a pass to print the function corresponding
+  /// to a Loop.
+  Pass *createPrinterPass(raw_ostream &O, const std::string &Banner) const;
+
+  // runOnLoop - This method should be implemented by the subclass to perform
+  // whatever action is necessary for the specified Loop.
+  virtual bool runOnLoop(Loop *L, LPPassManager &LPM) = 0;
+
+  using llvm::Pass::doInitialization;
+  using llvm::Pass::doFinalization;
+
+  // Initialization and finalization hooks.
+  virtual bool doInitialization(Loop *L, LPPassManager &LPM) {
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  // Finalization hook does not supply Loop because at this time
+  // loop nest is completely different.
+  virtual bool doFinalization() { return false; }
+
+  // Check if this pass is suitable for the current LPPassManager, if
+  // available. This pass P is not suitable for a LPPassManager if P
+  // is not preserving higher level analysis info used by other
+  // LPPassManager passes. In such case, pop LPPassManager from the
+  // stack. This will force assignPassManager() to create new
+  // LPPassManger as expected.
+  void preparePassManager(PMStack &PMS);
+
+  /// Assign pass manager to manage this pass
+  virtual void assignPassManager(PMStack &PMS,
+                                 PassManagerType PMT);
+
+  ///  Return what kind of Pass Manager can manage this pass.
+  virtual PassManagerType getPotentialPassManagerType() const {
+    return PMT_LoopPassManager;
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SimpleAnalysis - Provides simple interface to update analysis info
+  /// maintained by various passes. Note, if required this interface can
+  /// be extracted into a separate abstract class but it would require
+  /// additional use of multiple inheritance in Pass class hierarchy, something
+  /// we are trying to avoid.
+
+  /// Each loop pass can override these simple analysis hooks to update
+  /// desired analysis information.
+  /// cloneBasicBlockAnalysis - Clone analysis info associated with basic block.
+  virtual void cloneBasicBlockAnalysis(BasicBlock *F, BasicBlock *T, Loop *L) {}
+
+  /// deleteAnalysisValue - Delete analysis info associated with value V.
+  virtual void deleteAnalysisValue(Value *V, Loop *L) {}
+};
+
+class LPPassManager : public FunctionPass, public PMDataManager {
+public:
+  static char ID;
+  explicit LPPassManager();
+
+  /// run - Execute all of the passes scheduled for execution.  Keep track of
+  /// whether any of the passes modifies the module, and if so, return true.
+  bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+
+  /// Pass Manager itself does not invalidate any analysis info.
+  // LPPassManager needs LoopInfo.
+  void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &Info) const;
+
+  virtual const char *getPassName() const {
+    return "Loop Pass Manager";
+  }
+
+  virtual PMDataManager *getAsPMDataManager() { return this; }
+  virtual Pass *getAsPass() { return this; }
+
+  /// Print passes managed by this manager
+  void dumpPassStructure(unsigned Offset);
+
+  LoopPass *getContainedPass(unsigned N) {
+    assert(N < PassVector.size() && "Pass number out of range!");
+    LoopPass *LP = static_cast<LoopPass *>(PassVector[N]);
+    return LP;
+  }
+
+  virtual PassManagerType getPassManagerType() const {
+    return PMT_LoopPassManager;
+  }
+
+public:
+  // Delete loop from the loop queue and loop nest (LoopInfo).
+  void deleteLoopFromQueue(Loop *L);
+
+  // Insert loop into the loop queue and add it as a child of the
+  // given parent.
+  void insertLoop(Loop *L, Loop *ParentLoop);
+
+  // Insert a loop into the loop queue.
+  void insertLoopIntoQueue(Loop *L);
+
+  // Reoptimize this loop. LPPassManager will re-insert this loop into the
+  // queue. This allows LoopPass to change loop nest for the loop. This
+  // utility may send LPPassManager into infinite loops so use caution.
+  void redoLoop(Loop *L);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SimpleAnalysis - Provides simple interface to update analysis info
+  /// maintained by various passes. Note, if required this interface can
+  /// be extracted into a separate abstract class but it would require
+  /// additional use of multiple inheritance in Pass class hierarchy, something
+  /// we are trying to avoid.
+
+  /// cloneBasicBlockSimpleAnalysis - Invoke cloneBasicBlockAnalysis hook for
+  /// all passes that implement simple analysis interface.
+  void cloneBasicBlockSimpleAnalysis(BasicBlock *From, BasicBlock *To, Loop *L);
+
+  /// deleteSimpleAnalysisValue - Invoke deleteAnalysisValue hook for all passes
+  /// that implement simple analysis interface.
+  void deleteSimpleAnalysisValue(Value *V, Loop *L);
+
+private:
+  std::deque<Loop *> LQ;
+  bool skipThisLoop;
+  bool redoThisLoop;
+  LoopInfo *LI;
+  Loop *CurrentLoop;
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h

@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h- Calls to memory builtins -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This family of functions identifies calls to builtin functions that allocate
+// or free memory.  
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_MEMORYBUILTINS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_MEMORYBUILTINS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
+#include "llvm/InstVisitor.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/TargetFolder.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+class CallInst;
+class PointerType;
+class DataLayout;
+class TargetLibraryInfo;
+class Type;
+class Value;
+
+
+/// \brief Tests if a value is a call or invoke to a library function that
+/// allocates or reallocates memory (either malloc, calloc, realloc, or strdup
+/// like).
+bool isAllocationFn(const Value *V, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                    bool LookThroughBitCast = false);
+
+/// \brief Tests if a value is a call or invoke to a function that returns a
+/// NoAlias pointer (including malloc/calloc/realloc/strdup-like functions).
+bool isNoAliasFn(const Value *V, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                 bool LookThroughBitCast = false);
+
+/// \brief Tests if a value is a call or invoke to a library function that
+/// allocates uninitialized memory (such as malloc).
+bool isMallocLikeFn(const Value *V, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                    bool LookThroughBitCast = false);
+
+/// \brief Tests if a value is a call or invoke to a library function that
+/// allocates zero-filled memory (such as calloc).
+bool isCallocLikeFn(const Value *V, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                    bool LookThroughBitCast = false);
+
+/// \brief Tests if a value is a call or invoke to a library function that
+/// allocates memory (either malloc, calloc, or strdup like).
+bool isAllocLikeFn(const Value *V, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                   bool LookThroughBitCast = false);
+
+/// \brief Tests if a value is a call or invoke to a library function that
+/// reallocates memory (such as realloc).
+bool isReallocLikeFn(const Value *V, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                     bool LookThroughBitCast = false);
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//  malloc Call Utility Functions.
+//
+
+/// extractMallocCall - Returns the corresponding CallInst if the instruction
+/// is a malloc call.  Since CallInst::CreateMalloc() only creates calls, we
+/// ignore InvokeInst here.
+const CallInst *extractMallocCall(const Value *I, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI);
+static inline CallInst *extractMallocCall(Value *I,
+                                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI) {
+  return const_cast<CallInst*>(extractMallocCall((const Value*)I, TLI));
+}
+
+/// isArrayMalloc - Returns the corresponding CallInst if the instruction 
+/// is a call to malloc whose array size can be determined and the array size
+/// is not constant 1.  Otherwise, return NULL.
+const CallInst *isArrayMalloc(const Value *I, const DataLayout *TD,
+                              const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI);
+
+/// getMallocType - Returns the PointerType resulting from the malloc call.
+/// The PointerType depends on the number of bitcast uses of the malloc call:
+///   0: PointerType is the malloc calls' return type.
+///   1: PointerType is the bitcast's result type.
+///  >1: Unique PointerType cannot be determined, return NULL.
+PointerType *getMallocType(const CallInst *CI, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI);
+
+/// getMallocAllocatedType - Returns the Type allocated by malloc call.
+/// The Type depends on the number of bitcast uses of the malloc call:
+///   0: PointerType is the malloc calls' return type.
+///   1: PointerType is the bitcast's result type.
+///  >1: Unique PointerType cannot be determined, return NULL.
+Type *getMallocAllocatedType(const CallInst *CI, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI);
+
+/// getMallocArraySize - Returns the array size of a malloc call.  If the 
+/// argument passed to malloc is a multiple of the size of the malloced type,
+/// then return that multiple.  For non-array mallocs, the multiple is
+/// constant 1.  Otherwise, return NULL for mallocs whose array size cannot be
+/// determined.
+Value *getMallocArraySize(CallInst *CI, const DataLayout *TD,
+                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                          bool LookThroughSExt = false);
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//  calloc Call Utility Functions.
+//
+
+/// extractCallocCall - Returns the corresponding CallInst if the instruction
+/// is a calloc call.
+const CallInst *extractCallocCall(const Value *I, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI);
+static inline CallInst *extractCallocCall(Value *I,
+                                          const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI) {
+  return const_cast<CallInst*>(extractCallocCall((const Value*)I, TLI));
+}
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//  free Call Utility Functions.
+//
+
+/// isFreeCall - Returns non-null if the value is a call to the builtin free()
+const CallInst *isFreeCall(const Value *I, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI);
+  
+static inline CallInst *isFreeCall(Value *I, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI) {
+  return const_cast<CallInst*>(isFreeCall((const Value*)I, TLI));
+}
+
+  
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//  Utility functions to compute size of objects.
+//
+
+/// \brief Compute the size of the object pointed by Ptr. Returns true and the
+/// object size in Size if successful, and false otherwise. In this context, by
+/// object we mean the region of memory starting at Ptr to the end of the
+/// underlying object pointed to by Ptr.
+/// If RoundToAlign is true, then Size is rounded up to the aligment of allocas,
+/// byval arguments, and global variables.
+bool getObjectSize(const Value *Ptr, uint64_t &Size, const DataLayout *TD,
+                   const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI, bool RoundToAlign = false);
+
+
+
+typedef std::pair<APInt, APInt> SizeOffsetType;
+
+/// \brief Evaluate the size and offset of an object ponted by a Value*
+/// statically. Fails if size or offset are not known at compile time.
+class ObjectSizeOffsetVisitor
+  : public InstVisitor<ObjectSizeOffsetVisitor, SizeOffsetType> {
+
+  const DataLayout *TD;
+  const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI;
+  bool RoundToAlign;
+  unsigned IntTyBits;
+  APInt Zero;
+  SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 8> SeenInsts;
+
+  APInt align(APInt Size, uint64_t Align);
+
+  SizeOffsetType unknown() {
+    return std::make_pair(APInt(), APInt());
+  }
+
+public:
+  ObjectSizeOffsetVisitor(const DataLayout *TD, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                          LLVMContext &Context, bool RoundToAlign = false);
+
+  SizeOffsetType compute(Value *V);
+
+  bool knownSize(SizeOffsetType &SizeOffset) {
+    return SizeOffset.first.getBitWidth() > 1;
+  }
+
+  bool knownOffset(SizeOffsetType &SizeOffset) {
+    return SizeOffset.second.getBitWidth() > 1;
+  }
+
+  bool bothKnown(SizeOffsetType &SizeOffset) {
+    return knownSize(SizeOffset) && knownOffset(SizeOffset);
+  }
+
+  SizeOffsetType visitAllocaInst(AllocaInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetType visitArgument(Argument &A);
+  SizeOffsetType visitCallSite(CallSite CS);
+  SizeOffsetType visitConstantPointerNull(ConstantPointerNull&);
+  SizeOffsetType visitExtractElementInst(ExtractElementInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetType visitExtractValueInst(ExtractValueInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetType visitGEPOperator(GEPOperator &GEP);
+  SizeOffsetType visitGlobalAlias(GlobalAlias &GA);
+  SizeOffsetType visitGlobalVariable(GlobalVariable &GV);
+  SizeOffsetType visitIntToPtrInst(IntToPtrInst&);
+  SizeOffsetType visitLoadInst(LoadInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetType visitPHINode(PHINode&);
+  SizeOffsetType visitSelectInst(SelectInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetType visitUndefValue(UndefValue&);
+  SizeOffsetType visitInstruction(Instruction &I);
+};
+
+typedef std::pair<Value*, Value*> SizeOffsetEvalType;
+
+
+/// \brief Evaluate the size and offset of an object ponted by a Value*.
+/// May create code to compute the result at run-time.
+class ObjectSizeOffsetEvaluator
+  : public InstVisitor<ObjectSizeOffsetEvaluator, SizeOffsetEvalType> {
+
+  typedef IRBuilder<true, TargetFolder> BuilderTy;
+  typedef std::pair<WeakVH, WeakVH> WeakEvalType;
+  typedef DenseMap<const Value*, WeakEvalType> CacheMapTy;
+  typedef SmallPtrSet<const Value*, 8> PtrSetTy;
+
+  const DataLayout *TD;
+  const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI;
+  LLVMContext &Context;
+  BuilderTy Builder;
+  IntegerType *IntTy;
+  Value *Zero;
+  CacheMapTy CacheMap;
+  PtrSetTy SeenVals;
+
+  SizeOffsetEvalType unknown() {
+    return std::make_pair((Value*)0, (Value*)0);
+  }
+  SizeOffsetEvalType compute_(Value *V);
+
+public:
+  ObjectSizeOffsetEvaluator(const DataLayout *TD, const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI,
+                            LLVMContext &Context);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType compute(Value *V);
+
+  bool knownSize(SizeOffsetEvalType SizeOffset) {
+    return SizeOffset.first;
+  }
+
+  bool knownOffset(SizeOffsetEvalType SizeOffset) {
+    return SizeOffset.second;
+  }
+
+  bool anyKnown(SizeOffsetEvalType SizeOffset) {
+    return knownSize(SizeOffset) || knownOffset(SizeOffset);
+  }
+
+  bool bothKnown(SizeOffsetEvalType SizeOffset) {
+    return knownSize(SizeOffset) && knownOffset(SizeOffset);
+  }
+
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitAllocaInst(AllocaInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitCallSite(CallSite CS);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitExtractElementInst(ExtractElementInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitExtractValueInst(ExtractValueInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitGEPOperator(GEPOperator &GEP);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitIntToPtrInst(IntToPtrInst&);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitLoadInst(LoadInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitPHINode(PHINode &PHI);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitSelectInst(SelectInst &I);
+  SizeOffsetEvalType visitInstruction(Instruction &I);
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/MemoryDependenceAnalysis.h

@@ -0,0 +1,445 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/MemoryDependenceAnalysis.h - Memory Deps  --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the MemoryDependenceAnalysis analysis pass.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_MEMORYDEPENDENCEANALYSIS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_MEMORYDEPENDENCEANALYSIS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/OwningPtr.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/AliasAnalysis.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class Function;
+  class FunctionPass;
+  class Instruction;
+  class CallSite;
+  class AliasAnalysis;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class MemoryDependenceAnalysis;
+  class PredIteratorCache;
+  class DominatorTree;
+  class PHITransAddr;
+
+  /// MemDepResult - A memory dependence query can return one of three different
+  /// answers, described below.
+  class MemDepResult {
+    enum DepType {
+      /// Invalid - Clients of MemDep never see this.
+      Invalid = 0,
+
+      /// Clobber - This is a dependence on the specified instruction which
+      /// clobbers the desired value.  The pointer member of the MemDepResult
+      /// pair holds the instruction that clobbers the memory.  For example,
+      /// this occurs when we see a may-aliased store to the memory location we
+      /// care about.
+      ///
+      /// There are several cases that may be interesting here:
+      ///   1. Loads are clobbered by may-alias stores.
+      ///   2. Loads are considered clobbered by partially-aliased loads.  The
+      ///      client may choose to analyze deeper into these cases.
+      Clobber,
+
+      /// Def - This is a dependence on the specified instruction which
+      /// defines/produces the desired memory location.  The pointer member of
+      /// the MemDepResult pair holds the instruction that defines the memory.
+      /// Cases of interest:
+      ///   1. This could be a load or store for dependence queries on
+      ///      load/store.  The value loaded or stored is the produced value.
+      ///      Note that the pointer operand may be different than that of the
+      ///      queried pointer due to must aliases and phi translation.  Note
+      ///      that the def may not be the same type as the query, the pointers
+      ///      may just be must aliases.
+      ///   2. For loads and stores, this could be an allocation instruction. In
+      ///      this case, the load is loading an undef value or a store is the
+      ///      first store to (that part of) the allocation.
+      ///   3. Dependence queries on calls return Def only when they are
+      ///      readonly calls or memory use intrinsics with identical callees
+      ///      and no intervening clobbers.  No validation is done that the
+      ///      operands to the calls are the same.
+      Def,
+
+      /// Other - This marker indicates that the query has no known dependency
+      /// in the specified block.  More detailed state info is encoded in the
+      /// upper part of the pair (i.e. the Instruction*)
+      Other
+    };
+    /// If DepType is "Other", the upper part of the pair
+    /// (i.e. the Instruction* part) is instead used to encode more detailed
+    /// type information as follows
+    enum OtherType {
+      /// NonLocal - This marker indicates that the query has no dependency in
+      /// the specified block.  To find out more, the client should query other
+      /// predecessor blocks.
+      NonLocal = 0x4,
+      /// NonFuncLocal - This marker indicates that the query has no
+      /// dependency in the specified function.
+      NonFuncLocal = 0x8,
+      /// Unknown - This marker indicates that the query dependency
+      /// is unknown.
+      Unknown = 0xc
+    };
+
+    typedef PointerIntPair<Instruction*, 2, DepType> PairTy;
+    PairTy Value;
+    explicit MemDepResult(PairTy V) : Value(V) {}
+  public:
+    MemDepResult() : Value(0, Invalid) {}
+
+    /// get methods: These are static ctor methods for creating various
+    /// MemDepResult kinds.
+    static MemDepResult getDef(Instruction *Inst) {
+      assert(Inst && "Def requires inst");
+      return MemDepResult(PairTy(Inst, Def));
+    }
+    static MemDepResult getClobber(Instruction *Inst) {
+      assert(Inst && "Clobber requires inst");
+      return MemDepResult(PairTy(Inst, Clobber));
+    }
+    static MemDepResult getNonLocal() {
+      return MemDepResult(
+        PairTy(reinterpret_cast<Instruction*>(NonLocal), Other));
+    }
+    static MemDepResult getNonFuncLocal() {
+      return MemDepResult(
+        PairTy(reinterpret_cast<Instruction*>(NonFuncLocal), Other));
+    }
+    static MemDepResult getUnknown() {
+      return MemDepResult(
+        PairTy(reinterpret_cast<Instruction*>(Unknown), Other));
+    }
+
+    /// isClobber - Return true if this MemDepResult represents a query that is
+    /// an instruction clobber dependency.
+    bool isClobber() const { return Value.getInt() == Clobber; }
+
+    /// isDef - Return true if this MemDepResult represents a query that is
+    /// an instruction definition dependency.
+    bool isDef() const { return Value.getInt() == Def; }
+
+    /// isNonLocal - Return true if this MemDepResult represents a query that
+    /// is transparent to the start of the block, but where a non-local hasn't
+    /// been done.
+    bool isNonLocal() const {
+      return Value.getInt() == Other
+        && Value.getPointer() == reinterpret_cast<Instruction*>(NonLocal);
+    }
+
+    /// isNonFuncLocal - Return true if this MemDepResult represents a query
+    /// that is transparent to the start of the function.
+    bool isNonFuncLocal() const {
+      return Value.getInt() == Other
+        && Value.getPointer() == reinterpret_cast<Instruction*>(NonFuncLocal);
+    }
+
+    /// isUnknown - Return true if this MemDepResult represents a query which
+    /// cannot and/or will not be computed.
+    bool isUnknown() const {
+      return Value.getInt() == Other
+        && Value.getPointer() == reinterpret_cast<Instruction*>(Unknown);
+    }
+
+    /// getInst() - If this is a normal dependency, return the instruction that
+    /// is depended on.  Otherwise, return null.
+    Instruction *getInst() const {
+      if (Value.getInt() == Other) return NULL;
+      return Value.getPointer();
+    }
+
+    bool operator==(const MemDepResult &M) const { return Value == M.Value; }
+    bool operator!=(const MemDepResult &M) const { return Value != M.Value; }
+    bool operator<(const MemDepResult &M) const { return Value < M.Value; }
+    bool operator>(const MemDepResult &M) const { return Value > M.Value; }
+  private:
+    friend class MemoryDependenceAnalysis;
+    /// Dirty - Entries with this marker occur in a LocalDeps map or
+    /// NonLocalDeps map when the instruction they previously referenced was
+    /// removed from MemDep.  In either case, the entry may include an
+    /// instruction pointer.  If so, the pointer is an instruction in the
+    /// block where scanning can start from, saving some work.
+    ///
+    /// In a default-constructed MemDepResult object, the type will be Dirty
+    /// and the instruction pointer will be null.
+    ///
+
+    /// isDirty - Return true if this is a MemDepResult in its dirty/invalid.
+    /// state.
+    bool isDirty() const { return Value.getInt() == Invalid; }
+
+    static MemDepResult getDirty(Instruction *Inst) {
+      return MemDepResult(PairTy(Inst, Invalid));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// NonLocalDepEntry - This is an entry in the NonLocalDepInfo cache.  For
+  /// each BasicBlock (the BB entry) it keeps a MemDepResult.
+  class NonLocalDepEntry {
+    BasicBlock *BB;
+    MemDepResult Result;
+  public:
+    NonLocalDepEntry(BasicBlock *bb, MemDepResult result)
+      : BB(bb), Result(result) {}
+
+    // This is used for searches.
+    NonLocalDepEntry(BasicBlock *bb) : BB(bb) {}
+
+    // BB is the sort key, it can't be changed.
+    BasicBlock *getBB() const { return BB; }
+
+    void setResult(const MemDepResult &R) { Result = R; }
+
+    const MemDepResult &getResult() const { return Result; }
+
+    bool operator<(const NonLocalDepEntry &RHS) const {
+      return BB < RHS.BB;
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// NonLocalDepResult - This is a result from a NonLocal dependence query.
+  /// For each BasicBlock (the BB entry) it keeps a MemDepResult and the
+  /// (potentially phi translated) address that was live in the block.
+  class NonLocalDepResult {
+    NonLocalDepEntry Entry;
+    Value *Address;
+  public:
+    NonLocalDepResult(BasicBlock *bb, MemDepResult result, Value *address)
+      : Entry(bb, result), Address(address) {}
+
+    // BB is the sort key, it can't be changed.
+    BasicBlock *getBB() const { return Entry.getBB(); }
+
+    void setResult(const MemDepResult &R, Value *Addr) {
+      Entry.setResult(R);
+      Address = Addr;
+    }
+
+    const MemDepResult &getResult() const { return Entry.getResult(); }
+
+    /// getAddress - Return the address of this pointer in this block.  This can
+    /// be different than the address queried for the non-local result because
+    /// of phi translation.  This returns null if the address was not available
+    /// in a block (i.e. because phi translation failed) or if this is a cached
+    /// result and that address was deleted.
+    ///
+    /// The address is always null for a non-local 'call' dependence.
+    Value *getAddress() const { return Address; }
+  };
+
+  /// MemoryDependenceAnalysis - This is an analysis that determines, for a
+  /// given memory operation, what preceding memory operations it depends on.
+  /// It builds on alias analysis information, and tries to provide a lazy,
+  /// caching interface to a common kind of alias information query.
+  ///
+  /// The dependency information returned is somewhat unusual, but is pragmatic.
+  /// If queried about a store or call that might modify memory, the analysis
+  /// will return the instruction[s] that may either load from that memory or
+  /// store to it.  If queried with a load or call that can never modify memory,
+  /// the analysis will return calls and stores that might modify the pointer,
+  /// but generally does not return loads unless a) they are volatile, or
+  /// b) they load from *must-aliased* pointers.  Returning a dependence on
+  /// must-alias'd pointers instead of all pointers interacts well with the
+  /// internal caching mechanism.
+  ///
+  class MemoryDependenceAnalysis : public FunctionPass {
+    // A map from instructions to their dependency.
+    typedef DenseMap<Instruction*, MemDepResult> LocalDepMapType;
+    LocalDepMapType LocalDeps;
+
+  public:
+    typedef std::vector<NonLocalDepEntry> NonLocalDepInfo;
+  private:
+    /// ValueIsLoadPair - This is a pair<Value*, bool> where the bool is true if
+    /// the dependence is a read only dependence, false if read/write.
+    typedef PointerIntPair<const Value*, 1, bool> ValueIsLoadPair;
+
+    /// BBSkipFirstBlockPair - This pair is used when caching information for a
+    /// block.  If the pointer is null, the cache value is not a full query that
+    /// starts at the specified block.  If non-null, the bool indicates whether
+    /// or not the contents of the block was skipped.
+    typedef PointerIntPair<BasicBlock*, 1, bool> BBSkipFirstBlockPair;
+
+    /// NonLocalPointerInfo - This record is the information kept for each
+    /// (value, is load) pair.
+    struct NonLocalPointerInfo {
+      /// Pair - The pair of the block and the skip-first-block flag.
+      BBSkipFirstBlockPair Pair;
+      /// NonLocalDeps - The results of the query for each relevant block.
+      NonLocalDepInfo NonLocalDeps;
+      /// Size - The maximum size of the dereferences of the
+      /// pointer. May be UnknownSize if the sizes are unknown.
+      uint64_t Size;
+      /// TBAATag - The TBAA tag associated with dereferences of the
+      /// pointer. May be null if there are no tags or conflicting tags.
+      const MDNode *TBAATag;
+
+      NonLocalPointerInfo() : Size(AliasAnalysis::UnknownSize), TBAATag(0) {}
+    };
+
+    /// CachedNonLocalPointerInfo - This map stores the cached results of doing
+    /// a pointer lookup at the bottom of a block.  The key of this map is the
+    /// pointer+isload bit, the value is a list of <bb->result> mappings.
+    typedef DenseMap<ValueIsLoadPair,
+                     NonLocalPointerInfo> CachedNonLocalPointerInfo;
+    CachedNonLocalPointerInfo NonLocalPointerDeps;
+
+    // A map from instructions to their non-local pointer dependencies.
+    typedef DenseMap<Instruction*,
+                     SmallPtrSet<ValueIsLoadPair, 4> > ReverseNonLocalPtrDepTy;
+    ReverseNonLocalPtrDepTy ReverseNonLocalPtrDeps;
+
+
+    /// PerInstNLInfo - This is the instruction we keep for each cached access
+    /// that we have for an instruction.  The pointer is an owning pointer and
+    /// the bool indicates whether we have any dirty bits in the set.
+    typedef std::pair<NonLocalDepInfo, bool> PerInstNLInfo;
+
+    // A map from instructions to their non-local dependencies.
+    typedef DenseMap<Instruction*, PerInstNLInfo> NonLocalDepMapType;
+
+    NonLocalDepMapType NonLocalDeps;
+
+    // A reverse mapping from dependencies to the dependees.  This is
+    // used when removing instructions to keep the cache coherent.
+    typedef DenseMap<Instruction*,
+                     SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> > ReverseDepMapType;
+    ReverseDepMapType ReverseLocalDeps;
+
+    // A reverse mapping from dependencies to the non-local dependees.
+    ReverseDepMapType ReverseNonLocalDeps;
+
+    /// Current AA implementation, just a cache.
+    AliasAnalysis *AA;
+    DataLayout *TD;
+    DominatorTree *DT;
+    OwningPtr<PredIteratorCache> PredCache;
+  public:
+    MemoryDependenceAnalysis();
+    ~MemoryDependenceAnalysis();
+    static char ID;
+
+    /// Pass Implementation stuff.  This doesn't do any analysis eagerly.
+    bool runOnFunction(Function &);
+
+    /// Clean up memory in between runs
+    void releaseMemory();
+
+    /// getAnalysisUsage - Does not modify anything.  It uses Value Numbering
+    /// and Alias Analysis.
+    ///
+    virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+
+    /// getDependency - Return the instruction on which a memory operation
+    /// depends.  See the class comment for more details.  It is illegal to call
+    /// this on non-memory instructions.
+    MemDepResult getDependency(Instruction *QueryInst);
+
+    /// getNonLocalCallDependency - Perform a full dependency query for the
+    /// specified call, returning the set of blocks that the value is
+    /// potentially live across.  The returned set of results will include a
+    /// "NonLocal" result for all blocks where the value is live across.
+    ///
+    /// This method assumes the instruction returns a "NonLocal" dependency
+    /// within its own block.
+    ///
+    /// This returns a reference to an internal data structure that may be
+    /// invalidated on the next non-local query or when an instruction is
+    /// removed.  Clients must copy this data if they want it around longer than
+    /// that.
+    const NonLocalDepInfo &getNonLocalCallDependency(CallSite QueryCS);
+
+
+    /// getNonLocalPointerDependency - Perform a full dependency query for an
+    /// access to the specified (non-volatile) memory location, returning the
+    /// set of instructions that either define or clobber the value.
+    ///
+    /// This method assumes the pointer has a "NonLocal" dependency within BB.
+    void getNonLocalPointerDependency(const AliasAnalysis::Location &Loc,
+                                      bool isLoad, BasicBlock *BB,
+                                    SmallVectorImpl<NonLocalDepResult> &Result);
+
+    /// removeInstruction - Remove an instruction from the dependence analysis,
+    /// updating the dependence of instructions that previously depended on it.
+    void removeInstruction(Instruction *InstToRemove);
+
+    /// invalidateCachedPointerInfo - This method is used to invalidate cached
+    /// information about the specified pointer, because it may be too
+    /// conservative in memdep.  This is an optional call that can be used when
+    /// the client detects an equivalence between the pointer and some other
+    /// value and replaces the other value with ptr. This can make Ptr available
+    /// in more places that cached info does not necessarily keep.
+    void invalidateCachedPointerInfo(Value *Ptr);
+
+    /// invalidateCachedPredecessors - Clear the PredIteratorCache info.
+    /// This needs to be done when the CFG changes, e.g., due to splitting
+    /// critical edges.
+    void invalidateCachedPredecessors();
+
+    /// getPointerDependencyFrom - Return the instruction on which a memory
+    /// location depends.  If isLoad is true, this routine ignores may-aliases
+    /// with read-only operations.  If isLoad is false, this routine ignores
+    /// may-aliases with reads from read-only locations. If possible, pass
+    /// the query instruction as well; this function may take advantage of 
+    /// the metadata annotated to the query instruction to refine the result.
+    ///
+    /// Note that this is an uncached query, and thus may be inefficient.
+    ///
+    MemDepResult getPointerDependencyFrom(const AliasAnalysis::Location &Loc,
+                                          bool isLoad,
+                                          BasicBlock::iterator ScanIt,
+                                          BasicBlock *BB,
+                                          Instruction *QueryInst = 0);
+
+
+    /// getLoadLoadClobberFullWidthSize - This is a little bit of analysis that
+    /// looks at a memory location for a load (specified by MemLocBase, Offs,
+    /// and Size) and compares it against a load.  If the specified load could
+    /// be safely widened to a larger integer load that is 1) still efficient,
+    /// 2) safe for the target, and 3) would provide the specified memory
+    /// location value, then this function returns the size in bytes of the
+    /// load width to use.  If not, this returns zero.
+    static unsigned getLoadLoadClobberFullWidthSize(const Value *MemLocBase,
+                                                    int64_t MemLocOffs,
+                                                    unsigned MemLocSize,
+                                                    const LoadInst *LI,
+                                                    const DataLayout &TD);
+
+  private:
+    MemDepResult getCallSiteDependencyFrom(CallSite C, bool isReadOnlyCall,
+                                           BasicBlock::iterator ScanIt,
+                                           BasicBlock *BB);
+    bool getNonLocalPointerDepFromBB(const PHITransAddr &Pointer,
+                                     const AliasAnalysis::Location &Loc,
+                                     bool isLoad, BasicBlock *BB,
+                                     SmallVectorImpl<NonLocalDepResult> &Result,
+                                     DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Value*> &Visited,
+                                     bool SkipFirstBlock = false);
+    MemDepResult GetNonLocalInfoForBlock(const AliasAnalysis::Location &Loc,
+                                         bool isLoad, BasicBlock *BB,
+                                         NonLocalDepInfo *Cache,
+                                         unsigned NumSortedEntries);
+
+    void RemoveCachedNonLocalPointerDependencies(ValueIsLoadPair P);
+
+    /// verifyRemoved - Verify that the specified instruction does not occur
+    /// in our internal data structures.
+    void verifyRemoved(Instruction *Inst) const;
+
+  };
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/PHITransAddr.h

@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+//===- PHITransAddr.h - PHI Translation for Addresses -----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares the PHITransAddr class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PHITRANSADDR_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PHITRANSADDR_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class DominatorTree;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class TargetLibraryInfo;
+
+/// PHITransAddr - An address value which tracks and handles phi translation.
+/// As we walk "up" the CFG through predecessors, we need to ensure that the
+/// address we're tracking is kept up to date.  For example, if we're analyzing
+/// an address of "&A[i]" and walk through the definition of 'i' which is a PHI
+/// node, we *must* phi translate i to get "&A[j]" or else we will analyze an
+/// incorrect pointer in the predecessor block.
+///
+/// This is designed to be a relatively small object that lives on the stack and
+/// is copyable.
+///
+class PHITransAddr {
+  /// Addr - The actual address we're analyzing.
+  Value *Addr;
+  
+  /// TD - The target data we are playing with if known, otherwise null.
+  const DataLayout *TD;
+
+  /// TLI - The target library info if known, otherwise null.
+  const TargetLibraryInfo *TLI;
+  
+  /// InstInputs - The inputs for our symbolic address.
+  SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> InstInputs;
+public:
+  PHITransAddr(Value *addr, const DataLayout *td) : Addr(addr), TD(td), TLI(0) {
+    // If the address is an instruction, the whole thing is considered an input.
+    if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr))
+      InstInputs.push_back(I);
+  }
+  
+  Value *getAddr() const { return Addr; }
+  
+  /// NeedsPHITranslationFromBlock - Return true if moving from the specified
+  /// BasicBlock to its predecessors requires PHI translation.
+  bool NeedsPHITranslationFromBlock(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    // We do need translation if one of our input instructions is defined in
+    // this block.
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = InstInputs.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      if (InstInputs[i]->getParent() == BB)
+        return true;
+    return false;
+  }
+  
+  /// IsPotentiallyPHITranslatable - If this needs PHI translation, return true
+  /// if we have some hope of doing it.  This should be used as a filter to
+  /// avoid calling PHITranslateValue in hopeless situations.
+  bool IsPotentiallyPHITranslatable() const;
+  
+  /// PHITranslateValue - PHI translate the current address up the CFG from
+  /// CurBB to Pred, updating our state to reflect any needed changes.  If the
+  /// dominator tree DT is non-null, the translated value must dominate
+  /// PredBB.  This returns true on failure and sets Addr to null.
+  bool PHITranslateValue(BasicBlock *CurBB, BasicBlock *PredBB,
+                         const DominatorTree *DT);
+  
+  /// PHITranslateWithInsertion - PHI translate this value into the specified
+  /// predecessor block, inserting a computation of the value if it is
+  /// unavailable.
+  ///
+  /// All newly created instructions are added to the NewInsts list.  This
+  /// returns null on failure.
+  ///
+  Value *PHITranslateWithInsertion(BasicBlock *CurBB, BasicBlock *PredBB,
+                                   const DominatorTree &DT,
+                                   SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &NewInsts);
+  
+  void dump() const;
+  
+  /// Verify - Check internal consistency of this data structure.  If the
+  /// structure is valid, it returns true.  If invalid, it prints errors and
+  /// returns false.
+  bool Verify() const;
+private:
+  Value *PHITranslateSubExpr(Value *V, BasicBlock *CurBB, BasicBlock *PredBB,
+                             const DominatorTree *DT);
+  
+  /// InsertPHITranslatedSubExpr - Insert a computation of the PHI translated
+  /// version of 'V' for the edge PredBB->CurBB into the end of the PredBB
+  /// block.  All newly created instructions are added to the NewInsts list.
+  /// This returns null on failure.
+  ///
+  Value *InsertPHITranslatedSubExpr(Value *InVal, BasicBlock *CurBB,
+                                    BasicBlock *PredBB, const DominatorTree &DT,
+                                    SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &NewInsts);
+  
+  /// AddAsInput - If the specified value is an instruction, add it as an input.
+  Value *AddAsInput(Value *V) {
+    // If V is an instruction, it is now an input.
+    if (Instruction *VI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
+      InstInputs.push_back(VI);
+    return V;
+  }
+  
+};
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Passes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+//===-- llvm/Analysis/Passes.h - Constructors for analyses ------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This header file defines prototypes for accessor functions that expose passes
+// in the analysis libraries.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PASSES_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PASSES_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class FunctionPass;
+  class ImmutablePass;
+  class LoopPass;
+  class ModulePass;
+  class Pass;
+  class PassInfo;
+  class LibCallInfo;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createGlobalsModRefPass - This pass provides alias and mod/ref info for
+  // global values that do not have their addresses taken.
+  //
+  Pass *createGlobalsModRefPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createAliasDebugger - This pass helps debug clients of AA
+  //
+  Pass *createAliasDebugger();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createAliasAnalysisCounterPass - This pass counts alias queries and how the
+  // alias analysis implementation responds.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createAliasAnalysisCounterPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createAAEvalPass - This pass implements a simple N^2 alias analysis
+  // accuracy evaluator.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createAAEvalPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createNoAAPass - This pass implements a "I don't know" alias analysis.
+  //
+  ImmutablePass *createNoAAPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createBasicAliasAnalysisPass - This pass implements the stateless alias
+  // analysis.
+  //
+  ImmutablePass *createBasicAliasAnalysisPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  /// createLibCallAliasAnalysisPass - Create an alias analysis pass that knows
+  /// about the semantics of a set of libcalls specified by LCI.  The newly
+  /// constructed pass takes ownership of the pointer that is provided.
+  ///
+  FunctionPass *createLibCallAliasAnalysisPass(LibCallInfo *LCI);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createScalarEvolutionAliasAnalysisPass - This pass implements a simple
+  // alias analysis using ScalarEvolution queries.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createScalarEvolutionAliasAnalysisPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createTypeBasedAliasAnalysisPass - This pass implements metadata-based
+  // type-based alias analysis.
+  //
+  ImmutablePass *createTypeBasedAliasAnalysisPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createObjCARCAliasAnalysisPass - This pass implements ObjC-ARC-based
+  // alias analysis.
+  //
+  ImmutablePass *createObjCARCAliasAnalysisPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createProfileLoaderPass - This pass loads information from a profile dump
+  // file.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createProfileLoaderPass();
+  extern char &ProfileLoaderPassID;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createProfileMetadataLoaderPass - This pass loads information from a
+  // profile dump file and sets branch weight metadata.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createProfileMetadataLoaderPass();
+  extern char &ProfileMetadataLoaderPassID;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createNoProfileInfoPass - This pass implements the default "no profile".
+  //
+  ImmutablePass *createNoProfileInfoPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createProfileEstimatorPass - This pass estimates profiling information
+  // instead of loading it from a previous run.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createProfileEstimatorPass();
+  extern char &ProfileEstimatorPassID;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createProfileVerifierPass - This pass verifies profiling information.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createProfileVerifierPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createPathProfileLoaderPass - This pass loads information from a path
+  // profile dump file.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createPathProfileLoaderPass();
+  extern char &PathProfileLoaderPassID;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createNoPathProfileInfoPass - This pass implements the default
+  // "no path profile".
+  //
+  ImmutablePass *createNoPathProfileInfoPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createPathProfileVerifierPass - This pass verifies path profiling
+  // information.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createPathProfileVerifierPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createDSAAPass - This pass implements simple context sensitive alias
+  // analysis.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createDSAAPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createDSOptPass - This pass uses DSA to do a series of simple
+  // optimizations.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createDSOptPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createSteensgaardPass - This pass uses the data structure graphs to do a
+  // simple context insensitive alias analysis.
+  //
+  ModulePass *createSteensgaardPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  /// createLazyValueInfoPass - This creates an instance of the LazyValueInfo
+  /// pass.
+  FunctionPass *createLazyValueInfoPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createDependenceAnalysisPass - This creates an instance of the
+  // DependenceAnalysis pass.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createDependenceAnalysisPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createCostModelAnalysisPass - This creates an instance of the
+  // CostModelAnalysis pass.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createCostModelAnalysisPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // Minor pass prototypes, allowing us to expose them through bugpoint and
+  // analyze.
+  FunctionPass *createInstCountPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createRegionInfoPass - This pass finds all single entry single exit regions
+  // in a function and builds the region hierarchy.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createRegionInfoPass();
+
+  // Print module-level debug info metadata in human-readable form.
+  ModulePass *createModuleDebugInfoPrinterPass();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  //
+  // createMemDepPrinter - This pass exhaustively collects all memdep
+  // information and prints it with -analyze.
+  //
+  FunctionPass *createMemDepPrinter();
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/PathNumbering.h

@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+//===- PathNumbering.h ----------------------------------------*- C++ -*---===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// Ball-Larus path numbers uniquely identify paths through a directed acyclic
+// graph (DAG) [Ball96].  For a CFG backedges are removed and replaced by phony
+// edges to obtain a DAG, and thus the unique path numbers [Ball96].
+//
+// The purpose of this analysis is to enumerate the edges in a CFG in order
+// to obtain paths from path numbers in a convenient manner.  As described in
+// [Ball96] edges can be enumerated such that given a path number by following
+// the CFG and updating the path number, the path is obtained.
+//
+// [Ball96]
+//  T. Ball and J. R. Larus. "Efficient Path Profiling."
+//  International Symposium on Microarchitecture, pages 46-57, 1996.
+//  http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=243857
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PATHNUMBERING_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PATHNUMBERING_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileInfoTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CFG.h"
+#include <map>
+#include <stack>
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+class BallLarusNode;
+class BallLarusEdge;
+class BallLarusDag;
+
+// typedefs for storage/ interators of various DAG components
+typedef std::vector<BallLarusNode*> BLNodeVector;
+typedef std::vector<BallLarusNode*>::iterator BLNodeIterator;
+typedef std::vector<BallLarusEdge*> BLEdgeVector;
+typedef std::vector<BallLarusEdge*>::iterator BLEdgeIterator;
+typedef std::map<BasicBlock*, BallLarusNode*> BLBlockNodeMap;
+typedef std::stack<BallLarusNode*> BLNodeStack;
+
+// Represents a basic block with information necessary for the BallLarus
+// algorithms.
+class BallLarusNode {
+public:
+  enum NodeColor { WHITE, GRAY, BLACK };
+
+  // Constructor: Initializes a new Node for the given BasicBlock
+  BallLarusNode(BasicBlock* BB) :
+    _basicBlock(BB), _numberPaths(0), _color(WHITE) {
+    static unsigned nextUID = 0;
+    _uid = nextUID++;
+  }
+
+  // Returns the basic block for the BallLarusNode
+  BasicBlock* getBlock();
+
+  // Get/set the number of paths to the exit starting at the node.
+  unsigned getNumberPaths();
+  void setNumberPaths(unsigned numberPaths);
+
+  // Get/set the NodeColor used in graph algorithms.
+  NodeColor getColor();
+  void setColor(NodeColor color);
+
+  // Iterator information for predecessor edges. Includes phony and
+  // backedges.
+  BLEdgeIterator predBegin();
+  BLEdgeIterator predEnd();
+  unsigned getNumberPredEdges();
+
+  // Iterator information for successor edges. Includes phony and
+  // backedges.
+  BLEdgeIterator succBegin();
+  BLEdgeIterator succEnd();
+  unsigned getNumberSuccEdges();
+
+  // Add an edge to the predecessor list.
+  void addPredEdge(BallLarusEdge* edge);
+
+  // Remove an edge from the predecessor list.
+  void removePredEdge(BallLarusEdge* edge);
+
+  // Add an edge to the successor list.
+  void addSuccEdge(BallLarusEdge* edge);
+
+  // Remove an edge from the successor list.
+  void removeSuccEdge(BallLarusEdge* edge);
+
+  // Returns the name of the BasicBlock being represented.  If BasicBlock
+  // is null then returns "<null>".  If BasicBlock has no name, then
+  // "<unnamed>" is returned.  Intended for use with debug output.
+  std::string getName();
+
+private:
+  // The corresponding underlying BB.
+  BasicBlock* _basicBlock;
+
+  // Holds the predecessor edges of this node.
+  BLEdgeVector _predEdges;
+
+  // Holds the successor edges of this node.
+  BLEdgeVector _succEdges;
+
+  // The number of paths from the node to the exit.
+  unsigned _numberPaths;
+
+  // 'Color' used by graph algorithms to mark the node.
+  NodeColor _color;
+
+  // Unique ID to ensure naming difference with dotgraphs
+  unsigned _uid;
+
+  // Removes an edge from an edgeVector.  Used by removePredEdge and
+  // removeSuccEdge.
+  void removeEdge(BLEdgeVector& v, BallLarusEdge* e);
+};
+
+// Represents an edge in the Dag.  For an edge, v -> w, v is the source, and
+// w is the target.
+class BallLarusEdge {
+public:
+  enum EdgeType { NORMAL, BACKEDGE, SPLITEDGE,
+    BACKEDGE_PHONY, SPLITEDGE_PHONY, CALLEDGE_PHONY };
+
+  // Constructor: Initializes an BallLarusEdge with a source and target.
+  BallLarusEdge(BallLarusNode* source, BallLarusNode* target,
+                                unsigned duplicateNumber)
+    : _source(source), _target(target), _weight(0), _edgeType(NORMAL),
+      _realEdge(NULL), _duplicateNumber(duplicateNumber) {}
+
+  // Returns the source/ target node of this edge.
+  BallLarusNode* getSource() const;
+  BallLarusNode* getTarget() const;
+
+  // Sets the type of the edge.
+  EdgeType getType() const;
+
+  // Gets the type of the edge.
+  void setType(EdgeType type);
+
+  // Returns the weight of this edge.  Used to decode path numbers to
+  // sequences of basic blocks.
+  unsigned getWeight();
+
+  // Sets the weight of the edge.  Used during path numbering.
+  void setWeight(unsigned weight);
+
+  // Gets/sets the phony edge originating at the root.
+  BallLarusEdge* getPhonyRoot();
+  void setPhonyRoot(BallLarusEdge* phonyRoot);
+
+  // Gets/sets the phony edge terminating at the exit.
+  BallLarusEdge* getPhonyExit();
+  void setPhonyExit(BallLarusEdge* phonyExit);
+
+  // Gets/sets the associated real edge if this is a phony edge.
+  BallLarusEdge* getRealEdge();
+  void setRealEdge(BallLarusEdge* realEdge);
+
+  // Returns the duplicate number of the edge.
+  unsigned getDuplicateNumber();
+
+protected:
+  // Source node for this edge.
+  BallLarusNode* _source;
+
+  // Target node for this edge.
+  BallLarusNode* _target;
+
+private:
+  // Edge weight cooresponding to path number increments before removing
+  // increments along a spanning tree. The sum over the edge weights gives
+  // the path number.
+  unsigned _weight;
+
+  // Type to represent for what this edge is intended
+  EdgeType _edgeType;
+
+  // For backedges and split-edges, the phony edge which is linked to the
+  // root node of the DAG. This contains a path number initialization.
+  BallLarusEdge* _phonyRoot;
+
+  // For backedges and split-edges, the phony edge which is linked to the
+  // exit node of the DAG. This contains a path counter increment, and
+  // potentially a path number increment.
+  BallLarusEdge* _phonyExit;
+
+  // If this is a phony edge, _realEdge is a link to the back or split
+  // edge. Otherwise, this is null.
+  BallLarusEdge* _realEdge;
+
+  // An ID to differentiate between those edges which have the same source
+  // and destination blocks.
+  unsigned _duplicateNumber;
+};
+
+// Represents the Ball Larus DAG for a given Function.  Can calculate
+// various properties required for instrumentation or analysis.  E.g. the
+// edge weights that determine the path number.
+class BallLarusDag {
+public:
+  // Initializes a BallLarusDag from the CFG of a given function.  Must
+  // call init() after creation, since some initialization requires
+  // virtual functions.
+  BallLarusDag(Function &F)
+    : _root(NULL), _exit(NULL), _function(F) {}
+
+  // Initialization that requires virtual functions which are not fully
+  // functional in the constructor.
+  void init();
+
+  // Frees all memory associated with the DAG.
+  virtual ~BallLarusDag();
+
+  // Calculate the path numbers by assigning edge increments as prescribed
+  // in Ball-Larus path profiling.
+  void calculatePathNumbers();
+
+  // Returns the number of paths for the DAG.
+  unsigned getNumberOfPaths();
+
+  // Returns the root (i.e. entry) node for the DAG.
+  BallLarusNode* getRoot();
+
+  // Returns the exit node for the DAG.
+  BallLarusNode* getExit();
+
+  // Returns the function for the DAG.
+  Function& getFunction();
+
+  // Clears the node colors.
+  void clearColors(BallLarusNode::NodeColor color);
+
+protected:
+  // All nodes in the DAG.
+  BLNodeVector _nodes;
+
+  // All edges in the DAG.
+  BLEdgeVector _edges;
+
+  // All backedges in the DAG.
+  BLEdgeVector _backEdges;
+
+  // Allows subclasses to determine which type of Node is created.
+  // Override this method to produce subclasses of BallLarusNode if
+  // necessary. The destructor of BallLarusDag will call free on each pointer
+  // created.
+  virtual BallLarusNode* createNode(BasicBlock* BB);
+
+  // Allows subclasses to determine which type of Edge is created.
+  // Override this method to produce subclasses of BallLarusEdge if
+  // necessary.  Parameters source and target will have been created by
+  // createNode and can be cast to the subclass of BallLarusNode*
+  // returned by createNode. The destructor of BallLarusDag will call free
+  // on each pointer created.
+  virtual BallLarusEdge* createEdge(BallLarusNode* source, BallLarusNode*
+                                    target, unsigned duplicateNumber);
+
+  // Proxy to node's constructor.  Updates the DAG state.
+  BallLarusNode* addNode(BasicBlock* BB);
+
+  // Proxy to edge's constructor.  Updates the DAG state.
+  BallLarusEdge* addEdge(BallLarusNode* source, BallLarusNode* target,
+                         unsigned duplicateNumber);
+
+private:
+  // The root (i.e. entry) node for this DAG.
+  BallLarusNode* _root;
+
+  // The exit node for this DAG.
+  BallLarusNode* _exit;
+
+  // The function represented by this DAG.
+  Function& _function;
+
+  // Processes one node and its imediate edges for building the DAG.
+  void buildNode(BLBlockNodeMap& inDag, std::stack<BallLarusNode*>& dfsStack);
+
+  // Process an edge in the CFG for DAG building.
+  void buildEdge(BLBlockNodeMap& inDag, std::stack<BallLarusNode*>& dfsStack,
+                 BallLarusNode* currentNode, BasicBlock* succBB,
+                 unsigned duplicateNumber);
+
+  // The weight on each edge is the increment required along any path that
+  // contains that edge.
+  void calculatePathNumbersFrom(BallLarusNode* node);
+
+  // Adds a backedge with its phony edges.  Updates the DAG state.
+  void addBackedge(BallLarusNode* source, BallLarusNode* target,
+                   unsigned duplicateCount);
+};
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/PathProfileInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+//===- PathProfileInfo.h --------------------------------------*- C++ -*---===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file outlines the interface used by optimizers to load path profiles.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PATHPROFILEINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PATHPROFILEINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/PathNumbering.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class ProfilePath;
+class ProfilePathEdge;
+class PathProfileInfo;
+
+typedef std::vector<ProfilePathEdge> ProfilePathEdgeVector;
+typedef std::vector<ProfilePathEdge>::iterator ProfilePathEdgeIterator;
+
+typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*> ProfilePathBlockVector;
+typedef std::vector<BasicBlock*>::iterator ProfilePathBlockIterator;
+
+typedef std::map<unsigned int,ProfilePath*> ProfilePathMap;
+typedef std::map<unsigned int,ProfilePath*>::iterator ProfilePathIterator;
+
+typedef std::map<Function*,unsigned int> FunctionPathCountMap;
+typedef std::map<Function*,ProfilePathMap> FunctionPathMap;
+typedef std::map<Function*,ProfilePathMap>::iterator FunctionPathIterator;
+
+class ProfilePathEdge {
+public:
+  ProfilePathEdge(BasicBlock* source, BasicBlock* target,
+                  unsigned duplicateNumber);
+
+  inline unsigned getDuplicateNumber() { return _duplicateNumber; }
+  inline BasicBlock* getSource() { return _source; }
+  inline BasicBlock* getTarget() { return _target; }
+
+protected:
+  BasicBlock* _source;
+  BasicBlock* _target;
+  unsigned _duplicateNumber;
+};
+
+class ProfilePath {
+public:
+  ProfilePath(unsigned int number, unsigned int count,
+              double countStdDev, PathProfileInfo* ppi);
+
+  double getFrequency() const;
+
+  inline unsigned int getNumber() const { return _number; }
+  inline unsigned int getCount() const { return _count; }
+  inline double getCountStdDev() const { return _countStdDev; }
+
+  ProfilePathEdgeVector* getPathEdges() const;
+  ProfilePathBlockVector* getPathBlocks() const;
+
+  BasicBlock* getFirstBlockInPath() const;
+
+private:
+  unsigned int _number;
+  unsigned int _count;
+  double _countStdDev;
+
+  // double pointer back to the profiling info
+  PathProfileInfo* _ppi;
+};
+
+// TODO: overload [] operator for getting path
+// Add: getFunctionCallCount()
+class PathProfileInfo {
+  public:
+  PathProfileInfo();
+  ~PathProfileInfo();
+
+  void setCurrentFunction(Function* F);
+  Function* getCurrentFunction() const;
+  BasicBlock* getCurrentFunctionEntry();
+
+  ProfilePath* getPath(unsigned int number);
+  unsigned int getPotentialPathCount();
+
+  ProfilePathIterator pathBegin();
+  ProfilePathIterator pathEnd();
+  unsigned int pathsRun();
+
+  static char ID; // Pass identification
+  std::string argList;
+
+protected:
+  FunctionPathMap _functionPaths;
+  FunctionPathCountMap _functionPathCounts;
+
+private:
+  BallLarusDag* _currentDag;
+  Function* _currentFunction;
+
+  friend class ProfilePath;
+};
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/PostDominators.h

@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+//=- llvm/Analysis/PostDominators.h - Post Dominator Calculation-*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file exposes interfaces to post dominance information.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_POSTDOMINATORS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_POSTDOMINATORS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/Dominators.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+/// PostDominatorTree Class - Concrete subclass of DominatorTree that is used to
+/// compute the a post-dominator tree.
+///
+struct PostDominatorTree : public FunctionPass {
+  static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
+  DominatorTreeBase<BasicBlock>* DT;
+
+  PostDominatorTree() : FunctionPass(ID) {
+    initializePostDominatorTreePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
+    DT = new DominatorTreeBase<BasicBlock>(true);
+  }
+
+  ~PostDominatorTree();
+
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {
+    AU.setPreservesAll();
+  }
+
+  inline const std::vector<BasicBlock*> &getRoots() const {
+    return DT->getRoots();
+  }
+
+  inline DomTreeNode *getRootNode() const {
+    return DT->getRootNode();
+  }
+
+  inline DomTreeNode *operator[](BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return DT->getNode(BB);
+  }
+
+  inline DomTreeNode *getNode(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return DT->getNode(BB);
+  }
+
+  inline bool dominates(DomTreeNode* A, DomTreeNode* B) const {
+    return DT->dominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline bool dominates(const BasicBlock* A, const BasicBlock* B) const {
+    return DT->dominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline bool properlyDominates(const DomTreeNode* A, DomTreeNode* B) const {
+    return DT->properlyDominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline bool properlyDominates(BasicBlock* A, BasicBlock* B) const {
+    return DT->properlyDominates(A, B);
+  }
+
+  inline BasicBlock *findNearestCommonDominator(BasicBlock *A, BasicBlock *B) {
+    return DT->findNearestCommonDominator(A, B);
+  }
+
+  virtual void releaseMemory() {
+    DT->releaseMemory();
+  }
+
+  virtual void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module*) const;
+};
+
+FunctionPass* createPostDomTree();
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<PostDominatorTree*>
+  : public GraphTraits<DomTreeNode*> {
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(PostDominatorTree *DT) {
+    return DT->getRootNode();
+  }
+
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(PostDominatorTree *N) {
+    if (getEntryNode(N))
+      return df_begin(getEntryNode(N));
+    else
+      return df_end(getEntryNode(N));
+  }
+
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end(PostDominatorTree *N) {
+    return df_end(getEntryNode(N));
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ProfileDataLoader.h

@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+//===- ProfileDataLoader.h - Load & convert profile info ----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                      The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// The ProfileDataLoader class is used to load profiling data from a dump file.
+// The ProfileDataT<FType, BType> class is used to store the mapping of this
+// data to control flow edges.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEDATALOADER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEDATALOADER_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
+#include <string>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class ModulePass;
+class Function;
+class BasicBlock;
+
+// Helper for dumping edges to dbgs().
+raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, std::pair<const BasicBlock *,
+                                                  const BasicBlock *> E);
+
+/// \brief The ProfileDataT<FType, BType> class is used to store the mapping of
+/// profiling data to control flow edges.
+///
+/// An edge is defined by its source and sink basic blocks.
+template<class FType, class BType>
+class ProfileDataT {
+public:
+  // The profiling information defines an Edge by its source and sink basic
+  // blocks.
+  typedef std::pair<const BType*, const BType*> Edge;
+
+private:
+  typedef DenseMap<Edge, unsigned> EdgeWeights;
+
+  /// \brief Count the number of times a transition between two blocks is
+  /// executed.
+  ///
+  /// As a special case, we also hold an edge from the null BasicBlock to the
+  /// entry block to indicate how many times the function was entered.
+  DenseMap<const FType*, EdgeWeights> EdgeInformation;
+
+public:
+  /// getFunction() - Returns the Function for an Edge.
+  static const FType *getFunction(Edge e) {
+    // e.first may be NULL
+    assert(((!e.first) || (e.first->getParent() == e.second->getParent()))
+           && "A ProfileData::Edge can not be between two functions");
+    assert(e.second && "A ProfileData::Edge must have a real sink");
+    return e.second->getParent();
+  }
+
+  /// getEdge() - Creates an Edge between two BasicBlocks.
+  static Edge getEdge(const BType *Src, const BType *Dest) {
+    return Edge(Src, Dest);
+  }
+
+  /// getEdgeWeight - Return the number of times that a given edge was
+  /// executed.
+  unsigned getEdgeWeight(Edge e) const {
+    const FType *f = getFunction(e);
+    assert((EdgeInformation.find(f) != EdgeInformation.end())
+           && "No profiling information for function");
+    EdgeWeights weights = EdgeInformation.find(f)->second;
+
+    assert((weights.find(e) != weights.end())
+           && "No profiling information for edge");
+    return weights.find(e)->second;
+  }
+
+  /// addEdgeWeight - Add 'weight' to the already stored execution count for
+  /// this edge.
+  void addEdgeWeight(Edge e, unsigned weight) {
+    EdgeInformation[getFunction(e)][e] += weight;
+  }
+};
+
+typedef ProfileDataT<Function, BasicBlock> ProfileData;
+//typedef ProfileDataT<MachineFunction, MachineBasicBlock> MachineProfileData;
+
+/// The ProfileDataLoader class is used to load raw profiling data from the
+/// dump file.
+class ProfileDataLoader {
+private:
+  /// The name of the file where the raw profiling data is stored.
+  const std::string &Filename;
+
+  /// A vector of the command line arguments used when the target program was
+  /// run to generate profiling data.  One entry per program run.
+  SmallVector<std::string, 1> CommandLines;
+
+  /// The raw values for how many times each edge was traversed, values from
+  /// multiple program runs are accumulated.
+  SmallVector<unsigned, 32> EdgeCounts;
+
+public:
+  /// ProfileDataLoader ctor - Read the specified profiling data file, exiting
+  /// the program if the file is invalid or broken.
+  ProfileDataLoader(const char *ToolName, const std::string &Filename);
+
+  /// A special value used to represent the weight of an edge which has not
+  /// been counted yet.
+  static const unsigned Uncounted;
+
+  /// getNumExecutions - Return the number of times the target program was run
+  /// to generate this profiling data.
+  unsigned getNumExecutions() const { return CommandLines.size(); }
+
+  /// getExecution - Return the command line parameters used to generate the
+  /// i'th set of profiling data.
+  const std::string &getExecution(unsigned i) const { return CommandLines[i]; }
+
+  const std::string &getFileName() const { return Filename; }
+
+  /// getRawEdgeCounts - Return the raw profiling data, this is just a list of
+  /// numbers with no mappings to edges.
+  ArrayRef<unsigned> getRawEdgeCounts() const { return EdgeCounts; }
+};
+
+/// createProfileMetadataLoaderPass - This function returns a Pass that loads
+/// the profiling information for the module from the specified filename.
+ModulePass *createProfileMetadataLoaderPass(const std::string &Filename);
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ProfileDataTypes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+/*===-- ProfileDataTypes.h - Profiling info shared constants --------------===*\
+|*
+|*                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+|*
+|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+|*
+|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
+|*
+|* This file defines constants shared by the various different profiling
+|* runtime libraries and the LLVM C++ profile metadata loader. It must be a
+|* C header because, at present, the profiling runtimes are written in C.
+|*
+\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEDATATYPES_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEDATATYPES_H
+
+/* Included by libprofile. */
+#if defined(__cplusplus)
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/* TODO: Strip out unused entries once ProfileInfo etc has been removed. */
+enum ProfilingType {
+  ArgumentInfo  = 1,   /* The command line argument block */
+  FunctionInfo  = 2,   /* Function profiling information  */
+  BlockInfo     = 3,   /* Block profiling information     */
+  EdgeInfo      = 4,   /* Edge profiling information      */
+  PathInfo      = 5,   /* Path profiling information      */
+  BBTraceInfo   = 6,   /* Basic block trace information   */
+  OptEdgeInfo   = 7    /* Edge profiling information, optimal version */
+};
+
+#if defined(__cplusplus)
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEDATATYPES_H */

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ProfileInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/ProfileInfo.h - Profile Info Interface -----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the generic ProfileInfo interface, which is used as the
+// common interface used by all clients of profiling information, and
+// implemented either by making static guestimations, or by actually reading in
+// profiling information gathered by running the program.
+//
+// Note that to be useful, all profile-based optimizations should preserve
+// ProfileInfo, which requires that they notify it when changes to the CFG are
+// made. (This is not implemented yet.)
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Format.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
+#include <cassert>
+#include <map>
+#include <set>
+#include <string>
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class Pass;
+  class raw_ostream;
+
+  class BasicBlock;
+  class Function;
+  class MachineBasicBlock;
+  class MachineFunction;
+
+  // Helper for dumping edges to dbgs().
+  raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, std::pair<const BasicBlock *, const BasicBlock *> E);
+  raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, std::pair<const MachineBasicBlock *, const MachineBasicBlock *> E);
+
+  raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, const BasicBlock *BB);
+  raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, const MachineBasicBlock *MBB);
+
+  raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, const Function *F);
+  raw_ostream& operator<<(raw_ostream &O, const MachineFunction *MF);
+
+  /// ProfileInfo Class - This class holds and maintains profiling
+  /// information for some unit of code.
+  template<class FType, class BType>
+  class ProfileInfoT {
+  public:
+    // Types for handling profiling information.
+    typedef std::pair<const BType*, const BType*> Edge;
+    typedef std::pair<Edge, double> EdgeWeight;
+    typedef std::map<Edge, double> EdgeWeights;
+    typedef std::map<const BType*, double> BlockCounts;
+    typedef std::map<const BType*, const BType*> Path;
+
+  protected:
+    // EdgeInformation - Count the number of times a transition between two
+    // blocks is executed. As a special case, we also hold an edge from the
+    // null BasicBlock to the entry block to indicate how many times the
+    // function was entered.
+    std::map<const FType*, EdgeWeights> EdgeInformation;
+
+    // BlockInformation - Count the number of times a block is executed.
+    std::map<const FType*, BlockCounts> BlockInformation;
+
+    // FunctionInformation - Count the number of times a function is executed.
+    std::map<const FType*, double> FunctionInformation;
+
+    ProfileInfoT<MachineFunction, MachineBasicBlock> *MachineProfile;
+  public:
+    static char ID; // Class identification, replacement for typeinfo
+    ProfileInfoT();
+    ~ProfileInfoT();  // We want to be subclassed
+
+    // MissingValue - The value that is returned for execution counts in case
+    // no value is available.
+    static const double MissingValue;
+
+    // getFunction() - Returns the Function for an Edge, checking for validity.
+    static const FType* getFunction(Edge e) {
+      if (e.first)
+        return e.first->getParent();
+      if (e.second)
+        return e.second->getParent();
+      llvm_unreachable("Invalid ProfileInfo::Edge");
+    }
+
+    // getEdge() - Creates an Edge from two BasicBlocks.
+    static Edge getEdge(const BType *Src, const BType *Dest) {
+      return std::make_pair(Src, Dest);
+    }
+
+    //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+    /// Profile Information Queries
+    ///
+    double getExecutionCount(const FType *F);
+
+    double getExecutionCount(const BType *BB);
+
+    void setExecutionCount(const BType *BB, double w);
+
+    void addExecutionCount(const BType *BB, double w);
+
+    double getEdgeWeight(Edge e) const {
+      typename std::map<const FType*, EdgeWeights>::const_iterator J =
+        EdgeInformation.find(getFunction(e));
+      if (J == EdgeInformation.end()) return MissingValue;
+
+      typename EdgeWeights::const_iterator I = J->second.find(e);
+      if (I == J->second.end()) return MissingValue;
+
+      return I->second;
+    }
+
+    void setEdgeWeight(Edge e, double w) {
+      DEBUG_WITH_TYPE("profile-info",
+            dbgs() << "Creating Edge " << e
+                   << " (weight: " << format("%.20g",w) << ")\n");
+      EdgeInformation[getFunction(e)][e] = w;
+    }
+
+    void addEdgeWeight(Edge e, double w);
+
+    EdgeWeights &getEdgeWeights (const FType *F) {
+      return EdgeInformation[F];
+    }
+
+    //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+    /// Analysis Update Methods
+    ///
+    void removeBlock(const BType *BB);
+
+    void removeEdge(Edge e);
+
+    void replaceEdge(const Edge &, const Edge &);
+
+    enum GetPathMode {
+      GetPathToExit = 1,
+      GetPathToValue = 2,
+      GetPathToDest = 4,
+      GetPathWithNewEdges = 8
+    };
+
+    const BType *GetPath(const BType *Src, const BType *Dest,
+                              Path &P, unsigned Mode);
+
+    void divertFlow(const Edge &, const Edge &);
+
+    void splitEdge(const BType *FirstBB, const BType *SecondBB,
+                   const BType *NewBB, bool MergeIdenticalEdges = false);
+
+    void splitBlock(const BType *Old, const BType* New);
+
+    void splitBlock(const BType *BB, const BType* NewBB,
+                    BType *const *Preds, unsigned NumPreds);
+
+    void replaceAllUses(const BType *RmBB, const BType *DestBB);
+
+    void transfer(const FType *Old, const FType *New);
+
+    void repair(const FType *F);
+
+    void dump(FType *F = 0, bool real = true) {
+      dbgs() << "**** This is ProfileInfo " << this << " speaking:\n";
+      if (!real) {
+        typename std::set<const FType*> Functions;
+
+        dbgs() << "Functions: \n";
+        if (F) {
+          dbgs() << F << "@" << format("%p", F) << ": " << format("%.20g",getExecutionCount(F)) << "\n";
+          Functions.insert(F);
+        } else {
+          for (typename std::map<const FType*, double>::iterator fi = FunctionInformation.begin(),
+               fe = FunctionInformation.end(); fi != fe; ++fi) {
+            dbgs() << fi->first << "@" << format("%p",fi->first) << ": " << format("%.20g",fi->second) << "\n";
+            Functions.insert(fi->first);
+          }
+        }
+
+        for (typename std::set<const FType*>::iterator FI = Functions.begin(), FE = Functions.end();
+             FI != FE; ++FI) {
+          const FType *F = *FI;
+          typename std::map<const FType*, BlockCounts>::iterator bwi = BlockInformation.find(F);
+          dbgs() << "BasicBlocks for Function " << F << ":\n";
+          for (typename BlockCounts::const_iterator bi = bwi->second.begin(), be = bwi->second.end(); bi != be; ++bi) {
+            dbgs() << bi->first << "@" << format("%p", bi->first) << ": " << format("%.20g",bi->second) << "\n";
+          }
+        }
+
+        for (typename std::set<const FType*>::iterator FI = Functions.begin(), FE = Functions.end();
+             FI != FE; ++FI) {
+          typename std::map<const FType*, EdgeWeights>::iterator ei = EdgeInformation.find(*FI);
+          dbgs() << "Edges for Function " << ei->first << ":\n";
+          for (typename EdgeWeights::iterator ewi = ei->second.begin(), ewe = ei->second.end(); 
+               ewi != ewe; ++ewi) {
+            dbgs() << ewi->first << ": " << format("%.20g",ewi->second) << "\n";
+          }
+        }
+      } else {
+        assert(F && "No function given, this is not supported!");
+        dbgs() << "Functions: \n";
+        dbgs() << F << "@" << format("%p", F) << ": " << format("%.20g",getExecutionCount(F)) << "\n";
+
+        dbgs() << "BasicBlocks for Function " << F << ":\n";
+        for (typename FType::const_iterator BI = F->begin(), BE = F->end();
+             BI != BE; ++BI) {
+          const BType *BB = &(*BI);
+          dbgs() << BB << "@" << format("%p", BB) << ": " << format("%.20g",getExecutionCount(BB)) << "\n";
+        }
+      }
+      dbgs() << "**** ProfileInfo " << this << ", over and out.\n";
+    }
+
+    bool CalculateMissingEdge(const BType *BB, Edge &removed, bool assumeEmptyExit = false);
+
+    bool EstimateMissingEdges(const BType *BB);
+
+    ProfileInfoT<MachineFunction, MachineBasicBlock> *MI() {
+      if (MachineProfile == 0)
+        MachineProfile = new ProfileInfoT<MachineFunction, MachineBasicBlock>();
+      return MachineProfile;
+    }
+
+    bool hasMI() const {
+      return (MachineProfile != 0);
+    }
+  };
+
+  typedef ProfileInfoT<Function, BasicBlock> ProfileInfo;
+  typedef ProfileInfoT<MachineFunction, MachineBasicBlock> MachineProfileInfo;
+
+  /// createProfileLoaderPass - This function returns a Pass that loads the
+  /// profiling information for the module from the specified filename, making
+  /// it available to the optimizers.
+  Pass *createProfileLoaderPass(const std::string &Filename);
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ProfileInfoLoader.h

@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+//===- ProfileInfoLoader.h - Load & convert profile information -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                      The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// The ProfileInfoLoader class is used to load and represent profiling
+// information read in from the dump file.  If conversions between formats are
+// needed, it can also do this.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFOLOADER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFOLOADER_H
+
+#include <string>
+#include <utility>
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Module;
+class Function;
+class BasicBlock;
+
+class ProfileInfoLoader {
+  const std::string &Filename;
+  std::vector<std::string> CommandLines;
+  std::vector<unsigned>    FunctionCounts;
+  std::vector<unsigned>    BlockCounts;
+  std::vector<unsigned>    EdgeCounts;
+  std::vector<unsigned>    OptimalEdgeCounts;
+  std::vector<unsigned>    BBTrace;
+public:
+  // ProfileInfoLoader ctor - Read the specified profiling data file, exiting
+  // the program if the file is invalid or broken.
+  ProfileInfoLoader(const char *ToolName, const std::string &Filename);
+
+  static const unsigned Uncounted;
+
+  unsigned getNumExecutions() const { return CommandLines.size(); }
+  const std::string &getExecution(unsigned i) const { return CommandLines[i]; }
+
+  const std::string &getFileName() const { return Filename; }
+
+  // getRawFunctionCounts - This method is used by consumers of function
+  // counting information.
+  //
+  const std::vector<unsigned> &getRawFunctionCounts() const {
+    return FunctionCounts;
+  }
+
+  // getRawBlockCounts - This method is used by consumers of block counting
+  // information.
+  //
+  const std::vector<unsigned> &getRawBlockCounts() const {
+    return BlockCounts;
+  }
+
+  // getEdgeCounts - This method is used by consumers of edge counting
+  // information.
+  //
+  const std::vector<unsigned> &getRawEdgeCounts() const {
+    return EdgeCounts;
+  }
+
+  // getEdgeOptimalCounts - This method is used by consumers of optimal edge 
+  // counting information.
+  //
+  const std::vector<unsigned> &getRawOptimalEdgeCounts() const {
+    return OptimalEdgeCounts;
+  }
+
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ProfileInfoTypes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*===-- ProfileInfoTypes.h - Profiling info shared constants --------------===*\
+|*
+|*                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+|*
+|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+|*
+|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
+|*
+|* This file defines constants shared by the various different profiling
+|* runtime libraries and the LLVM C++ profile info loader. It must be a
+|* C header because, at present, the profiling runtimes are written in C.
+|*
+\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFOTYPES_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFOTYPES_H
+
+/* Included by libprofile. */
+#if defined(__cplusplus)
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/* IDs to distinguish between those path counters stored in hashses vs arrays */
+enum ProfilingStorageType {
+  ProfilingArray = 1,
+  ProfilingHash = 2
+};
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileDataTypes.h"
+
+/*
+ * The header for tables that map path numbers to path counters.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  unsigned fnNumber; /* function number for these counters */
+  unsigned numEntries;   /* number of entries stored */
+} PathProfileHeader;
+
+/*
+ * Describes an entry in a tagged table for path counters.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+  unsigned pathNumber;
+  unsigned pathCounter;
+} PathProfileTableEntry;
+
+#if defined(__cplusplus)
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* LLVM_ANALYSIS_PROFILEINFOTYPES_H */

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/PtrUseVisitor.h

@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+//===- PtrUseVisitor.h - InstVisitors over a pointers uses ------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// \file
+/// This file provides a collection of visitors which walk the (instruction)
+/// uses of a pointer. These visitors all provide the same essential behavior
+/// as an InstVisitor with similar template-based flexibility and
+/// implementation strategies.
+///
+/// These can be used, for example, to quickly analyze the uses of an alloca,
+/// global variable, or function argument.
+///
+/// FIXME: Provide a variant which doesn't track offsets and is cheaper.
+///
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_PTRUSEVISITOR_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_PTRUSEVISITOR_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
+#include "llvm/InstVisitor.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+namespace detail {
+/// \brief Implementation of non-dependent functionality for \c PtrUseVisitor.
+///
+/// See \c PtrUseVisitor for the public interface and detailed comments about
+/// usage. This class is just a helper base class which is not templated and
+/// contains all common code to be shared between different instantiations of
+/// PtrUseVisitor.
+class PtrUseVisitorBase {
+public:
+  /// \brief This class provides information about the result of a visit.
+  ///
+  /// After walking all the users (recursively) of a pointer, the basic
+  /// infrastructure records some commonly useful information such as escape
+  /// analysis and whether the visit completed or aborted early.
+  class PtrInfo {
+  public:
+    PtrInfo() : AbortedInfo(0, false), EscapedInfo(0, false) {}
+
+    /// \brief Reset the pointer info, clearing all state.
+    void reset() {
+      AbortedInfo.setPointer(0);
+      AbortedInfo.setInt(false);
+      EscapedInfo.setPointer(0);
+      EscapedInfo.setInt(false);
+    }
+
+    /// \brief Did we abort the visit early?
+    bool isAborted() const { return AbortedInfo.getInt(); }
+
+    /// \brief Is the pointer escaped at some point?
+    bool isEscaped() const { return EscapedInfo.getInt(); }
+
+    /// \brief Get the instruction causing the visit to abort.
+    /// \returns a pointer to the instruction causing the abort if one is
+    /// available; otherwise returns null.
+    Instruction *getAbortingInst() const { return AbortedInfo.getPointer(); }
+
+    /// \brief Get the instruction causing the pointer to escape.
+    /// \returns a pointer to the instruction which escapes the pointer if one
+    /// is available; otherwise returns null.
+    Instruction *getEscapingInst() const { return EscapedInfo.getPointer(); }
+
+    /// \brief Mark the visit as aborted. Intended for use in a void return.
+    /// \param I The instruction which caused the visit to abort, if available.
+    void setAborted(Instruction *I = 0) {
+      AbortedInfo.setInt(true);
+      AbortedInfo.setPointer(I);
+    }
+
+    /// \brief Mark the pointer as escaped. Intended for use in a void return.
+    /// \param I The instruction which escapes the pointer, if available.
+    void setEscaped(Instruction *I = 0) {
+      EscapedInfo.setInt(true);
+      EscapedInfo.setPointer(I);
+    }
+
+    /// \brief Mark the pointer as escaped, and the visit as aborted. Intended
+    /// for use in a void return.
+    /// \param I The instruction which both escapes the pointer and aborts the
+    /// visit, if available.
+    void setEscapedAndAborted(Instruction *I = 0) {
+      setEscaped(I);
+      setAborted(I);
+    }
+
+  private:
+    PointerIntPair<Instruction *, 1, bool> AbortedInfo, EscapedInfo;
+  };
+
+protected:
+  const DataLayout &DL;
+
+  /// \name Visitation infrastructure
+  /// @{
+
+  /// \brief The info collected about the pointer being visited thus far.
+  PtrInfo PI;
+
+  /// \brief A struct of the data needed to visit a particular use.
+  ///
+  /// This is used to maintain a worklist fo to-visit uses. This is used to
+  /// make the visit be iterative rather than recursive.
+  struct UseToVisit {
+    typedef PointerIntPair<Use *, 1, bool> UseAndIsOffsetKnownPair;
+    UseAndIsOffsetKnownPair UseAndIsOffsetKnown;
+    APInt Offset;
+  };
+
+  /// \brief The worklist of to-visit uses.
+  SmallVector<UseToVisit, 8> Worklist;
+
+  /// \brief A set of visited uses to break cycles in unreachable code.
+  SmallPtrSet<Use *, 8> VisitedUses;
+
+  /// @}
+
+
+  /// \name Per-visit state
+  /// This state is reset for each instruction visited.
+  /// @{
+
+  /// \brief The use currently being visited.
+  Use *U;
+
+  /// \brief True if we have a known constant offset for the use currently
+  /// being visited.
+  bool IsOffsetKnown;
+
+  /// \brief The constant offset of the use if that is known.
+  APInt Offset;
+
+  /// @}
+
+
+  /// Note that the constructor is protected because this class must be a base
+  /// class, we can't create instances directly of this class.
+  PtrUseVisitorBase(const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {}
+
+  /// \brief Enqueue the users of this instruction in the visit worklist.
+  ///
+  /// This will visit the users with the same offset of the current visit
+  /// (including an unknown offset if that is the current state).
+  void enqueueUsers(Instruction &I);
+
+  /// \brief Walk the operands of a GEP and adjust the offset as appropriate.
+  ///
+  /// This routine does the heavy lifting of the pointer walk by computing
+  /// offsets and looking through GEPs.
+  bool adjustOffsetForGEP(GetElementPtrInst &GEPI);
+};
+} // end namespace detail
+
+/// \brief A base class for visitors over the uses of a pointer value.
+///
+/// Once constructed, a user can call \c visit on a pointer value, and this
+/// will walk its uses and visit each instruction using an InstVisitor. It also
+/// provides visit methods which will recurse through any pointer-to-pointer
+/// transformations such as GEPs and bitcasts.
+///
+/// During the visit, the current Use* being visited is available to the
+/// subclass, as well as the current offset from the original base pointer if
+/// known.
+///
+/// The recursive visit of uses is accomplished with a worklist, so the only
+/// ordering guarantee is that an instruction is visited before any uses of it
+/// are visited. Note that this does *not* mean before any of its users are
+/// visited! This is because users can be visited multiple times due to
+/// multiple, different uses of pointers derived from the same base.
+///
+/// A particular Use will only be visited once, but a User may be visited
+/// multiple times, once per Use. This visits may notably have different
+/// offsets.
+///
+/// All visit methods on the underlying InstVisitor return a boolean. This
+/// return short-circuits the visit, stopping it immediately.
+///
+/// FIXME: Generalize this for all values rather than just instructions.
+template <typename DerivedT>
+class PtrUseVisitor : protected InstVisitor<DerivedT>,
+                      public detail::PtrUseVisitorBase {
+  friend class InstVisitor<DerivedT>;
+  typedef InstVisitor<DerivedT> Base;
+
+public:
+  PtrUseVisitor(const DataLayout &DL) : PtrUseVisitorBase(DL) {}
+
+  /// \brief Recursively visit the uses of the given pointer.
+  /// \returns An info struct about the pointer. See \c PtrInfo for details.
+  PtrInfo visitPtr(Instruction &I) {
+    // This must be a pointer type. Get an integer type suitable to hold
+    // offsets on this pointer.
+    // FIXME: Support a vector of pointers.
+    assert(I.getType()->isPointerTy());
+    IntegerType *IntPtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(I.getType()));
+    IsOffsetKnown = true;
+    Offset = APInt(IntPtrTy->getBitWidth(), 0);
+    PI.reset();
+
+    // Enqueue the uses of this pointer.
+    enqueueUsers(I);
+
+    // Visit all the uses off the worklist until it is empty.
+    while (!Worklist.empty()) {
+      UseToVisit ToVisit = Worklist.pop_back_val();
+      U = ToVisit.UseAndIsOffsetKnown.getPointer();
+      IsOffsetKnown = ToVisit.UseAndIsOffsetKnown.getInt();
+      if (IsOffsetKnown)
+        Offset = llvm_move(ToVisit.Offset);
+
+      Instruction *I = cast<Instruction>(U->getUser());
+      static_cast<DerivedT*>(this)->visit(I);
+      if (PI.isAborted())
+        break;
+    }
+    return PI;
+  }
+
+protected:
+  void visitStoreInst(StoreInst &SI) {
+    if (SI.getValueOperand() == U->get())
+      PI.setEscaped(&SI);
+  }
+
+  void visitBitCastInst(BitCastInst &BC) {
+    enqueueUsers(BC);
+  }
+
+  void visitPtrToIntInst(PtrToIntInst &I) {
+    PI.setEscaped(&I);
+  }
+
+  void visitGetElementPtrInst(GetElementPtrInst &GEPI) {
+    if (GEPI.use_empty())
+      return;
+
+    // If we can't walk the GEP, clear the offset.
+    if (!adjustOffsetForGEP(GEPI)) {
+      IsOffsetKnown = false;
+      Offset = APInt();
+    }
+
+    // Enqueue the users now that the offset has been adjusted.
+    enqueueUsers(GEPI);
+  }
+
+  // No-op intrinsics which we know don't escape the pointer to to logic in
+  // some other function.
+  void visitDbgInfoIntrinsic(DbgInfoIntrinsic &I) {}
+  void visitMemIntrinsic(MemIntrinsic &I) {}
+  void visitIntrinsicInst(IntrinsicInst &II) {
+    switch (II.getIntrinsicID()) {
+    default:
+      return Base::visitIntrinsicInst(II);
+
+    case Intrinsic::lifetime_start:
+    case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
+      return; // No-op intrinsics.
+    }
+  }
+
+  // Generically, arguments to calls and invokes escape the pointer to some
+  // other function. Mark that.
+  void visitCallSite(CallSite CS) {
+    PI.setEscaped(CS.getInstruction());
+    Base::visitCallSite(CS);
+  }
+};
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/RegionInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,739 @@
+//===- RegionInfo.h - SESE region analysis ----------------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// Calculate a program structure tree built out of single entry single exit
+// regions.
+// The basic ideas are taken from "The Program Structure Tree - Richard Johnson,
+// David Pearson, Keshav Pingali - 1994", however enriched with ideas from "The
+// Refined Process Structure Tree - Jussi Vanhatalo, Hagen Voelyer, Jana
+// Koehler - 2009".
+// The algorithm to calculate these data structures however is completely
+// different, as it takes advantage of existing information already available
+// in (Post)dominace tree and dominance frontier passes. This leads to a simpler
+// and in practice hopefully better performing algorithm. The runtime of the
+// algorithms described in the papers above are both linear in graph size,
+// O(V+E), whereas this algorithm is not, as the dominance frontier information
+// itself is not, but in practice runtime seems to be in the order of magnitude
+// of dominance tree calculation.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/DominanceFrontier.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/PostDominators.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Allocator.h"
+#include <map>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Region;
+class RegionInfo;
+class raw_ostream;
+class Loop;
+class LoopInfo;
+
+/// @brief Marker class to iterate over the elements of a Region in flat mode.
+///
+/// The class is used to either iterate in Flat mode or by not using it to not
+/// iterate in Flat mode.  During a Flat mode iteration all Regions are entered
+/// and the iteration returns every BasicBlock.  If the Flat mode is not
+/// selected for SubRegions just one RegionNode containing the subregion is
+/// returned.
+template <class GraphType>
+class FlatIt {};
+
+/// @brief A RegionNode represents a subregion or a BasicBlock that is part of a
+/// Region.
+class RegionNode {
+  RegionNode(const RegionNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const RegionNode &operator=(const RegionNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+protected:
+  /// This is the entry basic block that starts this region node.  If this is a
+  /// BasicBlock RegionNode, then entry is just the basic block, that this
+  /// RegionNode represents.  Otherwise it is the entry of this (Sub)RegionNode.
+  ///
+  /// In the BBtoRegionNode map of the parent of this node, BB will always map
+  /// to this node no matter which kind of node this one is.
+  ///
+  /// The node can hold either a Region or a BasicBlock.
+  /// Use one bit to save, if this RegionNode is a subregion or BasicBlock
+  /// RegionNode.
+  PointerIntPair<BasicBlock*, 1, bool> entry;
+
+  /// @brief The parent Region of this RegionNode.
+  /// @see getParent()
+  Region* parent;
+
+public:
+  /// @brief Create a RegionNode.
+  ///
+  /// @param Parent      The parent of this RegionNode.
+  /// @param Entry       The entry BasicBlock of the RegionNode.  If this
+  ///                    RegionNode represents a BasicBlock, this is the
+  ///                    BasicBlock itself.  If it represents a subregion, this
+  ///                    is the entry BasicBlock of the subregion.
+  /// @param isSubRegion If this RegionNode represents a SubRegion.
+  inline RegionNode(Region* Parent, BasicBlock* Entry, bool isSubRegion = 0)
+    : entry(Entry, isSubRegion), parent(Parent) {}
+
+  /// @brief Get the parent Region of this RegionNode.
+  ///
+  /// The parent Region is the Region this RegionNode belongs to. If for
+  /// example a BasicBlock is element of two Regions, there exist two
+  /// RegionNodes for this BasicBlock. Each with the getParent() function
+  /// pointing to the Region this RegionNode belongs to.
+  ///
+  /// @return Get the parent Region of this RegionNode.
+  inline Region* getParent() const { return parent; }
+
+  /// @brief Get the entry BasicBlock of this RegionNode.
+  ///
+  /// If this RegionNode represents a BasicBlock this is just the BasicBlock
+  /// itself, otherwise we return the entry BasicBlock of the Subregion
+  ///
+  /// @return The entry BasicBlock of this RegionNode.
+  inline BasicBlock* getEntry() const { return entry.getPointer(); }
+
+  /// @brief Get the content of this RegionNode.
+  ///
+  /// This can be either a BasicBlock or a subregion. Before calling getNodeAs()
+  /// check the type of the content with the isSubRegion() function call.
+  ///
+  /// @return The content of this RegionNode.
+  template<class T>
+  inline T* getNodeAs() const;
+
+  /// @brief Is this RegionNode a subregion?
+  ///
+  /// @return True if it contains a subregion. False if it contains a
+  ///         BasicBlock.
+  inline bool isSubRegion() const {
+    return entry.getInt();
+  }
+};
+
+/// Print a RegionNode.
+inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const RegionNode &Node);
+
+template<>
+inline BasicBlock* RegionNode::getNodeAs<BasicBlock>() const {
+  assert(!isSubRegion() && "This is not a BasicBlock RegionNode!");
+  return getEntry();
+}
+
+template<>
+inline Region* RegionNode::getNodeAs<Region>() const {
+  assert(isSubRegion() && "This is not a subregion RegionNode!");
+  return reinterpret_cast<Region*>(const_cast<RegionNode*>(this));
+}
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// @brief A single entry single exit Region.
+///
+/// A Region is a connected subgraph of a control flow graph that has exactly
+/// two connections to the remaining graph. It can be used to analyze or
+/// optimize parts of the control flow graph.
+///
+/// A <em> simple Region </em> is connected to the remaining graph by just two
+/// edges. One edge entering the Region and another one leaving the Region.
+///
+/// An <em> extended Region </em> (or just Region) is a subgraph that can be
+/// transform into a simple Region. The transformation is done by adding
+/// BasicBlocks that merge several entry or exit edges so that after the merge
+/// just one entry and one exit edge exists.
+///
+/// The \e Entry of a Region is the first BasicBlock that is passed after
+/// entering the Region. It is an element of the Region. The entry BasicBlock
+/// dominates all BasicBlocks in the Region.
+///
+/// The \e Exit of a Region is the first BasicBlock that is passed after
+/// leaving the Region. It is not an element of the Region. The exit BasicBlock,
+/// postdominates all BasicBlocks in the Region.
+///
+/// A <em> canonical Region </em> cannot be constructed by combining smaller
+/// Regions.
+///
+/// Region A is the \e parent of Region B, if B is completely contained in A.
+///
+/// Two canonical Regions either do not intersect at all or one is
+/// the parent of the other.
+///
+/// The <em> Program Structure Tree</em> is a graph (V, E) where V is the set of
+/// Regions in the control flow graph and E is the \e parent relation of these
+/// Regions.
+///
+/// Example:
+///
+/// \verbatim
+/// A simple control flow graph, that contains two regions.
+///
+///        1
+///       / |
+///      2   |
+///     / \   3
+///    4   5  |
+///    |   |  |
+///    6   7  8
+///     \  | /
+///      \ |/       Region A: 1 -> 9 {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}
+///        9        Region B: 2 -> 9 {2,4,5,6,7}
+/// \endverbatim
+///
+/// You can obtain more examples by either calling
+///
+/// <tt> "opt -regions -analyze anyprogram.ll" </tt>
+/// or
+/// <tt> "opt -view-regions-only anyprogram.ll" </tt>
+///
+/// on any LLVM file you are interested in.
+///
+/// The first call returns a textual representation of the program structure
+/// tree, the second one creates a graphical representation using graphviz.
+class Region : public RegionNode {
+  friend class RegionInfo;
+  Region(const Region &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const Region &operator=(const Region &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  // Information necessary to manage this Region.
+  RegionInfo* RI;
+  DominatorTree *DT;
+
+  // The exit BasicBlock of this region.
+  // (The entry BasicBlock is part of RegionNode)
+  BasicBlock *exit;
+
+  typedef std::vector<Region*> RegionSet;
+
+  // The subregions of this region.
+  RegionSet children;
+
+  typedef std::map<BasicBlock*, RegionNode*> BBNodeMapT;
+
+  // Save the BasicBlock RegionNodes that are element of this Region.
+  mutable BBNodeMapT BBNodeMap;
+
+  /// verifyBBInRegion - Check if a BB is in this Region. This check also works
+  /// if the region is incorrectly built. (EXPENSIVE!)
+  void verifyBBInRegion(BasicBlock* BB) const;
+
+  /// verifyWalk - Walk over all the BBs of the region starting from BB and
+  /// verify that all reachable basic blocks are elements of the region.
+  /// (EXPENSIVE!)
+  void verifyWalk(BasicBlock* BB, std::set<BasicBlock*>* visitedBB) const;
+
+  /// verifyRegionNest - Verify if the region and its children are valid
+  /// regions (EXPENSIVE!)
+  void verifyRegionNest() const;
+
+public:
+  /// @brief Create a new region.
+  ///
+  /// @param Entry  The entry basic block of the region.
+  /// @param Exit   The exit basic block of the region.
+  /// @param RI     The region info object that is managing this region.
+  /// @param DT     The dominator tree of the current function.
+  /// @param Parent The surrounding region or NULL if this is a top level
+  ///               region.
+  Region(BasicBlock *Entry, BasicBlock *Exit, RegionInfo* RI,
+         DominatorTree *DT, Region *Parent = 0);
+
+  /// Delete the Region and all its subregions.
+  ~Region();
+
+  /// @brief Get the entry BasicBlock of the Region.
+  /// @return The entry BasicBlock of the region.
+  BasicBlock *getEntry() const { return RegionNode::getEntry(); }
+
+  /// @brief Replace the entry basic block of the region with the new basic
+  ///        block.
+  ///
+  /// @param BB  The new entry basic block of the region.
+  void replaceEntry(BasicBlock *BB);
+
+  /// @brief Replace the exit basic block of the region with the new basic
+  ///        block.
+  ///
+  /// @param BB  The new exit basic block of the region.
+  void replaceExit(BasicBlock *BB);
+
+  /// @brief Recursively replace the entry basic block of the region.
+  ///
+  /// This function replaces the entry basic block with a new basic block. It
+  /// also updates all child regions that have the same entry basic block as
+  /// this region.
+  ///
+  /// @param NewEntry The new entry basic block.
+  void replaceEntryRecursive(BasicBlock *NewEntry);
+
+  /// @brief Recursively replace the exit basic block of the region.
+  ///
+  /// This function replaces the exit basic block with a new basic block. It
+  /// also updates all child regions that have the same exit basic block as
+  /// this region.
+  ///
+  /// @param NewExit The new exit basic block.
+  void replaceExitRecursive(BasicBlock *NewExit);
+
+  /// @brief Get the exit BasicBlock of the Region.
+  /// @return The exit BasicBlock of the Region, NULL if this is the TopLevel
+  ///         Region.
+  BasicBlock *getExit() const { return exit; }
+
+  /// @brief Get the parent of the Region.
+  /// @return The parent of the Region or NULL if this is a top level
+  ///         Region.
+  Region *getParent() const { return RegionNode::getParent(); }
+
+  /// @brief Get the RegionNode representing the current Region.
+  /// @return The RegionNode representing the current Region.
+  RegionNode* getNode() const {
+    return const_cast<RegionNode*>(reinterpret_cast<const RegionNode*>(this));
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Get the nesting level of this Region.
+  ///
+  /// An toplevel Region has depth 0.
+  ///
+  /// @return The depth of the region.
+  unsigned getDepth() const;
+
+  /// @brief Check if a Region is the TopLevel region.
+  ///
+  /// The toplevel region represents the whole function.
+  bool isTopLevelRegion() const { return exit == NULL; }
+
+  /// @brief Return a new (non canonical) region, that is obtained by joining
+  ///        this region with its predecessors.
+  ///
+  /// @return A region also starting at getEntry(), but reaching to the next
+  ///         basic block that forms with getEntry() a (non canonical) region.
+  ///         NULL if such a basic block does not exist.
+  Region *getExpandedRegion() const;
+
+  /// @brief Return the first block of this region's single entry edge,
+  ///        if existing.
+  ///
+  /// @return The BasicBlock starting this region's single entry edge,
+  ///         else NULL.
+  BasicBlock *getEnteringBlock() const;
+
+  /// @brief Return the first block of this region's single exit edge,
+  ///        if existing.
+  ///
+  /// @return The BasicBlock starting this region's single exit edge,
+  ///         else NULL.
+  BasicBlock *getExitingBlock() const;
+
+  /// @brief Is this a simple region?
+  ///
+  /// A region is simple if it has exactly one exit and one entry edge.
+  ///
+  /// @return True if the Region is simple.
+  bool isSimple() const;
+
+  /// @brief Returns the name of the Region.
+  /// @return The Name of the Region.
+  std::string getNameStr() const;
+
+  /// @brief Return the RegionInfo object, that belongs to this Region.
+  RegionInfo *getRegionInfo() const {
+    return RI;
+  }
+
+  /// PrintStyle - Print region in difference ways.
+  enum PrintStyle { PrintNone, PrintBB, PrintRN  };
+
+  /// @brief Print the region.
+  ///
+  /// @param OS The output stream the Region is printed to.
+  /// @param printTree Print also the tree of subregions.
+  /// @param level The indentation level used for printing.
+  void print(raw_ostream& OS, bool printTree = true, unsigned level = 0,
+             enum PrintStyle Style = PrintNone) const;
+
+  /// @brief Print the region to stderr.
+  void dump() const;
+
+  /// @brief Check if the region contains a BasicBlock.
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The BasicBlock that might be contained in this Region.
+  /// @return True if the block is contained in the region otherwise false.
+  bool contains(const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Check if the region contains another region.
+  ///
+  /// @param SubRegion The region that might be contained in this Region.
+  /// @return True if SubRegion is contained in the region otherwise false.
+  bool contains(const Region *SubRegion) const {
+    // Toplevel Region.
+    if (!getExit())
+      return true;
+
+    return contains(SubRegion->getEntry())
+      && (contains(SubRegion->getExit()) || SubRegion->getExit() == getExit());
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Check if the region contains an Instruction.
+  ///
+  /// @param Inst The Instruction that might be contained in this region.
+  /// @return True if the Instruction is contained in the region otherwise false.
+  bool contains(const Instruction *Inst) const {
+    return contains(Inst->getParent());
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Check if the region contains a loop.
+  ///
+  /// @param L The loop that might be contained in this region.
+  /// @return True if the loop is contained in the region otherwise false.
+  ///         In case a NULL pointer is passed to this function the result
+  ///         is false, except for the region that describes the whole function.
+  ///         In that case true is returned.
+  bool contains(const Loop *L) const;
+
+  /// @brief Get the outermost loop in the region that contains a loop.
+  ///
+  /// Find for a Loop L the outermost loop OuterL that is a parent loop of L
+  /// and is itself contained in the region.
+  ///
+  /// @param L The loop the lookup is started.
+  /// @return The outermost loop in the region, NULL if such a loop does not
+  ///         exist or if the region describes the whole function.
+  Loop *outermostLoopInRegion(Loop *L) const;
+
+  /// @brief Get the outermost loop in the region that contains a basic block.
+  ///
+  /// Find for a basic block BB the outermost loop L that contains BB and is
+  /// itself contained in the region.
+  ///
+  /// @param LI A pointer to a LoopInfo analysis.
+  /// @param BB The basic block surrounded by the loop.
+  /// @return The outermost loop in the region, NULL if such a loop does not
+  ///         exist or if the region describes the whole function.
+  Loop *outermostLoopInRegion(LoopInfo *LI, BasicBlock* BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Get the subregion that starts at a BasicBlock
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The BasicBlock the subregion should start.
+  /// @return The Subregion if available, otherwise NULL.
+  Region* getSubRegionNode(BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Get the RegionNode for a BasicBlock
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The BasicBlock at which the RegionNode should start.
+  /// @return If available, the RegionNode that represents the subregion
+  ///         starting at BB. If no subregion starts at BB, the RegionNode
+  ///         representing BB.
+  RegionNode* getNode(BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Get the BasicBlock RegionNode for a BasicBlock
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The BasicBlock for which the RegionNode is requested.
+  /// @return The RegionNode representing the BB.
+  RegionNode* getBBNode(BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Add a new subregion to this Region.
+  ///
+  /// @param SubRegion The new subregion that will be added.
+  /// @param moveChildren Move the children of this region, that are also
+  ///                     contained in SubRegion into SubRegion.
+  void addSubRegion(Region *SubRegion, bool moveChildren = false);
+
+  /// @brief Remove a subregion from this Region.
+  ///
+  /// The subregion is not deleted, as it will probably be inserted into another
+  /// region.
+  /// @param SubRegion The SubRegion that will be removed.
+  Region *removeSubRegion(Region *SubRegion);
+
+  /// @brief Move all direct child nodes of this Region to another Region.
+  ///
+  /// @param To The Region the child nodes will be transferred to.
+  void transferChildrenTo(Region *To);
+
+  /// @brief Verify if the region is a correct region.
+  ///
+  /// Check if this is a correctly build Region. This is an expensive check, as
+  /// the complete CFG of the Region will be walked.
+  void verifyRegion() const;
+
+  /// @brief Clear the cache for BB RegionNodes.
+  ///
+  /// After calling this function the BasicBlock RegionNodes will be stored at
+  /// different memory locations. RegionNodes obtained before this function is
+  /// called are therefore not comparable to RegionNodes abtained afterwords.
+  void clearNodeCache();
+
+  /// @name Subregion Iterators
+  ///
+  /// These iterators iterator over all subregions of this Region.
+  //@{
+  typedef RegionSet::iterator iterator;
+  typedef RegionSet::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+  iterator begin() { return children.begin(); }
+  iterator end() { return children.end(); }
+
+  const_iterator begin() const { return children.begin(); }
+  const_iterator end() const { return children.end(); }
+  //@}
+
+  /// @name BasicBlock Iterators
+  ///
+  /// These iterators iterate over all BasicBlocks that are contained in this
+  /// Region. The iterator also iterates over BasicBlocks that are elements of
+  /// a subregion of this Region. It is therefore called a flat iterator.
+  //@{
+  template <bool IsConst>
+  class block_iterator_wrapper
+    : public df_iterator<typename conditional<IsConst,
+                                              const BasicBlock,
+                                              BasicBlock>::type*> {
+    typedef df_iterator<typename conditional<IsConst,
+                                             const BasicBlock,
+                                             BasicBlock>::type*>
+      super;
+  public:
+    typedef block_iterator_wrapper<IsConst> Self;
+    typedef typename super::pointer pointer;
+
+    // Construct the begin iterator.
+    block_iterator_wrapper(pointer Entry, pointer Exit) : super(df_begin(Entry))
+    {
+      // Mark the exit of the region as visited, so that the children of the
+      // exit and the exit itself, i.e. the block outside the region will never
+      // be visited.
+      super::Visited.insert(Exit);
+    }
+
+    // Construct the end iterator.
+    block_iterator_wrapper() : super(df_end<pointer>((BasicBlock *)0)) {}
+
+    /*implicit*/ block_iterator_wrapper(super I) : super(I) {}
+
+    // FIXME: Even a const_iterator returns a non-const BasicBlock pointer.
+    //        This was introduced for backwards compatibility, but should
+    //        be removed as soon as all users are fixed.
+    BasicBlock *operator*() const {
+      return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(super::operator*());
+    }
+  };
+
+  typedef block_iterator_wrapper<false> block_iterator;
+  typedef block_iterator_wrapper<true>  const_block_iterator;
+
+  block_iterator block_begin() {
+   return block_iterator(getEntry(), getExit());
+  }
+
+  block_iterator block_end() {
+   return block_iterator();
+  }
+
+  const_block_iterator block_begin() const {
+    return const_block_iterator(getEntry(), getExit());
+  }
+  const_block_iterator block_end() const {
+    return const_block_iterator();
+  }
+  //@}
+
+  /// @name Element Iterators
+  ///
+  /// These iterators iterate over all BasicBlock and subregion RegionNodes that
+  /// are direct children of this Region. It does not iterate over any
+  /// RegionNodes that are also element of a subregion of this Region.
+  //@{
+  typedef df_iterator<RegionNode*, SmallPtrSet<RegionNode*, 8>, false,
+                      GraphTraits<RegionNode*> > element_iterator;
+
+  typedef df_iterator<const RegionNode*, SmallPtrSet<const RegionNode*, 8>,
+                      false, GraphTraits<const RegionNode*> >
+            const_element_iterator;
+
+  element_iterator element_begin();
+  element_iterator element_end();
+
+  const_element_iterator element_begin() const;
+  const_element_iterator element_end() const;
+  //@}
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// @brief Analysis that detects all canonical Regions.
+///
+/// The RegionInfo pass detects all canonical regions in a function. The Regions
+/// are connected using the parent relation. This builds a Program Structure
+/// Tree.
+class RegionInfo : public FunctionPass {
+  typedef DenseMap<BasicBlock*,BasicBlock*> BBtoBBMap;
+  typedef DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Region*> BBtoRegionMap;
+  typedef SmallPtrSet<Region*, 4> RegionSet;
+
+  RegionInfo(const RegionInfo &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const RegionInfo &operator=(const RegionInfo &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  DominatorTree *DT;
+  PostDominatorTree *PDT;
+  DominanceFrontier *DF;
+
+  /// The top level region.
+  Region *TopLevelRegion;
+
+  /// Map every BB to the smallest region, that contains BB.
+  BBtoRegionMap BBtoRegion;
+
+  // isCommonDomFrontier - Returns true if BB is in the dominance frontier of
+  // entry, because it was inherited from exit. In the other case there is an
+  // edge going from entry to BB without passing exit.
+  bool isCommonDomFrontier(BasicBlock* BB, BasicBlock* entry,
+                           BasicBlock* exit) const;
+
+  // isRegion - Check if entry and exit surround a valid region, based on
+  // dominance tree and dominance frontier.
+  bool isRegion(BasicBlock* entry, BasicBlock* exit) const;
+
+  // insertShortCut - Saves a shortcut pointing from entry to exit.
+  // This function may extend this shortcut if possible.
+  void insertShortCut(BasicBlock* entry, BasicBlock* exit,
+                      BBtoBBMap* ShortCut) const;
+
+  // getNextPostDom - Returns the next BB that postdominates N, while skipping
+  // all post dominators that cannot finish a canonical region.
+  DomTreeNode *getNextPostDom(DomTreeNode* N, BBtoBBMap *ShortCut) const;
+
+  // isTrivialRegion - A region is trivial, if it contains only one BB.
+  bool isTrivialRegion(BasicBlock *entry, BasicBlock *exit) const;
+
+  // createRegion - Creates a single entry single exit region.
+  Region *createRegion(BasicBlock *entry, BasicBlock *exit);
+
+  // findRegionsWithEntry - Detect all regions starting with bb 'entry'.
+  void findRegionsWithEntry(BasicBlock *entry, BBtoBBMap *ShortCut);
+
+  // scanForRegions - Detects regions in F.
+  void scanForRegions(Function &F, BBtoBBMap *ShortCut);
+
+  // getTopMostParent - Get the top most parent with the same entry block.
+  Region *getTopMostParent(Region *region);
+
+  // buildRegionsTree - build the region hierarchy after all region detected.
+  void buildRegionsTree(DomTreeNode *N, Region *region);
+
+  // Calculate - detecte all regions in function and build the region tree.
+  void Calculate(Function& F);
+
+  void releaseMemory();
+
+  // updateStatistics - Update statistic about created regions.
+  void updateStatistics(Region *R);
+
+  // isSimple - Check if a region is a simple region with exactly one entry
+  // edge and exactly one exit edge.
+  bool isSimple(Region* R) const;
+
+public:
+  static char ID;
+  explicit RegionInfo();
+
+  ~RegionInfo();
+
+  /// @name FunctionPass interface
+  //@{
+  virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+  virtual void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module *) const;
+  virtual void verifyAnalysis() const;
+  //@}
+
+  /// @brief Get the smallest region that contains a BasicBlock.
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The basic block.
+  /// @return The smallest region, that contains BB or NULL, if there is no
+  /// region containing BB.
+  Region *getRegionFor(BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief  Set the smallest region that surrounds a basic block.
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The basic block surrounded by a region.
+  /// @param R The smallest region that surrounds BB.
+  void setRegionFor(BasicBlock *BB, Region *R);
+
+  /// @brief A shortcut for getRegionFor().
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The basic block.
+  /// @return The smallest region, that contains BB or NULL, if there is no
+  /// region containing BB.
+  Region *operator[](BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Return the exit of the maximal refined region, that starts at a
+  /// BasicBlock.
+  ///
+  /// @param BB The BasicBlock the refined region starts.
+  BasicBlock *getMaxRegionExit(BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// @brief Find the smallest region that contains two regions.
+  ///
+  /// @param A The first region.
+  /// @param B The second region.
+  /// @return The smallest region containing A and B.
+  Region *getCommonRegion(Region* A, Region *B) const;
+
+  /// @brief Find the smallest region that contains two basic blocks.
+  ///
+  /// @param A The first basic block.
+  /// @param B The second basic block.
+  /// @return The smallest region that contains A and B.
+  Region* getCommonRegion(BasicBlock* A, BasicBlock *B) const {
+    return getCommonRegion(getRegionFor(A), getRegionFor(B));
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Find the smallest region that contains a set of regions.
+  ///
+  /// @param Regions A vector of regions.
+  /// @return The smallest region that contains all regions in Regions.
+  Region* getCommonRegion(SmallVectorImpl<Region*> &Regions) const;
+
+  /// @brief Find the smallest region that contains a set of basic blocks.
+  ///
+  /// @param BBs A vector of basic blocks.
+  /// @return The smallest region that contains all basic blocks in BBS.
+  Region* getCommonRegion(SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*> &BBs) const;
+
+  Region *getTopLevelRegion() const {
+    return TopLevelRegion;
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Update RegionInfo after a basic block was split.
+  ///
+  /// @param NewBB The basic block that was created before OldBB.
+  /// @param OldBB The old basic block.
+  void splitBlock(BasicBlock* NewBB, BasicBlock *OldBB);
+
+  /// @brief Clear the Node Cache for all Regions.
+  ///
+  /// @see Region::clearNodeCache()
+  void clearNodeCache() {
+    if (TopLevelRegion)
+      TopLevelRegion->clearNodeCache();
+  }
+};
+
+inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const RegionNode &Node) {
+  if (Node.isSubRegion())
+    return OS << Node.getNodeAs<Region>()->getNameStr();
+  else
+    return OS << Node.getNodeAs<BasicBlock>()->getName();
+}
+} // End llvm namespace
+#endif
+

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/RegionIterator.h

@@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
+//===- RegionIterator.h - Iterators to iteratate over Regions ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// This file defines the iterators to iterate over the elements of a Region.
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONITERATOR_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONITERATOR_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/GraphTraits.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/RegionInfo.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/CFG.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// @brief Hierarchical RegionNode successor iterator.
+///
+/// This iterator iterates over all successors of a RegionNode.
+///
+/// For a BasicBlock RegionNode it skips all BasicBlocks that are not part of
+/// the parent Region.  Furthermore for BasicBlocks that start a subregion, a
+/// RegionNode representing the subregion is returned.
+///
+/// For a subregion RegionNode there is just one successor. The RegionNode
+/// representing the exit of the subregion.
+template<class NodeType>
+class RNSuccIterator : public std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag,
+                                           NodeType, ptrdiff_t>
+{
+  typedef std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag, NodeType, ptrdiff_t> super;
+  // The iterator works in two modes, bb mode or region mode.
+  enum ItMode{
+    // In BB mode it returns all successors of this BasicBlock as its
+    // successors.
+    ItBB,
+    // In region mode there is only one successor, thats the regionnode mapping
+    // to the exit block of the regionnode
+    ItRgBegin, // At the beginning of the regionnode successor.
+    ItRgEnd    // At the end of the regionnode successor.
+  };
+
+  // Use two bit to represent the mode iterator.
+  PointerIntPair<NodeType*, 2, enum ItMode> Node;
+
+  // The block successor iterator.
+  succ_iterator BItor;
+
+  // advanceRegionSucc - A region node has only one successor. It reaches end
+  // once we advance it.
+  void advanceRegionSucc() {
+    assert(Node.getInt() == ItRgBegin && "Cannot advance region successor!");
+    Node.setInt(ItRgEnd);
+  }
+
+  NodeType* getNode() const{ return Node.getPointer(); }
+
+  // isRegionMode - Is the current iterator in region mode?
+  bool isRegionMode() const { return Node.getInt() != ItBB; }
+
+  // Get the immediate successor. This function may return a Basic Block
+  // RegionNode or a subregion RegionNode.
+  RegionNode* getISucc(BasicBlock* BB) const {
+    RegionNode *succ;
+    succ = getNode()->getParent()->getNode(BB);
+    assert(succ && "BB not in Region or entered subregion!");
+    return succ;
+  }
+
+  // getRegionSucc - Return the successor basic block of a SubRegion RegionNode.
+  inline BasicBlock* getRegionSucc() const {
+    assert(Node.getInt() == ItRgBegin && "Cannot get the region successor!");
+    return getNode()->template getNodeAs<Region>()->getExit();
+  }
+
+  // isExit - Is this the exit BB of the Region?
+  inline bool isExit(BasicBlock* BB) const {
+    return getNode()->getParent()->getExit() == BB;
+  }
+public:
+  typedef RNSuccIterator<NodeType> Self;
+
+  typedef typename super::pointer pointer;
+
+  /// @brief Create begin iterator of a RegionNode.
+  inline RNSuccIterator(NodeType* node)
+    : Node(node, node->isSubRegion() ? ItRgBegin : ItBB),
+    BItor(succ_begin(node->getEntry())) {
+
+
+    // Skip the exit block
+    if (!isRegionMode())
+      while (succ_end(node->getEntry()) != BItor && isExit(*BItor))
+        ++BItor;
+
+    if (isRegionMode() && isExit(getRegionSucc()))
+      advanceRegionSucc();
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Create an end iterator.
+  inline RNSuccIterator(NodeType* node, bool)
+    : Node(node, node->isSubRegion() ? ItRgEnd : ItBB),
+    BItor(succ_end(node->getEntry())) {}
+
+  inline bool operator==(const Self& x) const {
+    assert(isRegionMode() == x.isRegionMode() && "Broken iterator!");
+    if (isRegionMode())
+      return Node.getInt() == x.Node.getInt();
+    else
+      return BItor == x.BItor;
+  }
+
+  inline bool operator!=(const Self& x) const { return !operator==(x); }
+
+  inline pointer operator*() const {
+    BasicBlock* BB = isRegionMode() ? getRegionSucc() : *BItor;
+    assert(!isExit(BB) && "Iterator out of range!");
+    return getISucc(BB);
+  }
+
+  inline Self& operator++() {
+    if(isRegionMode()) {
+      // The Region only has 1 successor.
+      advanceRegionSucc();
+    } else {
+      // Skip the exit.
+      do
+        ++BItor;
+      while (BItor != succ_end(getNode()->getEntry())
+          && isExit(*BItor));
+    }
+    return *this;
+  }
+
+  inline Self operator++(int) {
+    Self tmp = *this;
+    ++*this;
+    return tmp;
+  }
+
+  inline const Self &operator=(const Self &I) {
+    if (this != &I) {
+      assert(getNode()->getParent() == I.getNode()->getParent()
+             && "Cannot assign iterators of two different regions!");
+      Node = I.Node;
+      BItor = I.BItor;
+    }
+    return *this;
+  }
+};
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// @brief Flat RegionNode iterator.
+///
+/// The Flat Region iterator will iterate over all BasicBlock RegionNodes that
+/// are contained in the Region and its subregions. This is close to a virtual
+/// control flow graph of the Region.
+template<class NodeType>
+class RNSuccIterator<FlatIt<NodeType> >
+  : public std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag, NodeType, ptrdiff_t>
+{
+  typedef std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag, NodeType, ptrdiff_t> super;
+  NodeType* Node;
+  succ_iterator Itor;
+
+public:
+  typedef RNSuccIterator<FlatIt<NodeType> > Self;
+  typedef typename super::pointer pointer;
+
+  /// @brief Create the iterator from a RegionNode.
+  ///
+  /// Note that the incoming node must be a bb node, otherwise it will trigger
+  /// an assertion when we try to get a BasicBlock.
+  inline RNSuccIterator(NodeType* node) : Node(node),
+    Itor(succ_begin(node->getEntry())) {
+      assert(!Node->isSubRegion()
+             && "Subregion node not allowed in flat iterating mode!");
+      assert(Node->getParent() && "A BB node must have a parent!");
+
+      // Skip the exit block of the iterating region.
+      while (succ_end(Node->getEntry()) != Itor
+          && Node->getParent()->getExit() == *Itor)
+        ++Itor;
+  }
+  /// @brief Create an end iterator
+  inline RNSuccIterator(NodeType* node, bool) : Node(node),
+    Itor(succ_end(node->getEntry())) {
+      assert(!Node->isSubRegion()
+             && "Subregion node not allowed in flat iterating mode!");
+  }
+
+  inline bool operator==(const Self& x) const {
+    assert(Node->getParent() == x.Node->getParent()
+           && "Cannot compare iterators of different regions!");
+
+    return Itor == x.Itor && Node == x.Node;
+  }
+
+  inline bool operator!=(const Self& x) const { return !operator==(x); }
+
+  inline pointer operator*() const {
+    BasicBlock* BB = *Itor;
+
+    // Get the iterating region.
+    Region* Parent = Node->getParent();
+
+    // The only case that the successor reaches out of the region is it reaches
+    // the exit of the region.
+    assert(Parent->getExit() != BB && "iterator out of range!");
+
+    return Parent->getBBNode(BB);
+  }
+
+  inline Self& operator++() {
+    // Skip the exit block of the iterating region.
+    do
+      ++Itor;
+    while (Itor != succ_end(Node->getEntry())
+        && Node->getParent()->getExit() == *Itor);
+
+    return *this;
+  }
+
+  inline Self operator++(int) {
+    Self tmp = *this;
+    ++*this;
+    return tmp;
+  }
+
+  inline const Self &operator=(const Self &I) {
+    if (this != &I) {
+      assert(Node->getParent() == I.Node->getParent()
+             && "Cannot assign iterators to two different regions!");
+      Node = I.Node;
+      Itor = I.Itor;
+    }
+    return *this;
+  }
+};
+
+template<class NodeType>
+inline RNSuccIterator<NodeType> succ_begin(NodeType* Node) {
+  return RNSuccIterator<NodeType>(Node);
+}
+
+template<class NodeType>
+inline RNSuccIterator<NodeType> succ_end(NodeType* Node) {
+  return RNSuccIterator<NodeType>(Node, true);
+}
+
+//===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// RegionNode GraphTraits specialization so the bbs in the region can be
+// iterate by generic graph iterators.
+//
+// NodeT can either be region node or const region node, otherwise child_begin
+// and child_end fail.
+
+#define RegionNodeGraphTraits(NodeT) \
+  template<> struct GraphTraits<NodeT*> { \
+  typedef NodeT NodeType; \
+  typedef RNSuccIterator<NodeType> ChildIteratorType; \
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(NodeType* N) { return N; } \
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) { \
+    return RNSuccIterator<NodeType>(N); \
+  } \
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) { \
+    return RNSuccIterator<NodeType>(N, true); \
+  } \
+}; \
+template<> struct GraphTraits<FlatIt<NodeT*> > { \
+  typedef NodeT NodeType; \
+  typedef RNSuccIterator<FlatIt<NodeT> > ChildIteratorType; \
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(NodeType* N) { return N; } \
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) { \
+    return RNSuccIterator<FlatIt<NodeType> >(N); \
+  } \
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) { \
+    return RNSuccIterator<FlatIt<NodeType> >(N, true); \
+  } \
+}
+
+#define RegionGraphTraits(RegionT, NodeT) \
+template<> struct GraphTraits<RegionT*> \
+  : public GraphTraits<NodeT*> { \
+  typedef df_iterator<NodeType*> nodes_iterator; \
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(RegionT* R) { \
+    return R->getNode(R->getEntry()); \
+  } \
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(RegionT* R) { \
+    return nodes_iterator::begin(getEntryNode(R)); \
+  } \
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end(RegionT* R) { \
+    return nodes_iterator::end(getEntryNode(R)); \
+  } \
+}; \
+template<> struct GraphTraits<FlatIt<RegionT*> > \
+  : public GraphTraits<FlatIt<NodeT*> > { \
+  typedef df_iterator<NodeType*, SmallPtrSet<NodeType*, 8>, false, \
+  GraphTraits<FlatIt<NodeType*> > > nodes_iterator; \
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(RegionT* R) { \
+    return R->getBBNode(R->getEntry()); \
+  } \
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(RegionT* R) { \
+    return nodes_iterator::begin(getEntryNode(R)); \
+  } \
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end(RegionT* R) { \
+    return nodes_iterator::end(getEntryNode(R)); \
+  } \
+}
+
+RegionNodeGraphTraits(RegionNode);
+RegionNodeGraphTraits(const RegionNode);
+
+RegionGraphTraits(Region, RegionNode);
+RegionGraphTraits(const Region, const RegionNode);
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<RegionInfo*>
+  : public GraphTraits<FlatIt<RegionNode*> > {
+  typedef df_iterator<NodeType*, SmallPtrSet<NodeType*, 8>, false,
+                      GraphTraits<FlatIt<NodeType*> > > nodes_iterator;
+
+  static NodeType *getEntryNode(RegionInfo *RI) {
+    return GraphTraits<FlatIt<Region*> >::getEntryNode(RI->getTopLevelRegion());
+  }
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_begin(RegionInfo* RI) {
+    return nodes_iterator::begin(getEntryNode(RI));
+  }
+  static nodes_iterator nodes_end(RegionInfo *RI) {
+    return nodes_iterator::end(getEntryNode(RI));
+  }
+};
+
+} // End namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/RegionPass.h

@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+//===- RegionPass.h - RegionPass class ------------------------------------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the RegionPass class. All region based analysis,
+// optimization and transformation passes are derived from RegionPass.
+// This class is implemented following the some ideas of the LoopPass.h class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONPASS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONPASS_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/RegionInfo.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/PassManagers.h"
+#include <deque>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class RGPassManager;
+class Function;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// @brief A pass that runs on each Region in a function.
+///
+/// RegionPass is managed by RGPassManager.
+class RegionPass : public Pass {
+public:
+  explicit RegionPass(char &pid) : Pass(PT_Region, pid) {}
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// @name To be implemented by every RegionPass
+  ///
+  //@{
+  /// @brief Run the pass on a specific Region
+  ///
+  /// Accessing regions not contained in the current region is not allowed.
+  ///
+  /// @param R The region this pass is run on.
+  /// @param RGM The RegionPassManager that manages this Pass.
+  ///
+  /// @return True if the pass modifies this Region.
+  virtual bool runOnRegion(Region *R, RGPassManager &RGM) = 0;
+
+  /// @brief Get a pass to print the LLVM IR in the region.
+  ///
+  /// @param O      The ouput stream to print the Region.
+  /// @param Banner The banner to separate different printed passes.
+  ///
+  /// @return The pass to print the LLVM IR in the region.
+  Pass *createPrinterPass(raw_ostream &O, const std::string &Banner) const;
+
+  using llvm::Pass::doInitialization;
+  using llvm::Pass::doFinalization;
+
+  virtual bool doInitialization(Region *R, RGPassManager &RGM) { return false; }
+  virtual bool doFinalization() { return false; }
+  //@}
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// @name PassManager API
+  ///
+  //@{
+  void preparePassManager(PMStack &PMS);
+
+  virtual void assignPassManager(PMStack &PMS,
+    PassManagerType PMT = PMT_RegionPassManager);
+
+  virtual PassManagerType getPotentialPassManagerType() const {
+    return PMT_RegionPassManager;
+  }
+  //@}
+};
+
+/// @brief The pass manager to schedule RegionPasses.
+class RGPassManager : public FunctionPass, public PMDataManager {
+  std::deque<Region*> RQ;
+  bool skipThisRegion;
+  bool redoThisRegion;
+  RegionInfo *RI;
+  Region *CurrentRegion;
+
+public:
+  static char ID;
+  explicit RGPassManager();
+
+  /// @brief Execute all of the passes scheduled for execution.
+  ///
+  /// @return True if any of the passes modifies the function.
+  bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+
+  /// Pass Manager itself does not invalidate any analysis info.
+  /// RGPassManager needs RegionInfo.
+  void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &Info) const;
+
+  virtual const char *getPassName() const {
+    return "Region Pass Manager";
+  }
+
+  virtual PMDataManager *getAsPMDataManager() { return this; }
+  virtual Pass *getAsPass() { return this; }
+
+  /// @brief Print passes managed by this manager.
+  void dumpPassStructure(unsigned Offset);
+
+  /// @brief Get passes contained by this manager.
+  Pass *getContainedPass(unsigned N) {
+    assert(N < PassVector.size() && "Pass number out of range!");
+    Pass *FP = static_cast<Pass *>(PassVector[N]);
+    return FP;
+  }
+
+  virtual PassManagerType getPassManagerType() const {
+    return PMT_RegionPassManager;
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/RegionPrinter.h

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//===-- RegionPrinter.h - Region printer external interface -----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines external functions that can be called to explicitly
+// instantiate the region printer.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONPRINTER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_REGIONPRINTER_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class FunctionPass;
+  FunctionPass *createRegionViewerPass();
+  FunctionPass *createRegionOnlyViewerPass();
+  FunctionPass *createRegionPrinterPass();
+  FunctionPass *createRegionOnlyPrinterPass();
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolution.h

@@ -0,0 +1,893 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolution.h - Scalar Evolution -------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// The ScalarEvolution class is an LLVM pass which can be used to analyze and
+// categorize scalar expressions in loops.  It specializes in recognizing
+// general induction variables, representing them with the abstract and opaque
+// SCEV class.  Given this analysis, trip counts of loops and other important
+// properties can be obtained.
+//
+// This analysis is primarily useful for induction variable substitution and
+// strength reduction.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTION_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTION_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/FoldingSet.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Allocator.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ConstantRange.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+#include <map>
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class APInt;
+  class Constant;
+  class ConstantInt;
+  class DominatorTree;
+  class Type;
+  class ScalarEvolution;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class TargetLibraryInfo;
+  class LLVMContext;
+  class Loop;
+  class LoopInfo;
+  class Operator;
+  class SCEVUnknown;
+  class SCEV;
+  template<> struct FoldingSetTrait<SCEV>;
+
+  /// SCEV - This class represents an analyzed expression in the program.  These
+  /// are opaque objects that the client is not allowed to do much with
+  /// directly.
+  ///
+  class SCEV : public FoldingSetNode {
+    friend struct FoldingSetTrait<SCEV>;
+
+    /// FastID - A reference to an Interned FoldingSetNodeID for this node.
+    /// The ScalarEvolution's BumpPtrAllocator holds the data.
+    FoldingSetNodeIDRef FastID;
+
+    // The SCEV baseclass this node corresponds to
+    const unsigned short SCEVType;
+
+  protected:
+    /// SubclassData - This field is initialized to zero and may be used in
+    /// subclasses to store miscellaneous information.
+    unsigned short SubclassData;
+
+  private:
+    SCEV(const SCEV &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+    void operator=(const SCEV &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  public:
+    /// NoWrapFlags are bitfield indices into SubclassData.
+    ///
+    /// Add and Mul expressions may have no-unsigned-wrap <NUW> or
+    /// no-signed-wrap <NSW> properties, which are derived from the IR
+    /// operator. NSW is a misnomer that we use to mean no signed overflow or
+    /// underflow.
+    ///
+    /// AddRec expression may have a no-self-wraparound <NW> property if the
+    /// result can never reach the start value. This property is independent of
+    /// the actual start value and step direction. Self-wraparound is defined
+    /// purely in terms of the recurrence's loop, step size, and
+    /// bitwidth. Formally, a recurrence with no self-wraparound satisfies:
+    /// abs(step) * max-iteration(loop) <= unsigned-max(bitwidth).
+    ///
+    /// Note that NUW and NSW are also valid properties of a recurrence, and
+    /// either implies NW. For convenience, NW will be set for a recurrence
+    /// whenever either NUW or NSW are set.
+    enum NoWrapFlags { FlagAnyWrap = 0,          // No guarantee.
+                       FlagNW      = (1 << 0),   // No self-wrap.
+                       FlagNUW     = (1 << 1),   // No unsigned wrap.
+                       FlagNSW     = (1 << 2),   // No signed wrap.
+                       NoWrapMask  = (1 << 3) -1 };
+
+    explicit SCEV(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID, unsigned SCEVTy) :
+      FastID(ID), SCEVType(SCEVTy), SubclassData(0) {}
+
+    unsigned getSCEVType() const { return SCEVType; }
+
+    /// getType - Return the LLVM type of this SCEV expression.
+    ///
+    Type *getType() const;
+
+    /// isZero - Return true if the expression is a constant zero.
+    ///
+    bool isZero() const;
+
+    /// isOne - Return true if the expression is a constant one.
+    ///
+    bool isOne() const;
+
+    /// isAllOnesValue - Return true if the expression is a constant
+    /// all-ones value.
+    ///
+    bool isAllOnesValue() const;
+
+    /// isNonConstantNegative - Return true if the specified scev is negated,
+    /// but not a constant.
+    bool isNonConstantNegative() const;
+
+    /// print - Print out the internal representation of this scalar to the
+    /// specified stream.  This should really only be used for debugging
+    /// purposes.
+    void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
+
+    /// dump - This method is used for debugging.
+    ///
+    void dump() const;
+  };
+
+  // Specialize FoldingSetTrait for SCEV to avoid needing to compute
+  // temporary FoldingSetNodeID values.
+  template<> struct FoldingSetTrait<SCEV> : DefaultFoldingSetTrait<SCEV> {
+    static void Profile(const SCEV &X, FoldingSetNodeID& ID) {
+      ID = X.FastID;
+    }
+    static bool Equals(const SCEV &X, const FoldingSetNodeID &ID,
+                       unsigned IDHash, FoldingSetNodeID &TempID) {
+      return ID == X.FastID;
+    }
+    static unsigned ComputeHash(const SCEV &X, FoldingSetNodeID &TempID) {
+      return X.FastID.ComputeHash();
+    }
+  };
+
+  inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const SCEV &S) {
+    S.print(OS);
+    return OS;
+  }
+
+  /// SCEVCouldNotCompute - An object of this class is returned by queries that
+  /// could not be answered.  For example, if you ask for the number of
+  /// iterations of a linked-list traversal loop, you will get one of these.
+  /// None of the standard SCEV operations are valid on this class, it is just a
+  /// marker.
+  struct SCEVCouldNotCompute : public SCEV {
+    SCEVCouldNotCompute();
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static bool classof(const SCEV *S);
+  };
+
+  /// ScalarEvolution - This class is the main scalar evolution driver.  Because
+  /// client code (intentionally) can't do much with the SCEV objects directly,
+  /// they must ask this class for services.
+  ///
+  class ScalarEvolution : public FunctionPass {
+  public:
+    /// LoopDisposition - An enum describing the relationship between a
+    /// SCEV and a loop.
+    enum LoopDisposition {
+      LoopVariant,    ///< The SCEV is loop-variant (unknown).
+      LoopInvariant,  ///< The SCEV is loop-invariant.
+      LoopComputable  ///< The SCEV varies predictably with the loop.
+    };
+
+    /// BlockDisposition - An enum describing the relationship between a
+    /// SCEV and a basic block.
+    enum BlockDisposition {
+      DoesNotDominateBlock,  ///< The SCEV does not dominate the block.
+      DominatesBlock,        ///< The SCEV dominates the block.
+      ProperlyDominatesBlock ///< The SCEV properly dominates the block.
+    };
+
+    /// Convenient NoWrapFlags manipulation that hides enum casts and is
+    /// visible in the ScalarEvolution name space.
+    static SCEV::NoWrapFlags maskFlags(SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags, int Mask) {
+      return (SCEV::NoWrapFlags)(Flags & Mask);
+    }
+    static SCEV::NoWrapFlags setFlags(SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags,
+                                      SCEV::NoWrapFlags OnFlags) {
+      return (SCEV::NoWrapFlags)(Flags | OnFlags);
+    }
+    static SCEV::NoWrapFlags clearFlags(SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags,
+                                        SCEV::NoWrapFlags OffFlags) {
+      return (SCEV::NoWrapFlags)(Flags & ~OffFlags);
+    }
+
+  private:
+    /// SCEVCallbackVH - A CallbackVH to arrange for ScalarEvolution to be
+    /// notified whenever a Value is deleted.
+    class SCEVCallbackVH : public CallbackVH {
+      ScalarEvolution *SE;
+      virtual void deleted();
+      virtual void allUsesReplacedWith(Value *New);
+    public:
+      SCEVCallbackVH(Value *V, ScalarEvolution *SE = 0);
+    };
+
+    friend class SCEVCallbackVH;
+    friend class SCEVExpander;
+    friend class SCEVUnknown;
+
+    /// F - The function we are analyzing.
+    ///
+    Function *F;
+
+    /// LI - The loop information for the function we are currently analyzing.
+    ///
+    LoopInfo *LI;
+
+    /// TD - The target data information for the target we are targeting.
+    ///
+    DataLayout *TD;
+
+    /// TLI - The target library information for the target we are targeting.
+    ///
+    TargetLibraryInfo *TLI;
+
+    /// DT - The dominator tree.
+    ///
+    DominatorTree *DT;
+
+    /// CouldNotCompute - This SCEV is used to represent unknown trip
+    /// counts and things.
+    SCEVCouldNotCompute CouldNotCompute;
+
+    /// ValueExprMapType - The typedef for ValueExprMap.
+    ///
+    typedef DenseMap<SCEVCallbackVH, const SCEV *, DenseMapInfo<Value *> >
+      ValueExprMapType;
+
+    /// ValueExprMap - This is a cache of the values we have analyzed so far.
+    ///
+    ValueExprMapType ValueExprMap;
+
+    /// Mark predicate values currently being processed by isImpliedCond.
+    DenseSet<Value*> PendingLoopPredicates;
+
+    /// ExitLimit - Information about the number of loop iterations for
+    /// which a loop exit's branch condition evaluates to the not-taken path.
+    /// This is a temporary pair of exact and max expressions that are
+    /// eventually summarized in ExitNotTakenInfo and BackedgeTakenInfo.
+    struct ExitLimit {
+      const SCEV *Exact;
+      const SCEV *Max;
+
+      /*implicit*/ ExitLimit(const SCEV *E) : Exact(E), Max(E) {}
+
+      ExitLimit(const SCEV *E, const SCEV *M) : Exact(E), Max(M) {}
+
+      /// hasAnyInfo - Test whether this ExitLimit contains any computed
+      /// information, or whether it's all SCEVCouldNotCompute values.
+      bool hasAnyInfo() const {
+        return !isa<SCEVCouldNotCompute>(Exact) ||
+          !isa<SCEVCouldNotCompute>(Max);
+      }
+    };
+
+    /// ExitNotTakenInfo - Information about the number of times a particular
+    /// loop exit may be reached before exiting the loop.
+    struct ExitNotTakenInfo {
+      AssertingVH<BasicBlock> ExitingBlock;
+      const SCEV *ExactNotTaken;
+      PointerIntPair<ExitNotTakenInfo*, 1> NextExit;
+
+      ExitNotTakenInfo() : ExitingBlock(0), ExactNotTaken(0) {}
+
+      /// isCompleteList - Return true if all loop exits are computable.
+      bool isCompleteList() const {
+        return NextExit.getInt() == 0;
+      }
+
+      void setIncomplete() { NextExit.setInt(1); }
+
+      /// getNextExit - Return a pointer to the next exit's not-taken info.
+      ExitNotTakenInfo *getNextExit() const {
+        return NextExit.getPointer();
+      }
+
+      void setNextExit(ExitNotTakenInfo *ENT) { NextExit.setPointer(ENT); }
+    };
+
+    /// BackedgeTakenInfo - Information about the backedge-taken count
+    /// of a loop. This currently includes an exact count and a maximum count.
+    ///
+    class BackedgeTakenInfo {
+      /// ExitNotTaken - A list of computable exits and their not-taken counts.
+      /// Loops almost never have more than one computable exit.
+      ExitNotTakenInfo ExitNotTaken;
+
+      /// Max - An expression indicating the least maximum backedge-taken
+      /// count of the loop that is known, or a SCEVCouldNotCompute.
+      const SCEV *Max;
+
+    public:
+      BackedgeTakenInfo() : Max(0) {}
+
+      /// Initialize BackedgeTakenInfo from a list of exact exit counts.
+      BackedgeTakenInfo(
+        SmallVectorImpl< std::pair<BasicBlock *, const SCEV *> > &ExitCounts,
+        bool Complete, const SCEV *MaxCount);
+
+      /// hasAnyInfo - Test whether this BackedgeTakenInfo contains any
+      /// computed information, or whether it's all SCEVCouldNotCompute
+      /// values.
+      bool hasAnyInfo() const {
+        return ExitNotTaken.ExitingBlock || !isa<SCEVCouldNotCompute>(Max);
+      }
+
+      /// getExact - Return an expression indicating the exact backedge-taken
+      /// count of the loop if it is known, or SCEVCouldNotCompute
+      /// otherwise. This is the number of times the loop header can be
+      /// guaranteed to execute, minus one.
+      const SCEV *getExact(ScalarEvolution *SE) const;
+
+      /// getExact - Return the number of times this loop exit may fall through
+      /// to the back edge, or SCEVCouldNotCompute. The loop is guaranteed not
+      /// to exit via this block before this number of iterations, but may exit
+      /// via another block.
+      const SCEV *getExact(BasicBlock *ExitingBlock, ScalarEvolution *SE) const;
+
+      /// getMax - Get the max backedge taken count for the loop.
+      const SCEV *getMax(ScalarEvolution *SE) const;
+
+      /// Return true if any backedge taken count expressions refer to the given
+      /// subexpression.
+      bool hasOperand(const SCEV *S, ScalarEvolution *SE) const;
+
+      /// clear - Invalidate this result and free associated memory.
+      void clear();
+    };
+
+    /// BackedgeTakenCounts - Cache the backedge-taken count of the loops for
+    /// this function as they are computed.
+    DenseMap<const Loop*, BackedgeTakenInfo> BackedgeTakenCounts;
+
+    /// ConstantEvolutionLoopExitValue - This map contains entries for all of
+    /// the PHI instructions that we attempt to compute constant evolutions for.
+    /// This allows us to avoid potentially expensive recomputation of these
+    /// properties.  An instruction maps to null if we are unable to compute its
+    /// exit value.
+    DenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> ConstantEvolutionLoopExitValue;
+
+    /// ValuesAtScopes - This map contains entries for all the expressions
+    /// that we attempt to compute getSCEVAtScope information for, which can
+    /// be expensive in extreme cases.
+    DenseMap<const SCEV *,
+             std::map<const Loop *, const SCEV *> > ValuesAtScopes;
+
+    /// LoopDispositions - Memoized computeLoopDisposition results.
+    DenseMap<const SCEV *,
+             std::map<const Loop *, LoopDisposition> > LoopDispositions;
+
+    /// computeLoopDisposition - Compute a LoopDisposition value.
+    LoopDisposition computeLoopDisposition(const SCEV *S, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// BlockDispositions - Memoized computeBlockDisposition results.
+    DenseMap<const SCEV *,
+             std::map<const BasicBlock *, BlockDisposition> > BlockDispositions;
+
+    /// computeBlockDisposition - Compute a BlockDisposition value.
+    BlockDisposition computeBlockDisposition(const SCEV *S, const BasicBlock *BB);
+
+    /// UnsignedRanges - Memoized results from getUnsignedRange
+    DenseMap<const SCEV *, ConstantRange> UnsignedRanges;
+
+    /// SignedRanges - Memoized results from getSignedRange
+    DenseMap<const SCEV *, ConstantRange> SignedRanges;
+
+    /// setUnsignedRange - Set the memoized unsigned range for the given SCEV.
+    const ConstantRange &setUnsignedRange(const SCEV *S,
+                                          const ConstantRange &CR) {
+      std::pair<DenseMap<const SCEV *, ConstantRange>::iterator, bool> Pair =
+        UnsignedRanges.insert(std::make_pair(S, CR));
+      if (!Pair.second)
+        Pair.first->second = CR;
+      return Pair.first->second;
+    }
+
+    /// setUnsignedRange - Set the memoized signed range for the given SCEV.
+    const ConstantRange &setSignedRange(const SCEV *S,
+                                        const ConstantRange &CR) {
+      std::pair<DenseMap<const SCEV *, ConstantRange>::iterator, bool> Pair =
+        SignedRanges.insert(std::make_pair(S, CR));
+      if (!Pair.second)
+        Pair.first->second = CR;
+      return Pair.first->second;
+    }
+
+    /// createSCEV - We know that there is no SCEV for the specified value.
+    /// Analyze the expression.
+    const SCEV *createSCEV(Value *V);
+
+    /// createNodeForPHI - Provide the special handling we need to analyze PHI
+    /// SCEVs.
+    const SCEV *createNodeForPHI(PHINode *PN);
+
+    /// createNodeForGEP - Provide the special handling we need to analyze GEP
+    /// SCEVs.
+    const SCEV *createNodeForGEP(GEPOperator *GEP);
+
+    /// computeSCEVAtScope - Implementation code for getSCEVAtScope; called
+    /// at most once for each SCEV+Loop pair.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *computeSCEVAtScope(const SCEV *S, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// ForgetSymbolicValue - This looks up computed SCEV values for all
+    /// instructions that depend on the given instruction and removes them from
+    /// the ValueExprMap map if they reference SymName. This is used during PHI
+    /// resolution.
+    void ForgetSymbolicName(Instruction *I, const SCEV *SymName);
+
+    /// getBECount - Subtract the end and start values and divide by the step,
+    /// rounding up, to get the number of times the backedge is executed. Return
+    /// CouldNotCompute if an intermediate computation overflows.
+    const SCEV *getBECount(const SCEV *Start,
+                           const SCEV *End,
+                           const SCEV *Step,
+                           bool NoWrap);
+
+    /// getBackedgeTakenInfo - Return the BackedgeTakenInfo for the given
+    /// loop, lazily computing new values if the loop hasn't been analyzed
+    /// yet.
+    const BackedgeTakenInfo &getBackedgeTakenInfo(const Loop *L);
+
+    /// ComputeBackedgeTakenCount - Compute the number of times the specified
+    /// loop will iterate.
+    BackedgeTakenInfo ComputeBackedgeTakenCount(const Loop *L);
+
+    /// ComputeExitLimit - Compute the number of times the backedge of the
+    /// specified loop will execute if it exits via the specified block.
+    ExitLimit ComputeExitLimit(const Loop *L, BasicBlock *ExitingBlock);
+
+    /// ComputeExitLimitFromCond - Compute the number of times the backedge of
+    /// the specified loop will execute if its exit condition were a conditional
+    /// branch of ExitCond, TBB, and FBB.
+    ExitLimit ComputeExitLimitFromCond(const Loop *L,
+                                       Value *ExitCond,
+                                       BasicBlock *TBB,
+                                       BasicBlock *FBB);
+
+    /// ComputeExitLimitFromICmp - Compute the number of times the backedge of
+    /// the specified loop will execute if its exit condition were a conditional
+    /// branch of the ICmpInst ExitCond, TBB, and FBB.
+    ExitLimit ComputeExitLimitFromICmp(const Loop *L,
+                                       ICmpInst *ExitCond,
+                                       BasicBlock *TBB,
+                                       BasicBlock *FBB);
+
+    /// ComputeLoadConstantCompareExitLimit - Given an exit condition
+    /// of 'icmp op load X, cst', try to see if we can compute the
+    /// backedge-taken count.
+    ExitLimit ComputeLoadConstantCompareExitLimit(LoadInst *LI,
+                                                  Constant *RHS,
+                                                  const Loop *L,
+                                                  ICmpInst::Predicate p);
+
+    /// ComputeExitCountExhaustively - If the loop is known to execute a
+    /// constant number of times (the condition evolves only from constants),
+    /// try to evaluate a few iterations of the loop until we get the exit
+    /// condition gets a value of ExitWhen (true or false).  If we cannot
+    /// evaluate the exit count of the loop, return CouldNotCompute.
+    const SCEV *ComputeExitCountExhaustively(const Loop *L,
+                                             Value *Cond,
+                                             bool ExitWhen);
+
+    /// HowFarToZero - Return the number of times an exit condition comparing
+    /// the specified value to zero will execute.  If not computable, return
+    /// CouldNotCompute.
+    ExitLimit HowFarToZero(const SCEV *V, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// HowFarToNonZero - Return the number of times an exit condition checking
+    /// the specified value for nonzero will execute.  If not computable, return
+    /// CouldNotCompute.
+    ExitLimit HowFarToNonZero(const SCEV *V, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// HowManyLessThans - Return the number of times an exit condition
+    /// containing the specified less-than comparison will execute.  If not
+    /// computable, return CouldNotCompute. isSigned specifies whether the
+    /// less-than is signed.
+    ExitLimit HowManyLessThans(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                               const Loop *L, bool isSigned);
+
+    /// getPredecessorWithUniqueSuccessorForBB - Return a predecessor of BB
+    /// (which may not be an immediate predecessor) which has exactly one
+    /// successor from which BB is reachable, or null if no such block is
+    /// found.
+    std::pair<BasicBlock *, BasicBlock *>
+    getPredecessorWithUniqueSuccessorForBB(BasicBlock *BB);
+
+    /// isImpliedCond - Test whether the condition described by Pred, LHS, and
+    /// RHS is true whenever the given FoundCondValue value evaluates to true.
+    bool isImpliedCond(ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                       const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                       Value *FoundCondValue,
+                       bool Inverse);
+
+    /// isImpliedCondOperands - Test whether the condition described by Pred,
+    /// LHS, and RHS is true whenever the condition described by Pred, FoundLHS,
+    /// and FoundRHS is true.
+    bool isImpliedCondOperands(ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                               const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                               const SCEV *FoundLHS, const SCEV *FoundRHS);
+
+    /// isImpliedCondOperandsHelper - Test whether the condition described by
+    /// Pred, LHS, and RHS is true whenever the condition described by Pred,
+    /// FoundLHS, and FoundRHS is true.
+    bool isImpliedCondOperandsHelper(ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                                     const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                                     const SCEV *FoundLHS,
+                                     const SCEV *FoundRHS);
+
+    /// getConstantEvolutionLoopExitValue - If we know that the specified Phi is
+    /// in the header of its containing loop, we know the loop executes a
+    /// constant number of times, and the PHI node is just a recurrence
+    /// involving constants, fold it.
+    Constant *getConstantEvolutionLoopExitValue(PHINode *PN, const APInt& BEs,
+                                                const Loop *L);
+
+    /// isKnownPredicateWithRanges - Test if the given expression is known to
+    /// satisfy the condition described by Pred and the known constant ranges
+    /// of LHS and RHS.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownPredicateWithRanges(ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                                    const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+
+    /// forgetMemoizedResults - Drop memoized information computed for S.
+    void forgetMemoizedResults(const SCEV *S);
+
+  public:
+    static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
+    ScalarEvolution();
+
+    LLVMContext &getContext() const { return F->getContext(); }
+
+    /// isSCEVable - Test if values of the given type are analyzable within
+    /// the SCEV framework. This primarily includes integer types, and it
+    /// can optionally include pointer types if the ScalarEvolution class
+    /// has access to target-specific information.
+    bool isSCEVable(Type *Ty) const;
+
+    /// getTypeSizeInBits - Return the size in bits of the specified type,
+    /// for which isSCEVable must return true.
+    uint64_t getTypeSizeInBits(Type *Ty) const;
+
+    /// getEffectiveSCEVType - Return a type with the same bitwidth as
+    /// the given type and which represents how SCEV will treat the given
+    /// type, for which isSCEVable must return true. For pointer types,
+    /// this is the pointer-sized integer type.
+    Type *getEffectiveSCEVType(Type *Ty) const;
+
+    /// getSCEV - Return a SCEV expression for the full generality of the
+    /// specified expression.
+    const SCEV *getSCEV(Value *V);
+
+    const SCEV *getConstant(ConstantInt *V);
+    const SCEV *getConstant(const APInt& Val);
+    const SCEV *getConstant(Type *Ty, uint64_t V, bool isSigned = false);
+    const SCEV *getTruncateExpr(const SCEV *Op, Type *Ty);
+    const SCEV *getZeroExtendExpr(const SCEV *Op, Type *Ty);
+    const SCEV *getSignExtendExpr(const SCEV *Op, Type *Ty);
+    const SCEV *getAnyExtendExpr(const SCEV *Op, Type *Ty);
+    const SCEV *getAddExpr(SmallVectorImpl<const SCEV *> &Ops,
+                           SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap);
+    const SCEV *getAddExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                           SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Ops;
+      Ops.push_back(LHS);
+      Ops.push_back(RHS);
+      return getAddExpr(Ops, Flags);
+    }
+    const SCEV *getAddExpr(const SCEV *Op0, const SCEV *Op1, const SCEV *Op2,
+                           SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 3> Ops;
+      Ops.push_back(Op0);
+      Ops.push_back(Op1);
+      Ops.push_back(Op2);
+      return getAddExpr(Ops, Flags);
+    }
+    const SCEV *getMulExpr(SmallVectorImpl<const SCEV *> &Ops,
+                           SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap);
+    const SCEV *getMulExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                           SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap)
+    {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Ops;
+      Ops.push_back(LHS);
+      Ops.push_back(RHS);
+      return getMulExpr(Ops, Flags);
+    }
+    const SCEV *getMulExpr(const SCEV *Op0, const SCEV *Op1, const SCEV *Op2,
+                           SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 3> Ops;
+      Ops.push_back(Op0);
+      Ops.push_back(Op1);
+      Ops.push_back(Op2);
+      return getMulExpr(Ops, Flags);
+    }
+    const SCEV *getUDivExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+    const SCEV *getAddRecExpr(const SCEV *Start, const SCEV *Step,
+                              const Loop *L, SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags);
+    const SCEV *getAddRecExpr(SmallVectorImpl<const SCEV *> &Operands,
+                              const Loop *L, SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags);
+    const SCEV *getAddRecExpr(const SmallVectorImpl<const SCEV *> &Operands,
+                              const Loop *L, SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 4> NewOp(Operands.begin(), Operands.end());
+      return getAddRecExpr(NewOp, L, Flags);
+    }
+    const SCEV *getSMaxExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+    const SCEV *getSMaxExpr(SmallVectorImpl<const SCEV *> &Operands);
+    const SCEV *getUMaxExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+    const SCEV *getUMaxExpr(SmallVectorImpl<const SCEV *> &Operands);
+    const SCEV *getSMinExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+    const SCEV *getUMinExpr(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+    const SCEV *getUnknown(Value *V);
+    const SCEV *getCouldNotCompute();
+
+    /// getSizeOfExpr - Return an expression for sizeof on the given type.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getSizeOfExpr(Type *AllocTy);
+
+    /// getAlignOfExpr - Return an expression for alignof on the given type.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getAlignOfExpr(Type *AllocTy);
+
+    /// getOffsetOfExpr - Return an expression for offsetof on the given field.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getOffsetOfExpr(StructType *STy, unsigned FieldNo);
+
+    /// getOffsetOfExpr - Return an expression for offsetof on the given field.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getOffsetOfExpr(Type *CTy, Constant *FieldNo);
+
+    /// getNegativeSCEV - Return the SCEV object corresponding to -V.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getNegativeSCEV(const SCEV *V);
+
+    /// getNotSCEV - Return the SCEV object corresponding to ~V.
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getNotSCEV(const SCEV *V);
+
+    /// getMinusSCEV - Return LHS-RHS.  Minus is represented in SCEV as A+B*-1.
+    const SCEV *getMinusSCEV(const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS,
+                             SCEV::NoWrapFlags Flags = SCEV::FlagAnyWrap);
+
+    /// getTruncateOrZeroExtend - Return a SCEV corresponding to a conversion
+    /// of the input value to the specified type.  If the type must be
+    /// extended, it is zero extended.
+    const SCEV *getTruncateOrZeroExtend(const SCEV *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getTruncateOrSignExtend - Return a SCEV corresponding to a conversion
+    /// of the input value to the specified type.  If the type must be
+    /// extended, it is sign extended.
+    const SCEV *getTruncateOrSignExtend(const SCEV *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getNoopOrZeroExtend - Return a SCEV corresponding to a conversion of
+    /// the input value to the specified type.  If the type must be extended,
+    /// it is zero extended.  The conversion must not be narrowing.
+    const SCEV *getNoopOrZeroExtend(const SCEV *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getNoopOrSignExtend - Return a SCEV corresponding to a conversion of
+    /// the input value to the specified type.  If the type must be extended,
+    /// it is sign extended.  The conversion must not be narrowing.
+    const SCEV *getNoopOrSignExtend(const SCEV *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getNoopOrAnyExtend - Return a SCEV corresponding to a conversion of
+    /// the input value to the specified type. If the type must be extended,
+    /// it is extended with unspecified bits. The conversion must not be
+    /// narrowing.
+    const SCEV *getNoopOrAnyExtend(const SCEV *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getTruncateOrNoop - Return a SCEV corresponding to a conversion of the
+    /// input value to the specified type.  The conversion must not be
+    /// widening.
+    const SCEV *getTruncateOrNoop(const SCEV *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getUMaxFromMismatchedTypes - Promote the operands to the wider of
+    /// the types using zero-extension, and then perform a umax operation
+    /// with them.
+    const SCEV *getUMaxFromMismatchedTypes(const SCEV *LHS,
+                                           const SCEV *RHS);
+
+    /// getUMinFromMismatchedTypes - Promote the operands to the wider of
+    /// the types using zero-extension, and then perform a umin operation
+    /// with them.
+    const SCEV *getUMinFromMismatchedTypes(const SCEV *LHS,
+                                           const SCEV *RHS);
+
+    /// getPointerBase - Transitively follow the chain of pointer-type operands
+    /// until reaching a SCEV that does not have a single pointer operand. This
+    /// returns a SCEVUnknown pointer for well-formed pointer-type expressions,
+    /// but corner cases do exist.
+    const SCEV *getPointerBase(const SCEV *V);
+
+    /// getSCEVAtScope - Return a SCEV expression for the specified value
+    /// at the specified scope in the program.  The L value specifies a loop
+    /// nest to evaluate the expression at, where null is the top-level or a
+    /// specified loop is immediately inside of the loop.
+    ///
+    /// This method can be used to compute the exit value for a variable defined
+    /// in a loop by querying what the value will hold in the parent loop.
+    ///
+    /// In the case that a relevant loop exit value cannot be computed, the
+    /// original value V is returned.
+    const SCEV *getSCEVAtScope(const SCEV *S, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// getSCEVAtScope - This is a convenience function which does
+    /// getSCEVAtScope(getSCEV(V), L).
+    const SCEV *getSCEVAtScope(Value *V, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// isLoopEntryGuardedByCond - Test whether entry to the loop is protected
+    /// by a conditional between LHS and RHS.  This is used to help avoid max
+    /// expressions in loop trip counts, and to eliminate casts.
+    bool isLoopEntryGuardedByCond(const Loop *L, ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                                  const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+
+    /// isLoopBackedgeGuardedByCond - Test whether the backedge of the loop is
+    /// protected by a conditional between LHS and RHS.  This is used to
+    /// to eliminate casts.
+    bool isLoopBackedgeGuardedByCond(const Loop *L, ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                                     const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+
+    /// getSmallConstantTripCount - Returns the maximum trip count of this loop
+    /// as a normal unsigned value. Returns 0 if the trip count is unknown or
+    /// not constant. This "trip count" assumes that control exits via
+    /// ExitingBlock. More precisely, it is the number of times that control may
+    /// reach ExitingBlock before taking the branch. For loops with multiple
+    /// exits, it may not be the number times that the loop header executes if
+    /// the loop exits prematurely via another branch.
+    unsigned getSmallConstantTripCount(Loop *L, BasicBlock *ExitingBlock);
+
+    /// getSmallConstantTripMultiple - Returns the largest constant divisor of
+    /// the trip count of this loop as a normal unsigned value, if
+    /// possible. This means that the actual trip count is always a multiple of
+    /// the returned value (don't forget the trip count could very well be zero
+    /// as well!). As explained in the comments for getSmallConstantTripCount,
+    /// this assumes that control exits the loop via ExitingBlock.
+    unsigned getSmallConstantTripMultiple(Loop *L, BasicBlock *ExitingBlock);
+
+    // getExitCount - Get the expression for the number of loop iterations for
+    // which this loop is guaranteed not to exit via ExitingBlock. Otherwise
+    // return SCEVCouldNotCompute.
+    const SCEV *getExitCount(Loop *L, BasicBlock *ExitingBlock);
+
+    /// getBackedgeTakenCount - If the specified loop has a predictable
+    /// backedge-taken count, return it, otherwise return a SCEVCouldNotCompute
+    /// object. The backedge-taken count is the number of times the loop header
+    /// will be branched to from within the loop. This is one less than the
+    /// trip count of the loop, since it doesn't count the first iteration,
+    /// when the header is branched to from outside the loop.
+    ///
+    /// Note that it is not valid to call this method on a loop without a
+    /// loop-invariant backedge-taken count (see
+    /// hasLoopInvariantBackedgeTakenCount).
+    ///
+    const SCEV *getBackedgeTakenCount(const Loop *L);
+
+    /// getMaxBackedgeTakenCount - Similar to getBackedgeTakenCount, except
+    /// return the least SCEV value that is known never to be less than the
+    /// actual backedge taken count.
+    const SCEV *getMaxBackedgeTakenCount(const Loop *L);
+
+    /// hasLoopInvariantBackedgeTakenCount - Return true if the specified loop
+    /// has an analyzable loop-invariant backedge-taken count.
+    bool hasLoopInvariantBackedgeTakenCount(const Loop *L);
+
+    /// forgetLoop - This method should be called by the client when it has
+    /// changed a loop in a way that may effect ScalarEvolution's ability to
+    /// compute a trip count, or if the loop is deleted.
+    void forgetLoop(const Loop *L);
+
+    /// forgetValue - This method should be called by the client when it has
+    /// changed a value in a way that may effect its value, or which may
+    /// disconnect it from a def-use chain linking it to a loop.
+    void forgetValue(Value *V);
+
+    /// GetMinTrailingZeros - Determine the minimum number of zero bits that S
+    /// is guaranteed to end in (at every loop iteration).  It is, at the same
+    /// time, the minimum number of times S is divisible by 2.  For example,
+    /// given {4,+,8} it returns 2.  If S is guaranteed to be 0, it returns the
+    /// bitwidth of S.
+    uint32_t GetMinTrailingZeros(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// getUnsignedRange - Determine the unsigned range for a particular SCEV.
+    ///
+    ConstantRange getUnsignedRange(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// getSignedRange - Determine the signed range for a particular SCEV.
+    ///
+    ConstantRange getSignedRange(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// isKnownNegative - Test if the given expression is known to be negative.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownNegative(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// isKnownPositive - Test if the given expression is known to be positive.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownPositive(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// isKnownNonNegative - Test if the given expression is known to be
+    /// non-negative.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownNonNegative(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// isKnownNonPositive - Test if the given expression is known to be
+    /// non-positive.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownNonPositive(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// isKnownNonZero - Test if the given expression is known to be
+    /// non-zero.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownNonZero(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// isKnownPredicate - Test if the given expression is known to satisfy
+    /// the condition described by Pred, LHS, and RHS.
+    ///
+    bool isKnownPredicate(ICmpInst::Predicate Pred,
+                          const SCEV *LHS, const SCEV *RHS);
+
+    /// SimplifyICmpOperands - Simplify LHS and RHS in a comparison with
+    /// predicate Pred. Return true iff any changes were made. If the
+    /// operands are provably equal or unequal, LHS and RHS are set to
+    /// the same value and Pred is set to either ICMP_EQ or ICMP_NE.
+    ///
+    bool SimplifyICmpOperands(ICmpInst::Predicate &Pred,
+                              const SCEV *&LHS,
+                              const SCEV *&RHS,
+                              unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+    /// getLoopDisposition - Return the "disposition" of the given SCEV with
+    /// respect to the given loop.
+    LoopDisposition getLoopDisposition(const SCEV *S, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// isLoopInvariant - Return true if the value of the given SCEV is
+    /// unchanging in the specified loop.
+    bool isLoopInvariant(const SCEV *S, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// hasComputableLoopEvolution - Return true if the given SCEV changes value
+    /// in a known way in the specified loop.  This property being true implies
+    /// that the value is variant in the loop AND that we can emit an expression
+    /// to compute the value of the expression at any particular loop iteration.
+    bool hasComputableLoopEvolution(const SCEV *S, const Loop *L);
+
+    /// getLoopDisposition - Return the "disposition" of the given SCEV with
+    /// respect to the given block.
+    BlockDisposition getBlockDisposition(const SCEV *S, const BasicBlock *BB);
+
+    /// dominates - Return true if elements that makes up the given SCEV
+    /// dominate the specified basic block.
+    bool dominates(const SCEV *S, const BasicBlock *BB);
+
+    /// properlyDominates - Return true if elements that makes up the given SCEV
+    /// properly dominate the specified basic block.
+    bool properlyDominates(const SCEV *S, const BasicBlock *BB);
+
+    /// hasOperand - Test whether the given SCEV has Op as a direct or
+    /// indirect operand.
+    bool hasOperand(const SCEV *S, const SCEV *Op) const;
+
+    virtual bool runOnFunction(Function &F);
+    virtual void releaseMemory();
+    virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+    virtual void print(raw_ostream &OS, const Module* = 0) const;
+    virtual void verifyAnalysis() const;
+
+  private:
+    FoldingSet<SCEV> UniqueSCEVs;
+    BumpPtrAllocator SCEVAllocator;
+
+    /// FirstUnknown - The head of a linked list of all SCEVUnknown
+    /// values that have been allocated. This is used by releaseMemory
+    /// to locate them all and call their destructors.
+    SCEVUnknown *FirstUnknown;
+  };
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionExpander.h

@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+//===---- llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionExpander.h - SCEV Exprs --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the classes used to generate code from scalar expressions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTIONEXPANDER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTIONEXPANDER_H
+
+#include "llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionExpressions.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionNormalization.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/TargetFolder.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h"
+#include <set>
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class TargetTransformInfo;
+
+  /// Return true if the given expression is safe to expand in the sense that
+  /// all materialized values are safe to speculate.
+  bool isSafeToExpand(const SCEV *S);
+
+  /// SCEVExpander - This class uses information about analyze scalars to
+  /// rewrite expressions in canonical form.
+  ///
+  /// Clients should create an instance of this class when rewriting is needed,
+  /// and destroy it when finished to allow the release of the associated
+  /// memory.
+  class SCEVExpander : public SCEVVisitor<SCEVExpander, Value*> {
+    ScalarEvolution &SE;
+
+    // New instructions receive a name to identifies them with the current pass.
+    const char* IVName;
+
+    // InsertedExpressions caches Values for reuse, so must track RAUW.
+    std::map<std::pair<const SCEV *, Instruction *>, TrackingVH<Value> >
+      InsertedExpressions;
+    // InsertedValues only flags inserted instructions so needs no RAUW.
+    std::set<AssertingVH<Value> > InsertedValues;
+    std::set<AssertingVH<Value> > InsertedPostIncValues;
+
+    /// RelevantLoops - A memoization of the "relevant" loop for a given SCEV.
+    DenseMap<const SCEV *, const Loop *> RelevantLoops;
+
+    /// PostIncLoops - Addrecs referring to any of the given loops are expanded
+    /// in post-inc mode. For example, expanding {1,+,1}<L> in post-inc mode
+    /// returns the add instruction that adds one to the phi for {0,+,1}<L>,
+    /// as opposed to a new phi starting at 1. This is only supported in
+    /// non-canonical mode.
+    PostIncLoopSet PostIncLoops;
+
+    /// IVIncInsertPos - When this is non-null, addrecs expanded in the
+    /// loop it indicates should be inserted with increments at
+    /// IVIncInsertPos.
+    const Loop *IVIncInsertLoop;
+
+    /// IVIncInsertPos - When expanding addrecs in the IVIncInsertLoop loop,
+    /// insert the IV increment at this position.
+    Instruction *IVIncInsertPos;
+
+    /// Phis that complete an IV chain. Reuse
+    std::set<AssertingVH<PHINode> > ChainedPhis;
+
+    /// CanonicalMode - When true, expressions are expanded in "canonical"
+    /// form. In particular, addrecs are expanded as arithmetic based on
+    /// a canonical induction variable. When false, expression are expanded
+    /// in a more literal form.
+    bool CanonicalMode;
+
+    /// When invoked from LSR, the expander is in "strength reduction" mode. The
+    /// only difference is that phi's are only reused if they are already in
+    /// "expanded" form.
+    bool LSRMode;
+
+    typedef IRBuilder<true, TargetFolder> BuilderType;
+    BuilderType Builder;
+
+#ifndef NDEBUG
+    const char *DebugType;
+#endif
+
+    friend struct SCEVVisitor<SCEVExpander, Value*>;
+
+  public:
+    /// SCEVExpander - Construct a SCEVExpander in "canonical" mode.
+    explicit SCEVExpander(ScalarEvolution &se, const char *name)
+      : SE(se), IVName(name), IVIncInsertLoop(0), IVIncInsertPos(0),
+        CanonicalMode(true), LSRMode(false),
+        Builder(se.getContext(), TargetFolder(se.TD)) {
+#ifndef NDEBUG
+      DebugType = "";
+#endif
+    }
+
+#ifndef NDEBUG
+    void setDebugType(const char* s) { DebugType = s; }
+#endif
+
+    /// clear - Erase the contents of the InsertedExpressions map so that users
+    /// trying to expand the same expression into multiple BasicBlocks or
+    /// different places within the same BasicBlock can do so.
+    void clear() {
+      InsertedExpressions.clear();
+      InsertedValues.clear();
+      InsertedPostIncValues.clear();
+      ChainedPhis.clear();
+    }
+
+    /// getOrInsertCanonicalInductionVariable - This method returns the
+    /// canonical induction variable of the specified type for the specified
+    /// loop (inserting one if there is none).  A canonical induction variable
+    /// starts at zero and steps by one on each iteration.
+    PHINode *getOrInsertCanonicalInductionVariable(const Loop *L, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// getIVIncOperand - Return the induction variable increment's IV operand.
+    Instruction *getIVIncOperand(Instruction *IncV, Instruction *InsertPos,
+                                 bool allowScale);
+
+    /// hoistIVInc - Utility for hoisting an IV increment.
+    bool hoistIVInc(Instruction *IncV, Instruction *InsertPos);
+
+    /// replaceCongruentIVs - replace congruent phis with their most canonical
+    /// representative. Return the number of phis eliminated.
+    unsigned replaceCongruentIVs(Loop *L, const DominatorTree *DT,
+                                 SmallVectorImpl<WeakVH> &DeadInsts,
+                                 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI = NULL);
+
+    /// expandCodeFor - Insert code to directly compute the specified SCEV
+    /// expression into the program.  The inserted code is inserted into the
+    /// specified block.
+    Value *expandCodeFor(const SCEV *SH, Type *Ty, Instruction *I);
+
+    /// setIVIncInsertPos - Set the current IV increment loop and position.
+    void setIVIncInsertPos(const Loop *L, Instruction *Pos) {
+      assert(!CanonicalMode &&
+             "IV increment positions are not supported in CanonicalMode");
+      IVIncInsertLoop = L;
+      IVIncInsertPos = Pos;
+    }
+
+    /// setPostInc - Enable post-inc expansion for addrecs referring to the
+    /// given loops. Post-inc expansion is only supported in non-canonical
+    /// mode.
+    void setPostInc(const PostIncLoopSet &L) {
+      assert(!CanonicalMode &&
+             "Post-inc expansion is not supported in CanonicalMode");
+      PostIncLoops = L;
+    }
+
+    /// clearPostInc - Disable all post-inc expansion.
+    void clearPostInc() {
+      PostIncLoops.clear();
+
+      // When we change the post-inc loop set, cached expansions may no
+      // longer be valid.
+      InsertedPostIncValues.clear();
+    }
+
+    /// disableCanonicalMode - Disable the behavior of expanding expressions in
+    /// canonical form rather than in a more literal form. Non-canonical mode
+    /// is useful for late optimization passes.
+    void disableCanonicalMode() { CanonicalMode = false; }
+
+    void enableLSRMode() { LSRMode = true; }
+
+    /// clearInsertPoint - Clear the current insertion point. This is useful
+    /// if the instruction that had been serving as the insertion point may
+    /// have been deleted.
+    void clearInsertPoint() {
+      Builder.ClearInsertionPoint();
+    }
+
+    /// isInsertedInstruction - Return true if the specified instruction was
+    /// inserted by the code rewriter.  If so, the client should not modify the
+    /// instruction.
+    bool isInsertedInstruction(Instruction *I) const {
+      return InsertedValues.count(I) || InsertedPostIncValues.count(I);
+    }
+
+    void setChainedPhi(PHINode *PN) { ChainedPhis.insert(PN); }
+
+  private:
+    LLVMContext &getContext() const { return SE.getContext(); }
+
+    /// InsertBinop - Insert the specified binary operator, doing a small amount
+    /// of work to avoid inserting an obviously redundant operation.
+    Value *InsertBinop(Instruction::BinaryOps Opcode, Value *LHS, Value *RHS);
+
+    /// ReuseOrCreateCast - Arange for there to be a cast of V to Ty at IP,
+    /// reusing an existing cast if a suitable one exists, moving an existing
+    /// cast if a suitable one exists but isn't in the right place, or
+    /// or creating a new one.
+    Value *ReuseOrCreateCast(Value *V, Type *Ty,
+                             Instruction::CastOps Op,
+                             BasicBlock::iterator IP);
+
+    /// InsertNoopCastOfTo - Insert a cast of V to the specified type,
+    /// which must be possible with a noop cast, doing what we can to
+    /// share the casts.
+    Value *InsertNoopCastOfTo(Value *V, Type *Ty);
+
+    /// expandAddToGEP - Expand a SCEVAddExpr with a pointer type into a GEP
+    /// instead of using ptrtoint+arithmetic+inttoptr.
+    Value *expandAddToGEP(const SCEV *const *op_begin,
+                          const SCEV *const *op_end,
+                          PointerType *PTy, Type *Ty, Value *V);
+
+    Value *expand(const SCEV *S);
+
+    /// expandCodeFor - Insert code to directly compute the specified SCEV
+    /// expression into the program.  The inserted code is inserted into the
+    /// SCEVExpander's current insertion point. If a type is specified, the
+    /// result will be expanded to have that type, with a cast if necessary.
+    Value *expandCodeFor(const SCEV *SH, Type *Ty = 0);
+
+    /// getRelevantLoop - Determine the most "relevant" loop for the given SCEV.
+    const Loop *getRelevantLoop(const SCEV *);
+
+    Value *visitConstant(const SCEVConstant *S) {
+      return S->getValue();
+    }
+
+    Value *visitTruncateExpr(const SCEVTruncateExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitZeroExtendExpr(const SCEVZeroExtendExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitSignExtendExpr(const SCEVSignExtendExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitAddExpr(const SCEVAddExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitMulExpr(const SCEVMulExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitUDivExpr(const SCEVUDivExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitAddRecExpr(const SCEVAddRecExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitSMaxExpr(const SCEVSMaxExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitUMaxExpr(const SCEVUMaxExpr *S);
+
+    Value *visitUnknown(const SCEVUnknown *S) {
+      return S->getValue();
+    }
+
+    void rememberInstruction(Value *I);
+
+    void restoreInsertPoint(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock::iterator I);
+
+    bool isNormalAddRecExprPHI(PHINode *PN, Instruction *IncV, const Loop *L);
+
+    bool isExpandedAddRecExprPHI(PHINode *PN, Instruction *IncV, const Loop *L);
+
+    Value *expandAddRecExprLiterally(const SCEVAddRecExpr *);
+    PHINode *getAddRecExprPHILiterally(const SCEVAddRecExpr *Normalized,
+                                       const Loop *L,
+                                       Type *ExpandTy,
+                                       Type *IntTy);
+    Value *expandIVInc(PHINode *PN, Value *StepV, const Loop *L,
+                       Type *ExpandTy, Type *IntTy, bool useSubtract);
+  };
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionExpressions.h

@@ -0,0 +1,698 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionExpressions.h - SCEV Exprs --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the classes used to represent and build scalar expressions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTIONEXPRESSIONS_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTIONEXPRESSIONS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include "llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolution.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class ConstantInt;
+  class ConstantRange;
+  class DominatorTree;
+
+  enum SCEVTypes {
+    // These should be ordered in terms of increasing complexity to make the
+    // folders simpler.
+    scConstant, scTruncate, scZeroExtend, scSignExtend, scAddExpr, scMulExpr,
+    scUDivExpr, scAddRecExpr, scUMaxExpr, scSMaxExpr,
+    scUnknown, scCouldNotCompute
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVConstant - This class represents a constant integer value.
+  ///
+  class SCEVConstant : public SCEV {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    ConstantInt *V;
+    SCEVConstant(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID, ConstantInt *v) :
+      SCEV(ID, scConstant), V(v) {}
+  public:
+    ConstantInt *getValue() const { return V; }
+
+    Type *getType() const { return V->getType(); }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scConstant;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVCastExpr - This is the base class for unary cast operator classes.
+  ///
+  class SCEVCastExpr : public SCEV {
+  protected:
+    const SCEV *Op;
+    Type *Ty;
+
+    SCEVCastExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                 unsigned SCEVTy, const SCEV *op, Type *ty);
+
+  public:
+    const SCEV *getOperand() const { return Op; }
+    Type *getType() const { return Ty; }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scTruncate ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scZeroExtend ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scSignExtend;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVTruncateExpr - This class represents a truncation of an integer value
+  /// to a smaller integer value.
+  ///
+  class SCEVTruncateExpr : public SCEVCastExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVTruncateExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                     const SCEV *op, Type *ty);
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scTruncate;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVZeroExtendExpr - This class represents a zero extension of a small
+  /// integer value to a larger integer value.
+  ///
+  class SCEVZeroExtendExpr : public SCEVCastExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVZeroExtendExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                       const SCEV *op, Type *ty);
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scZeroExtend;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVSignExtendExpr - This class represents a sign extension of a small
+  /// integer value to a larger integer value.
+  ///
+  class SCEVSignExtendExpr : public SCEVCastExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVSignExtendExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                       const SCEV *op, Type *ty);
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scSignExtend;
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVNAryExpr - This node is a base class providing common
+  /// functionality for n'ary operators.
+  ///
+  class SCEVNAryExpr : public SCEV {
+  protected:
+    // Since SCEVs are immutable, ScalarEvolution allocates operand
+    // arrays with its SCEVAllocator, so this class just needs a simple
+    // pointer rather than a more elaborate vector-like data structure.
+    // This also avoids the need for a non-trivial destructor.
+    const SCEV *const *Operands;
+    size_t NumOperands;
+
+    SCEVNAryExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                 enum SCEVTypes T, const SCEV *const *O, size_t N)
+      : SCEV(ID, T), Operands(O), NumOperands(N) {}
+
+  public:
+    size_t getNumOperands() const { return NumOperands; }
+    const SCEV *getOperand(unsigned i) const {
+      assert(i < NumOperands && "Operand index out of range!");
+      return Operands[i];
+    }
+
+    typedef const SCEV *const *op_iterator;
+    op_iterator op_begin() const { return Operands; }
+    op_iterator op_end() const { return Operands + NumOperands; }
+
+    Type *getType() const { return getOperand(0)->getType(); }
+
+    NoWrapFlags getNoWrapFlags(NoWrapFlags Mask = NoWrapMask) const {
+      return (NoWrapFlags)(SubclassData & Mask);
+    }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scAddExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scMulExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scSMaxExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scUMaxExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scAddRecExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVCommutativeExpr - This node is the base class for n'ary commutative
+  /// operators.
+  ///
+  class SCEVCommutativeExpr : public SCEVNAryExpr {
+  protected:
+    SCEVCommutativeExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                        enum SCEVTypes T, const SCEV *const *O, size_t N)
+      : SCEVNAryExpr(ID, T, O, N) {}
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scAddExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scMulExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scSMaxExpr ||
+             S->getSCEVType() == scUMaxExpr;
+    }
+
+    /// Set flags for a non-recurrence without clearing previously set flags.
+    void setNoWrapFlags(NoWrapFlags Flags) {
+      SubclassData |= Flags;
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVAddExpr - This node represents an addition of some number of SCEVs.
+  ///
+  class SCEVAddExpr : public SCEVCommutativeExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVAddExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                const SCEV *const *O, size_t N)
+      : SCEVCommutativeExpr(ID, scAddExpr, O, N) {
+    }
+
+  public:
+    Type *getType() const {
+      // Use the type of the last operand, which is likely to be a pointer
+      // type, if there is one. This doesn't usually matter, but it can help
+      // reduce casts when the expressions are expanded.
+      return getOperand(getNumOperands() - 1)->getType();
+    }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scAddExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVMulExpr - This node represents multiplication of some number of SCEVs.
+  ///
+  class SCEVMulExpr : public SCEVCommutativeExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVMulExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                const SCEV *const *O, size_t N)
+      : SCEVCommutativeExpr(ID, scMulExpr, O, N) {
+    }
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scMulExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVUDivExpr - This class represents a binary unsigned division operation.
+  ///
+  class SCEVUDivExpr : public SCEV {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    const SCEV *LHS;
+    const SCEV *RHS;
+    SCEVUDivExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID, const SCEV *lhs, const SCEV *rhs)
+      : SCEV(ID, scUDivExpr), LHS(lhs), RHS(rhs) {}
+
+  public:
+    const SCEV *getLHS() const { return LHS; }
+    const SCEV *getRHS() const { return RHS; }
+
+    Type *getType() const {
+      // In most cases the types of LHS and RHS will be the same, but in some
+      // crazy cases one or the other may be a pointer. ScalarEvolution doesn't
+      // depend on the type for correctness, but handling types carefully can
+      // avoid extra casts in the SCEVExpander. The LHS is more likely to be
+      // a pointer type than the RHS, so use the RHS' type here.
+      return getRHS()->getType();
+    }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scUDivExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVAddRecExpr - This node represents a polynomial recurrence on the trip
+  /// count of the specified loop.  This is the primary focus of the
+  /// ScalarEvolution framework; all the other SCEV subclasses are mostly just
+  /// supporting infrastructure to allow SCEVAddRecExpr expressions to be
+  /// created and analyzed.
+  ///
+  /// All operands of an AddRec are required to be loop invariant.
+  ///
+  class SCEVAddRecExpr : public SCEVNAryExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    const Loop *L;
+
+    SCEVAddRecExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                   const SCEV *const *O, size_t N, const Loop *l)
+      : SCEVNAryExpr(ID, scAddRecExpr, O, N), L(l) {}
+
+  public:
+    const SCEV *getStart() const { return Operands[0]; }
+    const Loop *getLoop() const { return L; }
+
+    /// getStepRecurrence - This method constructs and returns the recurrence
+    /// indicating how much this expression steps by.  If this is a polynomial
+    /// of degree N, it returns a chrec of degree N-1.
+    /// We cannot determine whether the step recurrence has self-wraparound.
+    const SCEV *getStepRecurrence(ScalarEvolution &SE) const {
+      if (isAffine()) return getOperand(1);
+      return SE.getAddRecExpr(SmallVector<const SCEV *, 3>(op_begin()+1,
+                                                           op_end()),
+                              getLoop(), FlagAnyWrap);
+    }
+
+    /// isAffine - Return true if this is an affine AddRec (i.e., it represents
+    /// an expressions A+B*x where A and B are loop invariant values.
+    bool isAffine() const {
+      // We know that the start value is invariant.  This expression is thus
+      // affine iff the step is also invariant.
+      return getNumOperands() == 2;
+    }
+
+    /// isQuadratic - Return true if this is an quadratic AddRec (i.e., it
+    /// represents an expressions A+B*x+C*x^2 where A, B and C are loop
+    /// invariant values.  This corresponds to an addrec of the form {L,+,M,+,N}
+    bool isQuadratic() const {
+      return getNumOperands() == 3;
+    }
+
+    /// Set flags for a recurrence without clearing any previously set flags.
+    /// For AddRec, either NUW or NSW implies NW. Keep track of this fact here
+    /// to make it easier to propagate flags.
+    void setNoWrapFlags(NoWrapFlags Flags) {
+      if (Flags & (FlagNUW | FlagNSW))
+        Flags = ScalarEvolution::setFlags(Flags, FlagNW);
+      SubclassData |= Flags;
+    }
+
+    /// evaluateAtIteration - Return the value of this chain of recurrences at
+    /// the specified iteration number.
+    const SCEV *evaluateAtIteration(const SCEV *It, ScalarEvolution &SE) const;
+
+    /// getNumIterationsInRange - Return the number of iterations of this loop
+    /// that produce values in the specified constant range.  Another way of
+    /// looking at this is that it returns the first iteration number where the
+    /// value is not in the condition, thus computing the exit count.  If the
+    /// iteration count can't be computed, an instance of SCEVCouldNotCompute is
+    /// returned.
+    const SCEV *getNumIterationsInRange(ConstantRange Range,
+                                       ScalarEvolution &SE) const;
+
+    /// getPostIncExpr - Return an expression representing the value of
+    /// this expression one iteration of the loop ahead.
+    const SCEVAddRecExpr *getPostIncExpr(ScalarEvolution &SE) const {
+      return cast<SCEVAddRecExpr>(SE.getAddExpr(this, getStepRecurrence(SE)));
+    }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scAddRecExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVSMaxExpr - This class represents a signed maximum selection.
+  ///
+  class SCEVSMaxExpr : public SCEVCommutativeExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVSMaxExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                 const SCEV *const *O, size_t N)
+      : SCEVCommutativeExpr(ID, scSMaxExpr, O, N) {
+      // Max never overflows.
+      setNoWrapFlags((NoWrapFlags)(FlagNUW | FlagNSW));
+    }
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scSMaxExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVUMaxExpr - This class represents an unsigned maximum selection.
+  ///
+  class SCEVUMaxExpr : public SCEVCommutativeExpr {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    SCEVUMaxExpr(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID,
+                 const SCEV *const *O, size_t N)
+      : SCEVCommutativeExpr(ID, scUMaxExpr, O, N) {
+      // Max never overflows.
+      setNoWrapFlags((NoWrapFlags)(FlagNUW | FlagNSW));
+    }
+
+  public:
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scUMaxExpr;
+    }
+  };
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// SCEVUnknown - This means that we are dealing with an entirely unknown SCEV
+  /// value, and only represent it as its LLVM Value.  This is the "bottom"
+  /// value for the analysis.
+  ///
+  class SCEVUnknown : public SCEV, private CallbackVH {
+    friend class ScalarEvolution;
+
+    // Implement CallbackVH.
+    virtual void deleted();
+    virtual void allUsesReplacedWith(Value *New);
+
+    /// SE - The parent ScalarEvolution value. This is used to update
+    /// the parent's maps when the value associated with a SCEVUnknown
+    /// is deleted or RAUW'd.
+    ScalarEvolution *SE;
+
+    /// Next - The next pointer in the linked list of all
+    /// SCEVUnknown instances owned by a ScalarEvolution.
+    SCEVUnknown *Next;
+
+    SCEVUnknown(const FoldingSetNodeIDRef ID, Value *V,
+                ScalarEvolution *se, SCEVUnknown *next) :
+      SCEV(ID, scUnknown), CallbackVH(V), SE(se), Next(next) {}
+
+  public:
+    Value *getValue() const { return getValPtr(); }
+
+    /// isSizeOf, isAlignOf, isOffsetOf - Test whether this is a special
+    /// constant representing a type size, alignment, or field offset in
+    /// a target-independent manner, and hasn't happened to have been
+    /// folded with other operations into something unrecognizable. This
+    /// is mainly only useful for pretty-printing and other situations
+    /// where it isn't absolutely required for these to succeed.
+    bool isSizeOf(Type *&AllocTy) const;
+    bool isAlignOf(Type *&AllocTy) const;
+    bool isOffsetOf(Type *&STy, Constant *&FieldNo) const;
+
+    Type *getType() const { return getValPtr()->getType(); }
+
+    /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const SCEV *S) {
+      return S->getSCEVType() == scUnknown;
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// SCEVVisitor - This class defines a simple visitor class that may be used
+  /// for various SCEV analysis purposes.
+  template<typename SC, typename RetVal=void>
+  struct SCEVVisitor {
+    RetVal visit(const SCEV *S) {
+      switch (S->getSCEVType()) {
+      case scConstant:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitConstant((const SCEVConstant*)S);
+      case scTruncate:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitTruncateExpr((const SCEVTruncateExpr*)S);
+      case scZeroExtend:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitZeroExtendExpr((const SCEVZeroExtendExpr*)S);
+      case scSignExtend:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitSignExtendExpr((const SCEVSignExtendExpr*)S);
+      case scAddExpr:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitAddExpr((const SCEVAddExpr*)S);
+      case scMulExpr:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitMulExpr((const SCEVMulExpr*)S);
+      case scUDivExpr:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitUDivExpr((const SCEVUDivExpr*)S);
+      case scAddRecExpr:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitAddRecExpr((const SCEVAddRecExpr*)S);
+      case scSMaxExpr:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitSMaxExpr((const SCEVSMaxExpr*)S);
+      case scUMaxExpr:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitUMaxExpr((const SCEVUMaxExpr*)S);
+      case scUnknown:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitUnknown((const SCEVUnknown*)S);
+      case scCouldNotCompute:
+        return ((SC*)this)->visitCouldNotCompute((const SCEVCouldNotCompute*)S);
+      default:
+        llvm_unreachable("Unknown SCEV type!");
+      }
+    }
+
+    RetVal visitCouldNotCompute(const SCEVCouldNotCompute *S) {
+      llvm_unreachable("Invalid use of SCEVCouldNotCompute!");
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// Visit all nodes in the expression tree using worklist traversal.
+  ///
+  /// Visitor implements:
+  ///   // return true to follow this node.
+  ///   bool follow(const SCEV *S);
+  ///   // return true to terminate the search.
+  ///   bool isDone();
+  template<typename SV>
+  class SCEVTraversal {
+    SV &Visitor;
+    SmallVector<const SCEV *, 8> Worklist;
+    SmallPtrSet<const SCEV *, 8> Visited;
+
+    void push(const SCEV *S) {
+      if (Visited.insert(S) && Visitor.follow(S))
+        Worklist.push_back(S);
+    }
+  public:
+    SCEVTraversal(SV& V): Visitor(V) {}
+
+    void visitAll(const SCEV *Root) {
+      push(Root);
+      while (!Worklist.empty() && !Visitor.isDone()) {
+        const SCEV *S = Worklist.pop_back_val();
+
+        switch (S->getSCEVType()) {
+        case scConstant:
+        case scUnknown:
+          break;
+        case scTruncate:
+        case scZeroExtend:
+        case scSignExtend:
+          push(cast<SCEVCastExpr>(S)->getOperand());
+          break;
+        case scAddExpr:
+        case scMulExpr:
+        case scSMaxExpr:
+        case scUMaxExpr:
+        case scAddRecExpr: {
+          const SCEVNAryExpr *NAry = cast<SCEVNAryExpr>(S);
+          for (SCEVNAryExpr::op_iterator I = NAry->op_begin(),
+                 E = NAry->op_end(); I != E; ++I) {
+            push(*I);
+          }
+          break;
+        }
+        case scUDivExpr: {
+          const SCEVUDivExpr *UDiv = cast<SCEVUDivExpr>(S);
+          push(UDiv->getLHS());
+          push(UDiv->getRHS());
+          break;
+        }
+        case scCouldNotCompute:
+          llvm_unreachable("Attempt to use a SCEVCouldNotCompute object!");
+        default:
+          llvm_unreachable("Unknown SCEV kind!");
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// Use SCEVTraversal to visit all nodes in the givien expression tree.
+  template<typename SV>
+  void visitAll(const SCEV *Root, SV& Visitor) {
+    SCEVTraversal<SV> T(Visitor);
+    T.visitAll(Root);
+  }
+
+  /// The SCEVRewriter takes a scalar evolution expression and copies all its
+  /// components. The result after a rewrite is an identical SCEV.
+  struct SCEVRewriter
+    : public SCEVVisitor<SCEVRewriter, const SCEV*> {
+  public:
+    SCEVRewriter(ScalarEvolution &S) : SE(S) {}
+
+    virtual ~SCEVRewriter() {}
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitConstant(const SCEVConstant *Constant) {
+      return Constant;
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitTruncateExpr(const SCEVTruncateExpr *Expr) {
+      const SCEV *Operand = visit(Expr->getOperand());
+      return SE.getTruncateExpr(Operand, Expr->getType());
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitZeroExtendExpr(const SCEVZeroExtendExpr *Expr) {
+      const SCEV *Operand = visit(Expr->getOperand());
+      return SE.getZeroExtendExpr(Operand, Expr->getType());
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitSignExtendExpr(const SCEVSignExtendExpr *Expr) {
+      const SCEV *Operand = visit(Expr->getOperand());
+      return SE.getSignExtendExpr(Operand, Expr->getType());
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitAddExpr(const SCEVAddExpr *Expr) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Operands;
+      for (int i = 0, e = Expr->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i)
+        Operands.push_back(visit(Expr->getOperand(i)));
+      return SE.getAddExpr(Operands);
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitMulExpr(const SCEVMulExpr *Expr) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Operands;
+      for (int i = 0, e = Expr->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i)
+        Operands.push_back(visit(Expr->getOperand(i)));
+      return SE.getMulExpr(Operands);
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitUDivExpr(const SCEVUDivExpr *Expr) {
+      return SE.getUDivExpr(visit(Expr->getLHS()), visit(Expr->getRHS()));
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitAddRecExpr(const SCEVAddRecExpr *Expr) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Operands;
+      for (int i = 0, e = Expr->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i)
+        Operands.push_back(visit(Expr->getOperand(i)));
+      return SE.getAddRecExpr(Operands, Expr->getLoop(),
+                              Expr->getNoWrapFlags());
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitSMaxExpr(const SCEVSMaxExpr *Expr) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Operands;
+      for (int i = 0, e = Expr->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i)
+        Operands.push_back(visit(Expr->getOperand(i)));
+      return SE.getSMaxExpr(Operands);
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitUMaxExpr(const SCEVUMaxExpr *Expr) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Operands;
+      for (int i = 0, e = Expr->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i)
+        Operands.push_back(visit(Expr->getOperand(i)));
+      return SE.getUMaxExpr(Operands);
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitUnknown(const SCEVUnknown *Expr) {
+      return Expr;
+    }
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitCouldNotCompute(const SCEVCouldNotCompute *Expr) {
+      return Expr;
+    }
+
+  protected:
+    ScalarEvolution &SE;
+  };
+
+  typedef DenseMap<const Value*, Value*> ValueToValueMap;
+
+  /// The SCEVParameterRewriter takes a scalar evolution expression and updates
+  /// the SCEVUnknown components following the Map (Value -> Value).
+  struct SCEVParameterRewriter: public SCEVRewriter {
+  public:
+    static const SCEV *rewrite(const SCEV *Scev, ScalarEvolution &SE,
+                               ValueToValueMap &Map) {
+      SCEVParameterRewriter Rewriter(SE, Map);
+      return Rewriter.visit(Scev);
+    }
+    SCEVParameterRewriter(ScalarEvolution &S, ValueToValueMap &M)
+      : SCEVRewriter(S), Map(M) {}
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitUnknown(const SCEVUnknown *Expr) {
+      Value *V = Expr->getValue();
+      if (Map.count(V))
+        return SE.getUnknown(Map[V]);
+      return Expr;
+    }
+
+  private:
+    ValueToValueMap &Map;
+  };
+
+  typedef DenseMap<const Loop*, const SCEV*> LoopToScevMapT;
+
+  /// The SCEVApplyRewriter takes a scalar evolution expression and applies
+  /// the Map (Loop -> SCEV) to all AddRecExprs.
+  struct SCEVApplyRewriter: public SCEVRewriter {
+  public:
+    static const SCEV *rewrite(const SCEV *Scev, LoopToScevMapT &Map,
+                               ScalarEvolution &SE) {
+      SCEVApplyRewriter Rewriter(SE, Map);
+      return Rewriter.visit(Scev);
+    }
+    SCEVApplyRewriter(ScalarEvolution &S, LoopToScevMapT &M)
+      : SCEVRewriter(S), Map(M) {}
+
+    virtual const SCEV *visitAddRecExpr(const SCEVAddRecExpr *Expr) {
+      SmallVector<const SCEV *, 2> Operands;
+      for (int i = 0, e = Expr->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i)
+        Operands.push_back(visit(Expr->getOperand(i)));
+
+      const Loop *L = Expr->getLoop();
+      const SCEV *Res = SE.getAddRecExpr(Operands, L, Expr->getNoWrapFlags());
+
+      if (0 == Map.count(L))
+        return Res;
+
+      const SCEVAddRecExpr *Rec = (const SCEVAddRecExpr *) Res;
+      return Rec->evaluateAtIteration(Map[L], SE);
+    }
+
+  private:
+    LoopToScevMapT &Map;
+  };
+
+/// Applies the Map (Loop -> SCEV) to the given Scev.
+static inline const SCEV *apply(const SCEV *Scev, LoopToScevMapT &Map,
+                                ScalarEvolution &SE) {
+  return SCEVApplyRewriter::rewrite(Scev, Map, SE);
+}
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionNormalization.h

@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/ScalarEvolutionNormalization.h - See below -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines utilities for working with "normalized" ScalarEvolution
+// expressions.
+//
+// The following example illustrates post-increment uses and how normalized
+// expressions help.
+//
+//   for (i=0; i!=n; ++i) {
+//     ...
+//   }
+//   use(i);
+//
+// While the expression for most uses of i inside the loop is {0,+,1}<%L>, the
+// expression for the use of i outside the loop is {1,+,1}<%L>, since i is
+// incremented at the end of the loop body. This is inconveient, since it
+// suggests that we need two different induction variables, one that starts
+// at 0 and one that starts at 1. We'd prefer to be able to think of these as
+// the same induction variable, with uses inside the loop using the
+// "pre-incremented" value, and uses after the loop using the
+// "post-incremented" value.
+//
+// Expressions for post-incremented uses are represented as an expression
+// paired with a set of loops for which the expression is in "post-increment"
+// mode (there may be multiple loops).
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTIONNORMALIZATION_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_SCALAREVOLUTIONNORMALIZATION_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Instruction;
+class DominatorTree;
+class Loop;
+class ScalarEvolution;
+class SCEV;
+class Value;
+
+/// TransformKind - Different types of transformations that
+/// TransformForPostIncUse can do.
+enum TransformKind {
+  /// Normalize - Normalize according to the given loops.
+  Normalize,
+  /// NormalizeAutodetect - Detect post-inc opportunities on new expressions,
+  /// update the given loop set, and normalize.
+  NormalizeAutodetect,
+  /// Denormalize - Perform the inverse transform on the expression with the
+  /// given loop set.
+  Denormalize
+};
+
+/// PostIncLoopSet - A set of loops.
+typedef SmallPtrSet<const Loop *, 2> PostIncLoopSet;
+
+/// TransformForPostIncUse - Transform the given expression according to the
+/// given transformation kind.
+const SCEV *TransformForPostIncUse(TransformKind Kind,
+                                   const SCEV *S,
+                                   Instruction *User,
+                                   Value *OperandValToReplace,
+                                   PostIncLoopSet &Loops,
+                                   ScalarEvolution &SE,
+                                   DominatorTree &DT);
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/SparsePropagation.h

@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+//===- SparsePropagation.h - Sparse Conditional Property Propagation ------===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file implements an abstract sparse conditional propagation algorithm,
+// modeled after SCCP, but with a customizable lattice function.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_SPARSEPROPAGATION_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_SPARSEPROPAGATION_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
+#include <set>
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class Value;
+  class Constant;
+  class Argument;
+  class Instruction;
+  class PHINode;
+  class TerminatorInst;
+  class BasicBlock;
+  class Function;
+  class SparseSolver;
+  class raw_ostream;
+
+  template<typename T> class SmallVectorImpl;
+  
+/// AbstractLatticeFunction - This class is implemented by the dataflow instance
+/// to specify what the lattice values are and how they handle merges etc.
+/// This gives the client the power to compute lattice values from instructions,
+/// constants, etc.  The requirement is that lattice values must all fit into
+/// a void*.  If a void* is not sufficient, the implementation should use this
+/// pointer to be a pointer into a uniquing set or something.
+///
+class AbstractLatticeFunction {
+public:
+  typedef void *LatticeVal;
+private:
+  LatticeVal UndefVal, OverdefinedVal, UntrackedVal;
+public:
+  AbstractLatticeFunction(LatticeVal undefVal, LatticeVal overdefinedVal,
+                          LatticeVal untrackedVal) {
+    UndefVal = undefVal;
+    OverdefinedVal = overdefinedVal;
+    UntrackedVal = untrackedVal;
+  }
+  virtual ~AbstractLatticeFunction();
+  
+  LatticeVal getUndefVal()       const { return UndefVal; }
+  LatticeVal getOverdefinedVal() const { return OverdefinedVal; }
+  LatticeVal getUntrackedVal()   const { return UntrackedVal; }
+  
+  /// IsUntrackedValue - If the specified Value is something that is obviously
+  /// uninteresting to the analysis (and would always return UntrackedVal),
+  /// this function can return true to avoid pointless work.
+  virtual bool IsUntrackedValue(Value *V) {
+    return false;
+  }
+  
+  /// ComputeConstant - Given a constant value, compute and return a lattice
+  /// value corresponding to the specified constant.
+  virtual LatticeVal ComputeConstant(Constant *C) {
+    return getOverdefinedVal(); // always safe
+  }
+
+  /// IsSpecialCasedPHI - Given a PHI node, determine whether this PHI node is
+  /// one that the we want to handle through ComputeInstructionState.
+  virtual bool IsSpecialCasedPHI(PHINode *PN) {
+    return false;
+  }
+  
+  /// GetConstant - If the specified lattice value is representable as an LLVM
+  /// constant value, return it.  Otherwise return null.  The returned value
+  /// must be in the same LLVM type as Val.
+  virtual Constant *GetConstant(LatticeVal LV, Value *Val, SparseSolver &SS) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+
+  /// ComputeArgument - Given a formal argument value, compute and return a
+  /// lattice value corresponding to the specified argument.
+  virtual LatticeVal ComputeArgument(Argument *I) {
+    return getOverdefinedVal(); // always safe
+  }
+  
+  /// MergeValues - Compute and return the merge of the two specified lattice
+  /// values.  Merging should only move one direction down the lattice to
+  /// guarantee convergence (toward overdefined).
+  virtual LatticeVal MergeValues(LatticeVal X, LatticeVal Y) {
+    return getOverdefinedVal(); // always safe, never useful.
+  }
+  
+  /// ComputeInstructionState - Given an instruction and a vector of its operand
+  /// values, compute the result value of the instruction.
+  virtual LatticeVal ComputeInstructionState(Instruction &I, SparseSolver &SS) {
+    return getOverdefinedVal(); // always safe, never useful.
+  }
+  
+  /// PrintValue - Render the specified lattice value to the specified stream.
+  virtual void PrintValue(LatticeVal V, raw_ostream &OS);
+};
+
+  
+/// SparseSolver - This class is a general purpose solver for Sparse Conditional
+/// Propagation with a programmable lattice function.
+///
+class SparseSolver {
+  typedef AbstractLatticeFunction::LatticeVal LatticeVal;
+  
+  /// LatticeFunc - This is the object that knows the lattice and how to do
+  /// compute transfer functions.
+  AbstractLatticeFunction *LatticeFunc;
+  
+  DenseMap<Value*, LatticeVal> ValueState;  // The state each value is in.
+  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> BBExecutable;   // The bbs that are executable.
+  
+  std::vector<Instruction*> InstWorkList;   // Worklist of insts to process.
+  
+  std::vector<BasicBlock*> BBWorkList;  // The BasicBlock work list
+  
+  /// KnownFeasibleEdges - Entries in this set are edges which have already had
+  /// PHI nodes retriggered.
+  typedef std::pair<BasicBlock*,BasicBlock*> Edge;
+  std::set<Edge> KnownFeasibleEdges;
+
+  SparseSolver(const SparseSolver&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const SparseSolver&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+public:
+  explicit SparseSolver(AbstractLatticeFunction *Lattice)
+    : LatticeFunc(Lattice) {}
+  ~SparseSolver() {
+    delete LatticeFunc;
+  }
+  
+  /// Solve - Solve for constants and executable blocks.
+  ///
+  void Solve(Function &F);
+  
+  void Print(Function &F, raw_ostream &OS) const;
+
+  /// getLatticeState - Return the LatticeVal object that corresponds to the
+  /// value.  If an value is not in the map, it is returned as untracked,
+  /// unlike the getOrInitValueState method.
+  LatticeVal getLatticeState(Value *V) const {
+    DenseMap<Value*, LatticeVal>::const_iterator I = ValueState.find(V);
+    return I != ValueState.end() ? I->second : LatticeFunc->getUntrackedVal();
+  }
+  
+  /// getOrInitValueState - Return the LatticeVal object that corresponds to the
+  /// value, initializing the value's state if it hasn't been entered into the
+  /// map yet.   This function is necessary because not all values should start
+  /// out in the underdefined state... Arguments should be overdefined, and
+  /// constants should be marked as constants.
+  ///
+  LatticeVal getOrInitValueState(Value *V);
+  
+  /// isEdgeFeasible - Return true if the control flow edge from the 'From'
+  /// basic block to the 'To' basic block is currently feasible.  If
+  /// AggressiveUndef is true, then this treats values with unknown lattice
+  /// values as undefined.  This is generally only useful when solving the
+  /// lattice, not when querying it.
+  bool isEdgeFeasible(BasicBlock *From, BasicBlock *To,
+                      bool AggressiveUndef = false);
+
+  /// isBlockExecutable - Return true if there are any known feasible
+  /// edges into the basic block.  This is generally only useful when
+  /// querying the lattice.
+  bool isBlockExecutable(BasicBlock *BB) const {
+    return BBExecutable.count(BB);
+  }
+  
+private:
+  /// UpdateState - When the state for some instruction is potentially updated,
+  /// this function notices and adds I to the worklist if needed.
+  void UpdateState(Instruction &Inst, LatticeVal V);
+  
+  /// MarkBlockExecutable - This method can be used by clients to mark all of
+  /// the blocks that are known to be intrinsically live in the processed unit.
+  void MarkBlockExecutable(BasicBlock *BB);
+  
+  /// markEdgeExecutable - Mark a basic block as executable, adding it to the BB
+  /// work list if it is not already executable.
+  void markEdgeExecutable(BasicBlock *Source, BasicBlock *Dest);
+  
+  /// getFeasibleSuccessors - Return a vector of booleans to indicate which
+  /// successors are reachable from a given terminator instruction.
+  void getFeasibleSuccessors(TerminatorInst &TI, SmallVectorImpl<bool> &Succs,
+                             bool AggressiveUndef);
+  
+  void visitInst(Instruction &I);
+  void visitPHINode(PHINode &I);
+  void visitTerminatorInst(TerminatorInst &TI);
+
+};
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif // LLVM_ANALYSIS_SPARSEPROPAGATION_H

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h ----------------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This pass exposes codegen information to IR-level passes. Every
+// transformation that uses codegen information is broken into three parts:
+// 1. The IR-level analysis pass.
+// 2. The IR-level transformation interface which provides the needed
+//    information.
+// 3. Codegen-level implementation which uses target-specific hooks.
+//
+// This file defines #2, which is the interface that IR-level transformations
+// use for querying the codegen.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_TARGETTRANSFORMINFO_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_TARGETTRANSFORMINFO_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class GlobalValue;
+class Type;
+class User;
+class Value;
+
+/// TargetTransformInfo - This pass provides access to the codegen
+/// interfaces that are needed for IR-level transformations.
+class TargetTransformInfo {
+protected:
+  /// \brief The TTI instance one level down the stack.
+  ///
+  /// This is used to implement the default behavior all of the methods which
+  /// is to delegate up through the stack of TTIs until one can answer the
+  /// query.
+  TargetTransformInfo *PrevTTI;
+
+  /// \brief The top of the stack of TTI analyses available.
+  ///
+  /// This is a convenience routine maintained as TTI analyses become available
+  /// that complements the PrevTTI delegation chain. When one part of an
+  /// analysis pass wants to query another part of the analysis pass it can use
+  /// this to start back at the top of the stack.
+  TargetTransformInfo *TopTTI;
+
+  /// All pass subclasses must in their initializePass routine call
+  /// pushTTIStack with themselves to update the pointers tracking the previous
+  /// TTI instance in the analysis group's stack, and the top of the analysis
+  /// group's stack.
+  void pushTTIStack(Pass *P);
+
+  /// All pass subclasses must in their finalizePass routine call popTTIStack
+  /// to update the pointers tracking the previous TTI instance in the analysis
+  /// group's stack, and the top of the analysis group's stack.
+  void popTTIStack();
+
+  /// All pass subclasses must call TargetTransformInfo::getAnalysisUsage.
+  virtual void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const;
+
+public:
+  /// This class is intended to be subclassed by real implementations.
+  virtual ~TargetTransformInfo() = 0;
+
+  /// \name Generic Target Information
+  /// @{
+
+  /// \brief Underlying constants for 'cost' values in this interface.
+  ///
+  /// Many APIs in this interface return a cost. This enum defines the
+  /// fundamental values that should be used to interpret (and produce) those
+  /// costs. The costs are returned as an unsigned rather than a member of this
+  /// enumeration because it is expected that the cost of one IR instruction
+  /// may have a multiplicative factor to it or otherwise won't fit directly
+  /// into the enum. Moreover, it is common to sum or average costs which works
+  /// better as simple integral values. Thus this enum only provides constants.
+  ///
+  /// Note that these costs should usually reflect the intersection of code-size
+  /// cost and execution cost. A free instruction is typically one that folds
+  /// into another instruction. For example, reg-to-reg moves can often be
+  /// skipped by renaming the registers in the CPU, but they still are encoded
+  /// and thus wouldn't be considered 'free' here.
+  enum TargetCostConstants {
+    TCC_Free = 0,       ///< Expected to fold away in lowering.
+    TCC_Basic = 1,      ///< The cost of a typical 'add' instruction.
+    TCC_Expensive = 4   ///< The cost of a 'div' instruction on x86.
+  };
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of a specific operation when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// Note that this is designed to work on an arbitrary synthetic opcode, and
+  /// thus work for hypothetical queries before an instruction has even been
+  /// formed. However, this does *not* work for GEPs, and must not be called
+  /// for a GEP instruction. Instead, use the dedicated getGEPCost interface as
+  /// analyzing a GEP's cost required more information.
+  ///
+  /// Typically only the result type is required, and the operand type can be
+  /// omitted. However, if the opcode is one of the cast instructions, the
+  /// operand type is required.
+  ///
+  /// The returned cost is defined in terms of \c TargetCostConstants, see its
+  /// comments for a detailed explanation of the cost values.
+  virtual unsigned getOperationCost(unsigned Opcode, Type *Ty,
+                                    Type *OpTy = 0) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of a GEP operation when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// The contract for this function is the same as \c getOperationCost except
+  /// that it supports an interface that provides extra information specific to
+  /// the GEP operation.
+  virtual unsigned getGEPCost(const Value *Ptr,
+                              ArrayRef<const Value *> Operands) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of a function call when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// The contract for this is the same as \c getOperationCost except that it
+  /// supports an interface that provides extra information specific to call
+  /// instructions.
+  ///
+  /// This is the most basic query for estimating call cost: it only knows the
+  /// function type and (potentially) the number of arguments at the call site.
+  /// The latter is only interesting for varargs function types.
+  virtual unsigned getCallCost(FunctionType *FTy, int NumArgs = -1) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of calling a specific function when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// This overload adds the ability to reason about the particular function
+  /// being called in the event it is a library call with special lowering.
+  virtual unsigned getCallCost(const Function *F, int NumArgs = -1) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of calling a specific function when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// This overload allows specifying a set of candidate argument values.
+  virtual unsigned getCallCost(const Function *F,
+                               ArrayRef<const Value *> Arguments) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of an intrinsic when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// Mirrors the \c getCallCost method but uses an intrinsic identifier.
+  virtual unsigned getIntrinsicCost(Intrinsic::ID IID, Type *RetTy,
+                                    ArrayRef<Type *> ParamTys) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of an intrinsic when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// Mirrors the \c getCallCost method but uses an intrinsic identifier.
+  virtual unsigned getIntrinsicCost(Intrinsic::ID IID, Type *RetTy,
+                                    ArrayRef<const Value *> Arguments) const;
+
+  /// \brief Estimate the cost of a given IR user when lowered.
+  ///
+  /// This can estimate the cost of either a ConstantExpr or Instruction when
+  /// lowered. It has two primary advantages over the \c getOperationCost and
+  /// \c getGEPCost above, and one significant disadvantage: it can only be
+  /// used when the IR construct has already been formed.
+  ///
+  /// The advantages are that it can inspect the SSA use graph to reason more
+  /// accurately about the cost. For example, all-constant-GEPs can often be
+  /// folded into a load or other instruction, but if they are used in some
+  /// other context they may not be folded. This routine can distinguish such
+  /// cases.
+  ///
+  /// The returned cost is defined in terms of \c TargetCostConstants, see its
+  /// comments for a detailed explanation of the cost values.
+  virtual unsigned getUserCost(const User *U) const;
+
+  /// \brief Test whether calls to a function lower to actual program function
+  /// calls.
+  ///
+  /// The idea is to test whether the program is likely to require a 'call'
+  /// instruction or equivalent in order to call the given function.
+  ///
+  /// FIXME: It's not clear that this is a good or useful query API. Client's
+  /// should probably move to simpler cost metrics using the above.
+  /// Alternatively, we could split the cost interface into distinct code-size
+  /// and execution-speed costs. This would allow modelling the core of this
+  /// query more accurately as the a call is a single small instruction, but
+  /// incurs significant execution cost.
+  virtual bool isLoweredToCall(const Function *F) const;
+
+  /// @}
+
+  /// \name Scalar Target Information
+  /// @{
+
+  /// \brief Flags indicating the kind of support for population count.
+  ///
+  /// Compared to the SW implementation, HW support is supposed to
+  /// significantly boost the performance when the population is dense, and it
+  /// may or may not degrade performance if the population is sparse. A HW
+  /// support is considered as "Fast" if it can outperform, or is on a par
+  /// with, SW implementation when the population is sparse; otherwise, it is
+  /// considered as "Slow".
+  enum PopcntSupportKind {
+    PSK_Software,
+    PSK_SlowHardware,
+    PSK_FastHardware
+  };
+
+  /// isLegalAddImmediate - Return true if the specified immediate is legal
+  /// add immediate, that is the target has add instructions which can add
+  /// a register with the immediate without having to materialize the
+  /// immediate into a register.
+  virtual bool isLegalAddImmediate(int64_t Imm) const;
+
+  /// isLegalICmpImmediate - Return true if the specified immediate is legal
+  /// icmp immediate, that is the target has icmp instructions which can compare
+  /// a register against the immediate without having to materialize the
+  /// immediate into a register.
+  virtual bool isLegalICmpImmediate(int64_t Imm) const;
+
+  /// isLegalAddressingMode - Return true if the addressing mode represented by
+  /// AM is legal for this target, for a load/store of the specified type.
+  /// The type may be VoidTy, in which case only return true if the addressing
+  /// mode is legal for a load/store of any legal type.
+  /// TODO: Handle pre/postinc as well.
+  virtual bool isLegalAddressingMode(Type *Ty, GlobalValue *BaseGV,
+                                     int64_t BaseOffset, bool HasBaseReg,
+                                     int64_t Scale) const;
+
+  /// isTruncateFree - Return true if it's free to truncate a value of
+  /// type Ty1 to type Ty2. e.g. On x86 it's free to truncate a i32 value in
+  /// register EAX to i16 by referencing its sub-register AX.
+  virtual bool isTruncateFree(Type *Ty1, Type *Ty2) const;
+
+  /// Is this type legal.
+  virtual bool isTypeLegal(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getJumpBufAlignment - returns the target's jmp_buf alignment in bytes
+  virtual unsigned getJumpBufAlignment() const;
+
+  /// getJumpBufSize - returns the target's jmp_buf size in bytes.
+  virtual unsigned getJumpBufSize() const;
+
+  /// shouldBuildLookupTables - Return true if switches should be turned into
+  /// lookup tables for the target.
+  virtual bool shouldBuildLookupTables() const;
+
+  /// getPopcntSupport - Return hardware support for population count.
+  virtual PopcntSupportKind getPopcntSupport(unsigned IntTyWidthInBit) const;
+
+  /// getIntImmCost - Return the expected cost of materializing the given
+  /// integer immediate of the specified type.
+  virtual unsigned getIntImmCost(const APInt &Imm, Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// @}
+
+  /// \name Vector Target Information
+  /// @{
+
+  /// \brief The various kinds of shuffle patterns for vector queries.
+  enum ShuffleKind {
+    SK_Broadcast,       ///< Broadcast element 0 to all other elements.
+    SK_Reverse,         ///< Reverse the order of the vector.
+    SK_InsertSubvector, ///< InsertSubvector. Index indicates start offset.
+    SK_ExtractSubvector ///< ExtractSubvector Index indicates start offset.
+  };
+
+  /// \brief Additonal information about an operand's possible values.
+  enum OperandValueKind {
+    OK_AnyValue,            // Operand can have any value.
+    OK_UniformValue,        // Operand is uniform (splat of a value).
+    OK_UniformConstantValue // Operand is uniform constant.
+  };
+
+  /// \return The number of scalar or vector registers that the target has.
+  /// If 'Vectors' is true, it returns the number of vector registers. If it is
+  /// set to false, it returns the number of scalar registers.
+  virtual unsigned getNumberOfRegisters(bool Vector) const;
+
+  /// \return The width of the largest scalar or vector register type.
+  virtual unsigned getRegisterBitWidth(bool Vector) const;
+
+  /// \return The maximum unroll factor that the vectorizer should try to
+  /// perform for this target. This number depends on the level of parallelism
+  /// and the number of execution units in the CPU.
+  virtual unsigned getMaximumUnrollFactor() const;
+
+  /// \return The expected cost of arithmetic ops, such as mul, xor, fsub, etc.
+  virtual unsigned getArithmeticInstrCost(unsigned Opcode, Type *Ty,
+                                  OperandValueKind Opd1Info = OK_AnyValue,
+                                  OperandValueKind Opd2Info = OK_AnyValue) const;
+
+  /// \return The cost of a shuffle instruction of kind Kind and of type Tp.
+  /// The index and subtype parameters are used by the subvector insertion and
+  /// extraction shuffle kinds.
+  virtual unsigned getShuffleCost(ShuffleKind Kind, Type *Tp, int Index = 0,
+                                  Type *SubTp = 0) const;
+
+  /// \return The expected cost of cast instructions, such as bitcast, trunc,
+  /// zext, etc.
+  virtual unsigned getCastInstrCost(unsigned Opcode, Type *Dst,
+                                    Type *Src) const;
+
+  /// \return The expected cost of control-flow related instructions such as
+  /// Phi, Ret, Br.
+  virtual unsigned getCFInstrCost(unsigned Opcode) const;
+
+  /// \returns The expected cost of compare and select instructions.
+  virtual unsigned getCmpSelInstrCost(unsigned Opcode, Type *ValTy,
+                                      Type *CondTy = 0) const;
+
+  /// \return The expected cost of vector Insert and Extract.
+  /// Use -1 to indicate that there is no information on the index value.
+  virtual unsigned getVectorInstrCost(unsigned Opcode, Type *Val,
+                                      unsigned Index = -1) const;
+
+  /// \return The cost of Load and Store instructions.
+  virtual unsigned getMemoryOpCost(unsigned Opcode, Type *Src,
+                                   unsigned Alignment,
+                                   unsigned AddressSpace) const;
+
+  /// \returns The cost of Intrinsic instructions.
+  virtual unsigned getIntrinsicInstrCost(Intrinsic::ID ID, Type *RetTy,
+                                         ArrayRef<Type *> Tys) const;
+
+  /// \returns The number of pieces into which the provided type must be
+  /// split during legalization. Zero is returned when the answer is unknown.
+  virtual unsigned getNumberOfParts(Type *Tp) const;
+
+  /// \returns The cost of the address computation. For most targets this can be
+  /// merged into the instruction indexing mode. Some targets might want to
+  /// distinguish between address computation for memory operations on vector
+  /// types and scalar types. Such targets should override this function.
+  virtual unsigned getAddressComputationCost(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// @}
+
+  /// Analysis group identification.
+  static char ID;
+};
+
+/// \brief Create the base case instance of a pass in the TTI analysis group.
+///
+/// This class provides the base case for the stack of TTI analyzes. It doesn't
+/// delegate to anything and uses the STTI and VTTI objects passed in to
+/// satisfy the queries.
+ImmutablePass *createNoTargetTransformInfoPass();
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Trace.h

@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/Trace.h - Represent one trace of LLVM code -*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This class represents a single trace of LLVM basic blocks.  A trace is a
+// single entry, multiple exit, region of code that is often hot.  Trace-based
+// optimizations treat traces almost like they are a large, strange, basic
+// block: because the trace path is assumed to be hot, optimizations for the
+// fall-through path are made at the expense of the non-fall-through paths.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_TRACE_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_TRACE_H
+
+#include <cassert>
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class BasicBlock;
+  class Function;
+  class Module;
+  class raw_ostream;
+
+class Trace {
+  typedef std::vector<BasicBlock *> BasicBlockListType;
+  BasicBlockListType BasicBlocks;
+
+public:
+  /// Trace ctor - Make a new trace from a vector of basic blocks,
+  /// residing in the function which is the parent of the first
+  /// basic block in the vector.
+  ///
+  Trace(const std::vector<BasicBlock *> &vBB) : BasicBlocks (vBB) {}
+
+  /// getEntryBasicBlock - Return the entry basic block (first block)
+  /// of the trace.
+  ///
+  BasicBlock *getEntryBasicBlock () const { return BasicBlocks[0]; }
+
+  /// operator[]/getBlock - Return basic block N in the trace.
+  ///
+  BasicBlock *operator[](unsigned i) const { return BasicBlocks[i]; }
+  BasicBlock *getBlock(unsigned i)   const { return BasicBlocks[i]; }
+
+  /// getFunction - Return this trace's parent function.
+  ///
+  Function *getFunction () const;
+
+  /// getModule - Return this Module that contains this trace's parent
+  /// function.
+  ///
+  Module *getModule () const;
+
+  /// getBlockIndex - Return the index of the specified basic block in the
+  /// trace, or -1 if it is not in the trace.
+  int getBlockIndex(const BasicBlock *X) const {
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = BasicBlocks.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      if (BasicBlocks[i] == X)
+        return i;
+    return -1;
+  }
+
+  /// contains - Returns true if this trace contains the given basic
+  /// block.
+  ///
+  bool contains(const BasicBlock *X) const {
+    return getBlockIndex(X) != -1;
+  }
+
+  /// Returns true if B1 occurs before B2 in the trace, or if it is the same
+  /// block as B2..  Both blocks must be in the trace.
+  ///
+  bool dominates(const BasicBlock *B1, const BasicBlock *B2) const {
+    int B1Idx = getBlockIndex(B1), B2Idx = getBlockIndex(B2);
+    assert(B1Idx != -1 && B2Idx != -1 && "Block is not in the trace!");
+    return B1Idx <= B2Idx;
+  }
+
+  // BasicBlock iterators...
+  typedef BasicBlockListType::iterator iterator;
+  typedef BasicBlockListType::const_iterator const_iterator;
+  typedef std::reverse_iterator<const_iterator> const_reverse_iterator;
+  typedef std::reverse_iterator<iterator> reverse_iterator;
+
+  iterator                begin()       { return BasicBlocks.begin(); }
+  const_iterator          begin() const { return BasicBlocks.begin(); }
+  iterator                end  ()       { return BasicBlocks.end();   }
+  const_iterator          end  () const { return BasicBlocks.end();   }
+
+  reverse_iterator       rbegin()       { return BasicBlocks.rbegin(); }
+  const_reverse_iterator rbegin() const { return BasicBlocks.rbegin(); }
+  reverse_iterator       rend  ()       { return BasicBlocks.rend();   }
+  const_reverse_iterator rend  () const { return BasicBlocks.rend();   }
+
+  unsigned                 size() const { return BasicBlocks.size(); }
+  bool                    empty() const { return BasicBlocks.empty(); }
+
+  iterator erase(iterator q)               { return BasicBlocks.erase (q); }
+  iterator erase(iterator q1, iterator q2) { return BasicBlocks.erase (q1, q2); }
+
+  /// print - Write trace to output stream.
+  ///
+  void print(raw_ostream &O) const;
+
+  /// dump - Debugger convenience method; writes trace to standard error
+  /// output stream.
+  ///
+  void dump() const;
+};
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif // LLVM_ANALYSIS_TRACE_H

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h

@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+//===- llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h - Walk computations --------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains routines that help analyze properties that chains of
+// computations have.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_VALUETRACKING_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_VALUETRACKING_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class Value;
+  class Instruction;
+  class APInt;
+  class DataLayout;
+  class StringRef;
+  class MDNode;
+
+  /// ComputeMaskedBits - Determine which of the bits specified in Mask are
+  /// known to be either zero or one and return them in the KnownZero/KnownOne
+  /// bit sets.  This code only analyzes bits in Mask, in order to short-circuit
+  /// processing.
+  ///
+  /// This function is defined on values with integer type, values with pointer
+  /// type (but only if TD is non-null), and vectors of integers.  In the case
+  /// where V is a vector, the mask, known zero, and known one values are the
+  /// same width as the vector element, and the bit is set only if it is true
+  /// for all of the elements in the vector.
+  void ComputeMaskedBits(Value *V,  APInt &KnownZero, APInt &KnownOne,
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0, unsigned Depth = 0);
+  void computeMaskedBitsLoad(const MDNode &Ranges, APInt &KnownZero);
+
+  /// ComputeSignBit - Determine whether the sign bit is known to be zero or
+  /// one.  Convenience wrapper around ComputeMaskedBits.
+  void ComputeSignBit(Value *V, bool &KnownZero, bool &KnownOne,
+                      const DataLayout *TD = 0, unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  /// isKnownToBeAPowerOfTwo - Return true if the given value is known to have
+  /// exactly one bit set when defined. For vectors return true if every
+  /// element is known to be a power of two when defined.  Supports values with
+  /// integer or pointer type and vectors of integers.  If 'OrZero' is set then
+  /// returns true if the given value is either a power of two or zero.
+  bool isKnownToBeAPowerOfTwo(Value *V, bool OrZero = false, unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  /// isKnownNonZero - Return true if the given value is known to be non-zero
+  /// when defined.  For vectors return true if every element is known to be
+  /// non-zero when defined.  Supports values with integer or pointer type and
+  /// vectors of integers.
+  bool isKnownNonZero(Value *V, const DataLayout *TD = 0, unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  /// MaskedValueIsZero - Return true if 'V & Mask' is known to be zero.  We use
+  /// this predicate to simplify operations downstream.  Mask is known to be
+  /// zero for bits that V cannot have.
+  ///
+  /// This function is defined on values with integer type, values with pointer
+  /// type (but only if TD is non-null), and vectors of integers.  In the case
+  /// where V is a vector, the mask, known zero, and known one values are the
+  /// same width as the vector element, and the bit is set only if it is true
+  /// for all of the elements in the vector.
+  bool MaskedValueIsZero(Value *V, const APInt &Mask, 
+                         const DataLayout *TD = 0, unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  
+  /// ComputeNumSignBits - Return the number of times the sign bit of the
+  /// register is replicated into the other bits.  We know that at least 1 bit
+  /// is always equal to the sign bit (itself), but other cases can give us
+  /// information.  For example, immediately after an "ashr X, 2", we know that
+  /// the top 3 bits are all equal to each other, so we return 3.
+  ///
+  /// 'Op' must have a scalar integer type.
+  ///
+  unsigned ComputeNumSignBits(Value *Op, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                              unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  /// ComputeMultiple - This function computes the integer multiple of Base that
+  /// equals V.  If successful, it returns true and returns the multiple in
+  /// Multiple.  If unsuccessful, it returns false.  Also, if V can be
+  /// simplified to an integer, then the simplified V is returned in Val.  Look
+  /// through sext only if LookThroughSExt=true.
+  bool ComputeMultiple(Value *V, unsigned Base, Value *&Multiple,
+                       bool LookThroughSExt = false,
+                       unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  /// CannotBeNegativeZero - Return true if we can prove that the specified FP 
+  /// value is never equal to -0.0.
+  ///
+  bool CannotBeNegativeZero(const Value *V, unsigned Depth = 0);
+
+  /// isBytewiseValue - If the specified value can be set by repeating the same
+  /// byte in memory, return the i8 value that it is represented with.  This is
+  /// true for all i8 values obviously, but is also true for i32 0, i32 -1,
+  /// i16 0xF0F0, double 0.0 etc.  If the value can't be handled with a repeated
+  /// byte store (e.g. i16 0x1234), return null.
+  Value *isBytewiseValue(Value *V);
+    
+  /// FindInsertedValue - Given an aggregrate and an sequence of indices, see if
+  /// the scalar value indexed is already around as a register, for example if
+  /// it were inserted directly into the aggregrate.
+  ///
+  /// If InsertBefore is not null, this function will duplicate (modified)
+  /// insertvalues when a part of a nested struct is extracted.
+  Value *FindInsertedValue(Value *V,
+                           ArrayRef<unsigned> idx_range,
+                           Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+
+  /// GetPointerBaseWithConstantOffset - Analyze the specified pointer to see if
+  /// it can be expressed as a base pointer plus a constant offset.  Return the
+  /// base and offset to the caller.
+  Value *GetPointerBaseWithConstantOffset(Value *Ptr, int64_t &Offset,
+                                          const DataLayout *TD);
+  static inline const Value *
+  GetPointerBaseWithConstantOffset(const Value *Ptr, int64_t &Offset,
+                                   const DataLayout *TD) {
+    return GetPointerBaseWithConstantOffset(const_cast<Value*>(Ptr), Offset,TD);
+  }
+  
+  /// getConstantStringInfo - This function computes the length of a
+  /// null-terminated C string pointed to by V.  If successful, it returns true
+  /// and returns the string in Str.  If unsuccessful, it returns false.  This
+  /// does not include the trailing nul character by default.  If TrimAtNul is
+  /// set to false, then this returns any trailing nul characters as well as any
+  /// other characters that come after it.
+  bool getConstantStringInfo(const Value *V, StringRef &Str,
+                             uint64_t Offset = 0, bool TrimAtNul = true);
+
+  /// GetStringLength - If we can compute the length of the string pointed to by
+  /// the specified pointer, return 'len+1'.  If we can't, return 0.
+  uint64_t GetStringLength(Value *V);
+
+  /// GetUnderlyingObject - This method strips off any GEP address adjustments
+  /// and pointer casts from the specified value, returning the original object
+  /// being addressed.  Note that the returned value has pointer type if the
+  /// specified value does.  If the MaxLookup value is non-zero, it limits the
+  /// number of instructions to be stripped off.
+  Value *GetUnderlyingObject(Value *V, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                             unsigned MaxLookup = 6);
+  static inline const Value *
+  GetUnderlyingObject(const Value *V, const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                      unsigned MaxLookup = 6) {
+    return GetUnderlyingObject(const_cast<Value *>(V), TD, MaxLookup);
+  }
+
+  /// GetUnderlyingObjects - This method is similar to GetUnderlyingObject
+  /// except that it can look through phi and select instructions and return
+  /// multiple objects.
+  void GetUnderlyingObjects(Value *V,
+                            SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &Objects,
+                            const DataLayout *TD = 0,
+                            unsigned MaxLookup = 6);
+
+  /// onlyUsedByLifetimeMarkers - Return true if the only users of this pointer
+  /// are lifetime markers.
+  bool onlyUsedByLifetimeMarkers(const Value *V);
+
+  /// isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute - Return true if the instruction does not
+  /// have any effects besides calculating the result and does not have
+  /// undefined behavior.
+  ///
+  /// This method never returns true for an instruction that returns true for
+  /// mayHaveSideEffects; however, this method also does some other checks in
+  /// addition. It checks for undefined behavior, like dividing by zero or
+  /// loading from an invalid pointer (but not for undefined results, like a
+  /// shift with a shift amount larger than the width of the result). It checks
+  /// for malloc and alloca because speculatively executing them might cause a
+  /// memory leak. It also returns false for instructions related to control
+  /// flow, specifically terminators and PHI nodes.
+  ///
+  /// This method only looks at the instruction itself and its operands, so if
+  /// this method returns true, it is safe to move the instruction as long as
+  /// the correct dominance relationships for the operands and users hold.
+  /// However, this method can return true for instructions that read memory;
+  /// for such instructions, moving them may change the resulting value.
+  bool isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(const Value *V,
+                                    const DataLayout *TD = 0);
+
+  /// isKnownNonNull - Return true if this pointer couldn't possibly be null by
+  /// its definition.  This returns true for allocas, non-extern-weak globals
+  /// and byval arguments.
+  bool isKnownNonNull(const Value *V);
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/Analysis/Verifier.h

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+//===-- llvm/Analysis/Verifier.h - LLVM IR Verifier -------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the function verifier interface, that can be used for some
+// sanity checking of input to the system, and for checking that transformations
+// haven't done something bad.
+//
+// Note that this does not provide full 'java style' security and verifications,
+// instead it just tries to ensure that code is well formed.
+//
+// To see what specifically is checked, look at the top of Verifier.cpp
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_ANALYSIS_VERIFIER_H
+#define LLVM_ANALYSIS_VERIFIER_H
+
+#include <string>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class FunctionPass;
+class Module;
+class Function;
+
+/// @brief An enumeration to specify the action to be taken if errors found.
+///
+/// This enumeration is used in the functions below to indicate what should
+/// happen if the verifier finds errors. Each of the functions that uses
+/// this enumeration as an argument provides a default value for it. The
+/// actions are listed below.
+enum VerifierFailureAction {
+  AbortProcessAction,   ///< verifyModule will print to stderr and abort()
+  PrintMessageAction,   ///< verifyModule will print to stderr and return true
+  ReturnStatusAction    ///< verifyModule will just return true
+};
+
+/// @brief Create a verifier pass.
+///
+/// Check a module or function for validity.  When the pass is used, the
+/// action indicated by the \p action argument will be used if errors are
+/// found.
+FunctionPass *createVerifierPass(
+  VerifierFailureAction action = AbortProcessAction ///< Action to take
+);
+
+/// @brief Check a module for errors.
+///
+/// If there are no errors, the function returns false. If an error is found,
+/// the action taken depends on the \p action parameter.
+/// This should only be used for debugging, because it plays games with
+/// PassManagers and stuff.
+
+bool verifyModule(
+  const Module &M,  ///< The module to be verified
+  VerifierFailureAction action = AbortProcessAction, ///< Action to take
+  std::string *ErrorInfo = 0      ///< Information about failures.
+);
+
+// verifyFunction - Check a function for errors, useful for use when debugging a
+// pass.
+bool verifyFunction(
+  const Function &F,  ///< The function to be verified
+  VerifierFailureAction action = AbortProcessAction ///< Action to take
+);
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif